Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080199073 | Red eye detection in digital images - A red-eye detection methodology is provided in which a likelihood of red-eye is estimated on a pixel by pixel basis for at least a portion of a digital image. Pixels that most likely belong to a red-eye area are identified by applying a red-eye probability model that is built from the statistical analysis of a relatively large set of image samples for which red-eye areas have been subjective segregated from non-red-eye areas. By performing some regular statistical analysis of the segregation results, an estimate for red-eye probability for every pixel in the portion of the image of interest may be generated based solely on the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values of the pixel. | 08-21-2008 |
20080219551 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - The invention discloses an image processing apparatus for adjusting lightness of an input image. The image processing apparatus includes a first processing module, a second processing module, a third processing module, and a fourth processing module. The first processing module is used for generating a lightness histogram with reference to the input image and determining a maximum lightness and an average lightness according to the lightness histogram. The second processing module is used for determining a first gain and a second gain according to the maximum lightness and a look-up table. The third processing module is used for selecting a lightness adjusting curve according to the average lightness. The fourth processing module is used for generating an output lightness corresponding to the input image. | 09-11-2008 |
20080226165 | Apparatus and Method of Creating Composite Lookup Table - A method of creating a composite lookup table referred to when lattice points distributed in a color space of first image data are sequentially converted into lattice points distributed in a color space of second image data by a plurality of conversion profiles. When an input value range to which a next conversion profile can be input is limited, an intermediate value obtained by conversion by a previous conversion profile is adjusted such that the intermediate value is within an input value range of a corresponding lookup table, and is input to the next conversion profile. When the input value range to which the next conversion profile can be input is not limited, the intermediate value obtained by conversion by the previous conversion profile to is input to the next conversion profile without any adjustment. A composite lookup table is created defining correspondences between the lattice points distributed in the color space of the first image data and the lattice points distributed in the color space of the second image data. | 09-18-2008 |
20080226166 | Image signal processing device, image signal processing method and image signal processing program product - By providing an encoded image analysis unit for analyzing an amount of features of images for one screen of inputted encoded image signals, a decoding/regeneration unit for generating regenerative image signals by decoding the encoded image signals and a regenerative image correction unit for correcting the regenerative image signals generated by the decoding/regeneration unit on the basis of the amount of features analyzed by the encoded image analysis unit, an image signal processing device for performing a decoding process, a correction process and the like in order to quickly follow a rapid scene change and clearly display images, its image signal processing method and its image signal processing program product can be provided. | 09-18-2008 |
20080240555 | Two Stage Detection for Photographic Eye Artifacts - A digital image acquisition device is for acquiring digital images including one or more preview images. A face detector analyzes the one or more preview images to ascertain information relating to candidate face regions therein. A speed-optimized filter produces a first set of candidate red-eye regions based on the candidate face region information provided by the face detector. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240556 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus converts a color image signal into a luminance signal and a color signal in a predetermined color space ( | 10-02-2008 |
20080240557 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR RESTORING COLOR AND ENHANCING ELECTRONIC IMAGES - Methods and apparatuses for color image restoration and enhancement. In at least one embodiment, color signals for individual channels of an image (e.g., red, green, or blue) are adjusted based on a weighted set of averages (e.g., of the entire image, the center portion, the surrounding portion, or other portions). In one example, pixels with extreme values of color signals (e.g., pure black or white pixels) are ignored for the purposes of restoring color; and, the different averages are weighted according to the pixel location (e.g., the distance from the pixel to a center point). In one example, after color restoration for individual channels, the luminance of each pixel is adjusted back to their original levels; and the range of luminance of the image is further adjusted to provide improved brightness and contrast, where in determining the luminance the red, green and blue color channels are given an equal weight. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240558 | Method of automated image color calibration - A method of automated image calibration that corrects for non-uniform illumination and calibrates color that is simple, fast, automated, accurate and reliable. A gray balance algorithm is applied to correct for non-uniform illumination and a color calibration algorithm is then applied to calibrate the human subject data. The system has been applied in multiple clinical sites with different instruments. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240559 | ADAPTIVE INTERPOLATION WITH ARTIFACT REDUCTION OF IMAGES - An adaptive interpolation technique with artifact reduction is described that technique generates digital images with full-color RGB (red, green, blue) information, from raw pictures (e.g., Bayer-mosaiced single-color images) created by single-CCD digital cameras. The technique employs an improved criterion for choosing the interpolation criterion, which takes into account an output interpolated value. It employs small changes to filter coefficients, for better results and accommodation of “correction attenuation”. In one embodiment, the technique further employs a “correction attenuation” step, which reduces “color sprinkling” artifacts for certain kinds of diagonal edges. The technique makes only a single pass over the image; all colors are interpolated during that pass, vice the multiple passes required by other better performing algorithms (in some cases over ten). | 10-02-2008 |
20080247642 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - In conventional technology, it is likely that good image quality cannot be obtained because various image processing such as color processing or halftone processing (dithering processing and error diffusion processing, for example) which differs from desired processing is executed in the trapping processing or black overprint processing. The present invention has an object of obtaining desire good image quality in the trapping processing or black overprint processing, and is characterized by having a means for or a step of generating attribute information for each color plate before or during the image transforming processing. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247643 | Image processing method, image processing program and image processor - An image processing method for converting a first image, which is expressed in a calorimetric system made up of a plurality of color components and is constituted of a plurality of pixels each holding color information corresponding to a single color component, to a second image constituted with a plurality of pixels all holding color information corresponding to at least one common color component, includes: a color difference information generation step in which color difference information is generated by using color information in the first image; a color gradient analysis step in which a color gradient indicating an extent of color change is determined based upon the color difference information having been generated; and an image conversion step in which the first image is converted to the second image based upon the color gradient having been determined. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253649 | Image output color management system and method - Disclosed is an image color management system and method for controlling an image output device. The method for controlling the image output device comprises generating an image output device profile LUT (look-up-table) characterizing the color profile of the image output device for a plurality of drift states associated with the image output device; generating a set of augmented basis vectors representing the LUT, L*a*b* values and multiple GCR/UCRs; storing the set of basis vectors in an image output device controller; and generating an image output device active profile associated with a current drift state of the image output device to convert image color data for display or printing by the image output device, wherein the image output device active profile is generated from the set of basis vectors. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253650 | Image Processing Device, Image Processing Method, Image Processing Program Product, and Image-Capturing Device - An image processing device includes: a parameter calculation unit that obtains a plurality of values based on a plurality of different conversion parameters for a pixel in image data; a weighting unit that performs predetermined weighting on the plurality of values obtained by the parameter calculation unit; and a gradation correction unit that performs gradation correction of the image data based on a result of the weighting by the weighting unit. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253651 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - The color of a tooth image region is corrected so as not to form an unnatural face image. To this end, a first image region corresponding to teeth is detected from the image. A second image region corresponding to a face portion other than the teeth is detected from the image. Then, the color of the first image region is corrected based on the feature amounts of the colors of the first and second image regions. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253652 | METHOD OF DEMOSAICING A DIGITAL MOSAICED IMAGE - In one example embodiment, a method enables, computing, for a first pixel in the digital mosaiced image, the first pixel being characterized by a first color component and a first set of gradient values in a plurality of orientations, gradient values in the plurality of orientations for a second pixel in the neighborhood of the first pixel. Color values in the plurality of orientations corresponding to a second color component associated with the first pixel based on the set of first gradient values are estimated. The first set of gradient values based at least in part on the computed gradient values is updated. One of the plurality of orientations of the estimated color value based on the updated set of first gradient values is selected and one of the estimated color values corresponding to the selected orientation is determined. | 10-16-2008 |
20080260245 | Image processing apparatus, imaging apparatus and recording medium storing image processing program - An image processing apparatus includes an image input section, an image segmenting section, a correcting section and a determining section. The image input section loads an input image data. The image segmenting section segments the image data into a main area containing an image of a main subject and a non-main area other than the main area. The correcting section corrects a color of the main area based on a color of the non-main area. The determining section determines a variance of hue of the non-main area. In the above-stated constitution, the correcting section enhances the correction of the color of the main area when the variance of hue of the non-main area is small compared to a case when the variance is large. | 10-23-2008 |
20080260246 | COLOR PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A color processing method includes outputting, via an image output device, a chart image in which a plurality of images obtained by applying illuminant corrections corresponding to a plurality of different illuminants to images corresponding to a plurality of representative colors are arranged in a predetermined layout, receiving a user's instruction to select one of the illuminant corrections corresponding to one of the plurality of different illuminants based on the output chart image, and setting the selected illuminant correction to be applied to an original image, wherein the plurality of representative colors are memory colors. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267496 | METHOD FOR CREATING AND PRESENTING A DYNAMIC MULTI-MEDIA VISUAL DISPLAY - Various embodiments of this invention are directed toward a system and method for creating and displaying a dynamic multi-media visual display. In various embodiments of the invention, images are selected and digitally recorded. The images are then deconstructed and manipulated into a series of iterations. The iterations are then placed in a selected sequence and transitioned in an evolutionary manner from one to another in order to create the final sequence of images and the final dynamic multi-media visual display. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273793 | SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD, NOISE REDUCTION APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM THEREFOR - A signal processing apparatus including: a first noise reduction processing means that performs first noise reduction processing on an image, in which each of multitudes of pixels has one of a plurality of color components and the color components are distributed regularly, based only on pixel arrangement to obtain a first processed image; a color component separation means that separates the first processed image into each of the color components to obtain a plurality of color component images; and a signal classification means that compares a signal value of a target pixel for processing with a signal value of each pixel included in a predetermined range of area around the target pixel and classifies each pixel within the predetermined range of area into one of a plurality of groups based on the comparison result. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273794 | USER ADJUSTABLE GAMUT MAPPING AND CONVERSION OF IMAGES FROM A SOURCE COLOR SPACE TO A DESTINATION COLOR SPACE INCLUDING PRIMARY AND REDUNDANT COLORS - A method and software for converting a digital representation of a reference image to a preferred representation having higher chroma in selected subject areas. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279451 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - In order to match the color appearance of the display image on a monitor to that of a print image, the white point of the monitor and that of the viewing light upon viewing the print image are obtained, and a white point upon viewing the display image on the monitor and that upon viewing the print image are calculated using the white point of the monitor, that of the viewing light, and a reference white point. An input color is corrected using the calculated white points. At this time, as the reference white point, a white color which the human visual system perceives as white is used. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285850 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOVAL OF RED EYE EFFECTS - A method of performing red eye correction in an image including storing a high resolution image on a server computer, transmitting a low resolution image derived from the high resolution image, from the server computer to a client computer, displaying the low resolution image on a display device connected to the client computer, receiving from a user an indication of a selected location within the displayed low resolution image, partially automatically defining an outline of an area in the low resolution image within which area red eye correction is to be carried out, by the client computer, based on the user's selected location, carrying out red eye correction on the low resolution image only within the area, by the client computer, and transmitting parameters of the area from the client computer to the server computer. A system is also described and claimed. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285851 | COLOR CORRECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS OF DISPLAY APPARATUS - The invention discloses a color correction method for adjusting the color performance of a display apparatus. The color correction method first displays a plurality of images on a panel of the display apparatus and measures the chromatic value and the luminance of each image so as to obtain the color characteristics of the display apparatus. According to the color characteristics, a corresponding color matrix is generated which is located at the CIE XYZ color space. Next, an output matrix is outputted by performing an operation between the color matrix and a gain matrix. Next, the elements in gain matrix are adjusted in order to have the output matrix be equal to a target matrix substantially. Finally, the display apparatus is set for calibrating the color performance thereof in accordance with the elements of the adjusted gain matrix. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285852 | PREFERENCE COLOR ADJUSTING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A preference color adjusting system includes a saturation calculator, a hue calculator, a first lookup table device, a second lookup table device, a mixer, and a UV converter. The saturation calculator receives an RGB pixel and produces a saturation of the pixel. The hue calculator receives the RGB pixel and produces a hue of the pixel. The first lookup table device stores plural first adjustment coefficient pairs for outputting a first adjustment coefficient pair according to the hue. The second lookup table device stores plural second adjustment coefficient pairs for outputting a second adjustment coefficient pair according to the hue. The mixer performs a weighting operation on the first and second adjustment coefficient pairs according to the saturation to thereby output an output coefficient pair. The UV converter adjusts U and V values of a YUV pixel corresponding to the RGB pixel according to the output coefficient pair. | 11-20-2008 |
20080292183 | DETECTING RED EYE FILTER AND APPARATUS USING META-DATA - A method of filtering a red-eye phenomenon from an acquired digital image including a multiplicity of pixels indicative of color, the pixels forming various shapes of the image, includes analyzing meta-data information, determining one or more regions within the digital image suspected as including red eye artifact, and determining, based at least in part on the meta-data analysis, whether the regions are actual red eye artifact. The meta-data information may include information describing conditions under which the image was acquired, captured and/or digitized, acquisition device-specific information, and/film information. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298678 | CHROMATIC ABERRATION CORRECTION - A chromatic aberration (CA) correction technique is presented that substantially removes CA from an image captured by a digital camera. In general, the effects of any in-camera sharpening are reversed by applying a blurring kernel. The image is then super-sampled to approximate its state prior to the application of in-camera sampling. One of the color channels is designated as a reference channel, and an objective function is established for each of the non-reference channels. The reference color channel is assumed to be CA-free, while the objective functions are used to compute the unknown CA parameters for each non-reference channel. These sets are used in a CA removal function to substantially remove the CA associated with each of the non-reference channels. The image is then sampled to return it to its original resolution, and a sharpening filter is applied if needed to undo the effects of the previously applied blurring kernel. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298679 | DETECTING RED EYE FILTER AND APPARAUS USING META-DATA - A method of filtering a red-eye phenomenon from an acquired digital image including a multiplicity of pixels indicative of color, the pixels forming various shapes of the image, includes analyzing meta-data information, determining one or more regions within the digital image suspected as including red eye artifact, and determining, based at least in part on the meta-data analysis, whether the regions are actual red eye artifact. The meta-data information may include information describing conditions under which the image was acquired, captured and/or digitized, acquisition device-specific information, and/ film information. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304739 | Color adjustment apparatus and computer-readable medium - A color adjustment apparatus includes a subspace setting unit, a non-adjustment region setting unit and a color adjustment unit. The subspace setting unit sets a subspace in a color space. The subspace includes an adjustment subject color, which is an adjustment source, and a target color representing an adjustment destination. The non-adjustment region setting unit sets a non-adjustment region in the color space. A color adjustment is not performed in the non-adjustment region. The color adjustment unit performs the color adjustment for colors in the subspace set by the subspace setting unit, based on a reference vector directing from the adjustment subject color to the target color. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310711 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - An image processing apparatus, includes: a contrast enhancer which changes a color coordinate value of a color correction region in an image signal, which corresponds to a color to be corrected within the image signal, to a corrected color coordinate value in a range to perform a color correction; and a controller which determines a difference between the color coordinate values before and after the color correction by the contrast enhancer, and controls the contrast enhancer to output the image signal having the unchanged color coordinate value if the difference is greater than or equal to a reference value. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310712 | Method and system to detect and correct whiteness with a digital image - A method and system to detect and correct teeth whiteness within a digital image is disclosed. Many images would be more aesthetically pleasing if the teeth of individuals within the image were whitened to reduce discoloration. In one embodiment of the present invention, the teeth of individuals within a digital image are automatically detected. The color of the teeth are then whitened to a more aesthetically pleasing level. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310713 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS - An image processing method aims to optimally improve a brightness distribution with respect to brightness of a face being a main subject of a person image. Thus, the method consists of: a brightness component extraction step of extracting a brightness component from image data; a low-frequency brightness component extraction step of extracting a low-frequency component signal of the brightness component as a low-frequency brightness component; a color adjustment step of performing color adjustment to the image data by using the brightness component and the low-frequency brightness component; a first parameter determination step of determining a first parameter; and a second parameter determination step of determining a second parameter in accordance with a distribution of brightness component values in a second area in the image data, wherein the color adjustment step causes processing a degree of the color adjustment according to the first and second parameters. | 12-18-2008 |
20080317338 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus that suppresses occurrences of color conversions not intended by the user. Information on affected regions for individual color conversion processes applied to an image is stored in the information processing apparatus. The information processing apparatus determines whether or not the affected region of a color conversion process that the user is attempting to apply overlap an affected region of a color conversion process that has already been applied, and if so, informs the user by, for example, displaying the affected regions on a chromaticity diagram. | 12-25-2008 |
20080317339 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RED-EYE DETECTION USING PREVIEW OR OTHER REFERENCE IMAGES - A method for red-eye detection in an acquired digital image acquiring one or more preview or other reference images without a flash. Any red regions that exist within the one or more reference images are determined. A main image is acquired with a flash of approximately a same scene as the one or more reference images. The main image is analyzed to determine any candidate red eye defect regions that exist within the main image. Any red regions determined to exist within the one or more reference images are compared with any candidate red eye defect regions determined to exist within the main image. Any candidate red eye defect regions within the main image corresponding to red regions determined also to exist within the one or more reference images are removed as candidate red eye defect regions. | 12-25-2008 |
20080317340 | Method and apparatus for correcting preferred color and liquid crystal display device using the same - A method and apparatus for correcting a preferred color, which is capable of correcting the preferred color in consideration of an input image and the visual characteristics of a person by correcting differences between colors preferred by the person and an average color coordinate of a color to be corrected in the input image, and a liquid crystal display device using the same are disclosed. The method for correcting a preferred color includes converting data of an input image into lightness (L), chroma (C) and hue (H) data, detecting a preferred-color pixel from the input image, calculating average values of the L, C and H data of the preferred-color pixel, correcting the C and H data of the preferred-color pixel according to differences between the average values of the C and H data and reference values of the C and H data, correcting the L data of the preferred-color pixel according to the average value of the L data according to the hue of the preferred-color pixel, and inversely converting the corrected L, C and H data into image data. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003695 | METHOD AND CIRCUIT FOR CORRECTING SIGNALS AND IMAGE CORRECTING METHOD AND CIRCUIT USING THE SAME - A signal correcting method and a circuit thereof are provided. In the method, first, the values of a plurality of input signals are clamped to generate a plurality of corresponding clamping signals according to a plurality of adjustable predetermined values. Then, a combined multiplication operation is performed to the clamping signals according to the coefficients in a matrix obtained by multiplying the coefficients in at least two predetermined correcting matrixes, so as to output a plurality of results. Next, the results are respectively clamped according to a plurality of corresponding predetermined thresholds so as to output the corrected input signals. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003696 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - One embodiment of the present invention is to provide an image processing method and an image processing apparatus which can also handle data other than a standard color space and can also handle a case in which the color space of an image color adjustment processing section and that of an image color conversion processing section are different from each other. In one embodiment of the present invention, predetermined color conversion is performed on an image in a first color space, and a first color conversion table defined in the first color space is generated. Next, based on the first color conversion table, a second color conversion table defined in a second color space is generated. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003697 | Non-linear tone mapping apparatus and method and computer readable medium stored thereon computer executable instructions for performing the method - The present invention provides non-linear tone mapping apparatus and method and a computer readable medium stored thereon computer executable instructions for performing the method. The non-linear tone mapping apparatus according to the present invention comprises a luminance value computing unit for computing a luminance value of each pixel of an object image using an image information of each pixel; a computing unit for computing a light adaptive value of each pixel using the image information and luminance value of each pixel, the light adaptive value representing the degree of response to brightness of the image in the image information of each pixel; and a converting unit for converting the image information of each pixel of the object image using a ratio of the image information of each pixel to the light adaptive value. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010535 | Image Processing Device, Image Processing Program, and Image Processing Method - An image processing device that transforms first image data of an image captured under an image-capturing condition into second image data that reproduce a color appearance under a viewing condition, includes: an image data acquiring unit that acquires the first image data of the image captured under the image-capturing condition; a first transformation unit that transforms the acquired first image data into the second image data pixel by pixel based on the image-capturing condition and the viewing condition by a first method that takes into consideration chromatic adaptation; a second transformation unit that transforms the acquired first image data into the second image data pixel by pixel based on the image-capturing condition and the viewing condition by a second method that is simpler than the first method and takes into consideration chromatic adaptation; and a controlling unit that controls such that either the first transformation unit or the second transformation unit is selected depending on a state of a transformation target pixel or a neighborhood pixel neighboring the transformation target pixel in the first image data. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010536 | COLOR CONVERSION DEVICE, METHOD OF COLOR CONVERSION, IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM AND PROGRAM - A correction profile acquisition part calculates a correction coordinate value based on a standard coordinate value stored in standard profiles color-matched to a predetermined printer to store the correction coordinate value in correction profiles. A color conversion processing part uses the correction profiles to convert input image data into CMYK data. The correction coordinate value is increased in black (K) component value and decreased in cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y) component values, as compared with the yet-to-be-corrected coordinate value (or the standard coordinate value). A color difference between the correction coordinate value and the standard coordinate value stored in the standard profiles is less than a predetermined value. Thus, the CMYK data obtained by the conversion using the correction profiles is color-matched to the printer, and requires a smaller amount of ink for printing. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010537 | IMAGE DISPLAY PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM, AND IMAGE DISPLAY PROCESSING METHOD - An image display processing apparatus receives input illuminant information relating to input illuminant illuminating object when photographing, input device information specifying input characteristic of a photographing device, and image signal. Spectral reflectance image signal of the object is obtained from the image signal, the input illuminant information, and the input device information. Rendering light is applied to the spectral reflectance image signal, and output to a display device. A spectrum of light emitted from a variable characteristic illumination device for illuminating a display viewing environment can be varied. Spectrum of observing illuminant illuminating the display viewing environment is measured by a spectrometer unit. A spectrum of the rendering light is determined to substantially match with a spectrum of the input illuminant. The spectrum of the light emitted from the variable characteristic illumination device may be adjusted to substantially match the spectra of both the rendering light and the observing illuminant. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010538 | Apparatus and method for automatically computing gamma correction curve - The present invention relates to apparatus and method for automatically computing a gamma correction curve. The apparatus according to the present invention comprises an image obtaining unit for receiving an input image data of a color chart through an image interface; a coordinate calculating unit for measuring input brightness values of a plurality of ROIs (Regions of Interest) of the input image and comparing an input brightness value of each ROI with a preset target brightness value of each ROI to calculate gamma correction coordinates for a plurality of points of a gamma correction curve; and a curve computing unit for applying interpolation to a plurality of the calculated gamma correction coordinates to compute a gamma correction curve. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010539 | Method and relative device of color interpolation of an image acquired by a digital color sensor - A method calculates statistical parameters in function of stochastic momentums of the pixel intensities of a same primary color or complementary hue of a first working window (2k+1)×(2k+1), and of at least a second working window of smaller size, both centered on the pixel to be filtered and in choosing, as a function of the values of these statistical parameters, for each pixel of the color image to be filtered, the most appropriate filtering algorithm for enhancing as much as possible the contour sharpness and reducing noise and artifacts. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016602 | COLOR REPRODUCING DEVICE - A multi-spectral camera is provided which includes an image pickup optical system which forms an image of a subject. A wavelength selecting device receives light beams from the image pickup optical system and outputs a light beam having a selected wavelength. A wavelength switching device selectively switches the selected wavelength of the wavelength selecting device. An image pickup element receives the light beam output from the wavelength selecting device and outputs image data. A spectroscope receives the light beams from the image pickup optical system and outputs spectral data. And a subject characteristic calculating unit calculates a spectral data characteristic of the subject from the spectral data output from the spectroscope. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022395 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF ENHANCING COLOR OF IMAGE - An apparatus and method of enhancing color of image is provided. The apparatus for enhancing color of image including: a saturation enhancement unit to enhance a saturation of an input image using a saturation variation according to a brightness feature of the input image; a gray scale area protection unit to determine a final saturation variation depending on a saturation value of the input image and the saturation variation, and to prevent a saturation enhancement of a gray scale area; a color control unit to control a color of the input image using a color variation according to the brightness feature of the input image; and a brightness value correction unit to correct a difference between a resultant brightness value and an input brightness value of the input image, the resultant brightness value being generated by applying the final saturation variation and the color variation to the input image. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022396 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM, PROGRAM, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - The present invention executes color correction that improves the feeling of depth of a 2D image with ease and by using a preexisting device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028431 | COLOR ADJUSTING APPARATUS, IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, COLOR ADJUSTING METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The color adjusting apparatus is provided with: a color signal receiving part that receives input of color signals; a distribution density calculating part that calculates a distribution density in a certain color space concerning the color signals received by the color signal receiving part; an adjustment range setting part that sets an adjustment range where the color signals are adjusted in the color space on the basis of the distribution density calculated by the distribution density calculating part; and a color adjusting part that adjusts the color signals included in the adjustment range set by the adjustment range setting part. | 01-29-2009 |
20090034836 | Image Processing Apparatus, Image Processing Method, and Computer Readable Recording Medium Stored with Image Processing Program - The image processing apparatus displays an image based on image data and identifies a focal position designated by a user within the displayed image. Next, the image processing apparatus creates patch image data equipped with patches indicating a plurality of candidates of output density after density adjustment using a tone curve based on the image data at the focal position. The image processing apparatus then outputs the image data and the patch image data. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034837 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing method is a method for correcting both an image quality of an overall image and an image quality of a partial image with excellent balance. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034838 | DEVICE ADAPTIVELY SWITCHING COLOR EMPHASIS PROCESSING FOR IMAGE - The present invention provides an image processing device which adaptively switches between emphasis of a specified color in an image and emphasis of the entire image. The image processing device of the present invention includes: a storage unit storing a plurality of color emphasis tables for emphasizing a specified color; a calculation unit calculating magnitudes of respective color emphasis effects when the plurality of color emphasis tables stored by the storage unit is applied to the image; a selection unit selecting one or more color emphasis tables according to the magnitudes of the color emphasis effects; and a correction unit correcting the specified color in the image by applying the color emphasis tables selected by the selection unit to the image. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034839 | Intelligent hardware for detecting color value of an image - Pixel characteristics, such as whether a pixel forms part of the background of an image, are evaluated by computing histograms from pixel color space components, by comparing pixel color space components to threshold values, or by other methods. | 02-05-2009 |
20090041346 | Image processing apparatus capable of accurately removing isolated point noise, image processing method, and computer readable medium - An isolated point detection portion detects an isolated point in image data input from an image data adjustment portion. An isolated point removal portion makes a replacement of image data at a point of an isolated point detected by the isolated point detection portion. An edge identification portion performs edge identification for identifying a character region for the image data from which the isolated point has been removed by the isolated point removal portion. In this technique, edge identification is performed after the isolated point is erased by performing isolated point identification as a preliminary step of edge identification, so that isolated point noise can be removed with high accuracy. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041347 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An amount of color correction of a facial region is modified based on changes caused in face average values by white balance correction. Also, the amount of color correction of the facial region is modified according to luminance of pixels of interest to perform optimum color correction on the facial region and a highlight region. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041348 | IMAGE DISPLAY APPARATUS, AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IMAGES - An image display apparatus, and an apparatus for and a method of image processing are provided that can reduce in real time a quantization noise in an image signal received by the image display apparatus. The image processor apparatus includes a variation calculator that calculates, as a variation B of grayscale, a difference in a grayscale value between adjacent pixels in a single dimension in a spatial direction, of an image signal A; a variation limiter that limits a range of a possible value of the variation B calculated by the variation calculator; a gradient determination unit that calculates a gradient of grayscale of image signals from the variation C having the value limited; an additional bit generator that generates an additional bit, based on the image signal grayscale gradient calculated by the gradient determination unit; a bit adder that adds to the image signals the additional-bit-generator-generated additional bit, to output the additional-bit-added image signals; and a display unit that displays an image based on an image signal to be output from the bit adder. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046927 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING NOISE IN IMAGE - An exemplary method for reducing noise in an image is disclosed. The image comprises a number of pixels including a current pixel that contains noise. The method comprises: measuring a value of each of the pixels; calculating a number of variances of value of a number of pixel areas, each of which includes the current pixel and lies in a unique orientation with respect to the current pixel, based on the measured values; calculating the mean of value of the pixel area associated with the current pixel and having the smallest variance of value, based on the measured values; and replacing the value of the current pixel with the calculated mean of value. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046928 | Auto white balance method - An auto white balance method includes converting a color space of an input image from an RGB color space into the Commission International de I'Eclairage (CIE) L*a*b* color space, determining at least a portion of pixels of the input image, assumed that a reference white color is changed, in a range of a predetermined L*a*b* value as pixels to be used for estimating the reference white color, determining averages of an L* value, an a* value, a b* value of the determined pixels to be used for estimating the reference white color as a reference white color estimation value, and calculating a color gain to move the reference white color estimation value to a target value for a predetermined white balance. | 02-19-2009 |
20090052773 | COLOR CONVERTING APPARATUS, PROGRAM, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A color converting apparatus which is used to correct the hue shift without narrowing the color reproduction region, has a small circuit scale, and does not need many memory resources. A primary area detector | 02-26-2009 |
20090052774 | Image processing apparatus, image display apparatus, and image display method - A maximum and minimum color information detection means ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052775 | Method and apparatus for simultaneously reducing various kinds of noises from image - Provided are a method and apparatus for simultaneously reducing various kinds of noises in an image output from an image sensor equipped to a camera. The image noise reducing method includes: determining a color reference value, which corresponds to a corrected value of the color value of a current pixel, based on the difference values between the color value of the current pixel among pixels of an image and the color values of neighboring pixels around the current pixel; determining unified filter kernel coefficients, which represent the weights of the current pixel and the neighboring pixels, based on the similarities between the determined color reference value and the color values of the neighboring pixels; and reducing a noise in the color value of the current pixel by weighted-averaging the color value of the current pixel and the color values of the neighboring pixels using the unified filter kernel coefficients. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052776 | COLOR CORRECTION APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - The present invention relates to color correction of video signals from a plurality of cameras. The apparatus has a correction order that defines a plurality of camera pairs and an order of the camera pairs, where each camera pair specifies a reference camera and a target camera. In the correction order, each camera is treated as a target camera at least one time, and the reference camera is treated as the target camera in a previous camera pair except for the first camera pair. The apparatus corrects a value of each pixel in a target image captured by the target camera based on a reference image captured by the reference camera, and replaces the target image by the corrected target image, for each camera pair in accordance with the order of the camera pairs. | 02-26-2009 |
20090060326 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An objective color for a target color is set based on characteristic of the target color on a hue area to which the target color belongs in a color space represented by lightness, chroma and hue, and a shape of the most outer point of a color gamut reproducible by an output device on the hue area. A correction coefficient is calculated based on lightness, chroma and hue of the target color, lightness, chroma and hue of the objective color, a distance between the most outer point and the target color in the color space, and a distance between the most outer point and the objective color in the color space. A color correction quantity of each pixel of the image is calculated based on a distance between the target color and the objective color in the color space, a distance between the target color and a color of each pixel in the color space, the correction coefficient, and lightness and chroma of each pixel. The color of each pixel is corrected based on the color correction quantity. | 03-05-2009 |
20090067710 | Apparatus and method of restoring an image - A method and apparatus for restoring an image. The method includes extracting predetermined channels from image data including a plurality of channels; and restoring the extracted channels using a first filter. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067711 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - Color processing is performed for an image such that more preferable color representation can be obtained under viewing environments having different viewing conditions. Hence, a setting unit inputs a plurality of viewing conditions of the output side of an image. A calculation unit sets a viewing condition used to calculate an ambient light parameter, based on the plurality of viewing conditions, and calculates an ambient light parameter based on the set viewing condition. A conversion unit performs inverse conversion of a color appearance model to color data by using the ambient light parameter. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067712 | Image processing apparatus, image forming apparatus, and image processing method - An image processing apparatus includes an input control unit that receives an input of image data and a first image-processing unit that performs first image processing on image data received from an image reading unit thereby obtaining first-processed image data. A first output control unit selectively-outputs the first-processed image data to any of the input control unit and an external storage unit. A second image-processing unit receives the first-processed image data from the input control unit and performs second image processing on the first-processed image data thereby obtaining second-processed image data, and a second output control unit outputs the second-processed image data. | 03-12-2009 |
20090080772 | Radiometric Calibration from a Single Image - Radiometric calibration of an image capture device (e.g., a digital camera) using a single image is described. The single image may be a color image or a grayscale image. The calibration identifies and analyzes edge pixels of the image that correspond to an edge between two colors or grayscale levels of a scene. Intensity distributions of intensities measured from the single image are then analyzed. An inverse response function for the image capture device is determined based on the intensity distributions. For a color image, the radiometric calibration involves calculating an inverse response function that maps measured blended colors of edge pixels and the associated measured component colors into linear distributions. For a grayscale image, the radiometric calibration involves deriving an inverse response function that maps non-uniform histograms of measured intensities into uniform distributions of calibrated intensities. | 03-26-2009 |
20090087090 | Methods And Apparatus For Assessing And Monitoring The Capability And Quality Of A color Reproduction System - A color reproduction system comprises a color imaging output device (e.g., monitor, printer, etc.) and its device characterization (e.g., ICC profile, device link, etc.). A method for assessing the capability and accuracy of a color reproduction system is presented. This method may be used to assess the fit between a color reproduction system and its intended use (e.g., proofing, production, etc.). In addition, it may be used to monitor the color accuracy of a color reproduction system over time, thus informing users of the need to recalibrate and/or recharacterize the system. | 04-02-2009 |
20090087091 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - When converting image data constituted by a plurality of objects to data for an output device, color appearances of object images specified as a same output color are set so as to not vary even when their respective background colors vary. A color appearance model forward conversion section uses forward conversion of a color appearance model to calculate target appearance colors, which are targets of appearances of objects based on color information of the objects. A surrounding adaptive background color obtaining section generates surrounding adaptive background colors based on pixels around a pixel of interest for object images that have undergone rendering. Then, output pixel values of the pixel of interest are calculated by a color appearance model reverse conversion section using reverse conversion of the color appearance model based on the target appearance color and the surrounding adaptive background colors. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092316 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An image processing system and method include allowing an output device to output patch-data items of plural multi-order colors represented by a first color space, measuring the color values, in an absolute color space, of the output patch-data items, calculating reference values by converting the plural multi-order colors represented by the first color space based on a first color conversion table containing correspondence between the first color space and the absolute color space, calculating distances between the color values measured by the color measuring means and the reference values, which correspond thereto, and correcting, based on the calculated distances, a second color conversion table containing correspondence between the absolute color space and an output color space. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097744 | System and Process for Color-Balancing a Series of Oblique Images - An automated process for color-balancing a series of oblique images captured from one or more positions and from one or more orientations. The automated process includes the step of selecting a series of color-balanced images to use as reference images. Then, on an oblique image by image basis (1) a portion(s) of a reference image(s) that overlaps the oblique image is located, (2) multiple color-balancing transformations are created that approximately matches the color distribution of the oblique image to the color distribution of the overlapping portion(s) of the reference image(s), (3) pixels in the oblique image are transformed according to the multiple color-balancing transformations created for that oblique image; and (4) the transformed pixel value is transformed in the oblique image or a copy of the oblique image. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097745 | METHOD OF PERFORMING ROBUST AUTO WHITE BALANCE - Disclosed herein is a method of performing robust white balance. The method includes a first process of dividing an input image into blocks, a second process of selecting blocks having higher color errors, and calculating average RGB values of the selected blocks, a third process of selecting a specific top percentage of bright blocks, and calculating the average RGB values of these selected blocks, a fourth process of calculating average RGB values through color clustering, a fifth process of converting the average RGB values into CIE xyY color space, a sixth process of calculating the Euclidean distances between the x and y values of standard light sources in a color space and the x and y values of the average RGB values in CIE xyY color space, and selecting an average RGB value having the shortest Euclidean distance (Ed), and a seventh process of calculating white balance gain values using the selected average RGB value, and correcting the input image using the balance gain values. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103804 | METHOD FOR COLOR TRANSIENT IMPROVEMENT AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for color transient improvement includes generating an angle value according to an included angle of two color components in a specific color space domain, and generating a transient enhancement signal according to the angle value. Furthermore, a color transient improvement circuit is provided. The color transient improvement circuit includes an angle calculator for generating an angle value according to an included angle of two color components in a specific color space domain, and a processor coupled to the angle calculator for generating a transient enhancement signal according to the angle value. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103805 | Color correction method and apparatus of RGB signal - A color correction method of an RGB signal includes the following steps. First, an original RGB-coordinate point in an RGB color space is defined according to the RGB signal, and a reference plane is obtained according to the original RGB-coordinate point. The original RGB-coordinate point locates on the reference plane, all points on the reference plane have the same value with the original RGB-coordinate point, and the reference lane is orthogonal to a value axis. Next, an intersection point of the value axis and the reference plane is defined as an origin of the reference plane. Afterwards, the hue, saturation and value of the RGB signal are independently and continuously adjusted respectively by rotating the original RGB-coordinate point around the value axis, moving the original RGB-coordinate point towards to or away from the origin and shifting the original RGB-coordinate point along the value axis to obtain a new RGB-coordinate point. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103806 | Adjustment for output image of image data - When a memory card is inserted into a slot, the control circuit of a color printer obtains image output control information from a memory card and analyzes it. When auto light source is not set as the light source, the CPU references the reference values and coefficients for the characteristics parameters except for color balance and performs correction, and then adjusts the image data image quality to reflect the post-correction characteristics parameters. As a result, it is possible to automatically adjust the image quality of image data without losing the selectively set output conditions. | 04-23-2009 |
20090116740 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing method for individually processing an image of each pixel unit is provided. A red-green-blue color space signal to be input to a pixel unit is transformed into a first brightness signal. The red-green-blue color space signal includes a first red signal, a first green signal and a first blue signal. The first brightness signal is transformed into a second brightness signal to obtain a contrast factor, wherein the contrast factor is a ratio of the second brightness signal and the first brightness signal. The first red signal, the first green signal and the first blue signal are multiplied by the contrast factor to obtain a second red signal, a second green signal and a second blue signal. The second red signal, the second green signal and the second blue signal are performed by color enhancement to obtain a high contrast and colorful image. | 05-07-2009 |
20090123067 | Gradation correction characteristics evaluation device, image processing device, gradation correction characteristics evaluation method, image processing method, and computer-readable computer program product - A gradation correction characteristics evaluation device includes: a histogram creation unit that creates a histogram based upon pixel values indicated at pixels constituting an input image; and an evaluation unit that evaluates gradation correction characteristics, which is used to correct gradation of the image, based upon the histogram of the image having been created by the histogram creation unit and the gradation correction characteristics. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129669 | Brightness correction for image - A CPU determines whether or not a picked up image that corresponds to image data is a backlit portrait image by analyzing the image data on a pixel-by-pixel basis, and if the picked up image that corresponds to the image data is determined to be a backlit portrait image, then executes a brightness correction for backlit portrait image. The CPU obtains a tone curve that may have an output value of a predetermined value FV as an output value in response to an input value of a flesh-colored pixel average luminance value PV ave, which is an average luminance value of flesh-colored pixels of all pixels that constitute the image data. The CPU applies the tone curve to the luminance of every pixel in the image data and thereby executes the brightness correction. | 05-21-2009 |
20090136127 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REMOVING COLOR NOISE OF DIGITAL IMAGE - There is provided an apparatus for removing color noise including: a color interpolation unit performing color interpolation on a bayer pattern image output from an image sensor; a high-pass filter unit performing high-pass filtering on each of the pixels of the bayer pattern image to generate high-pass filtered values of each of the pixels; a high frequency region determining unit comparing pixel values of a target pixel, from which color noise is removed, and pixels adjacent to the target pixel with the high-pass filtered values to determine whether the target pixel is included in a high frequency region; and a color noise region determining unit using differences between color values of the target pixel interpolated by the color interpolation unit and determining whether the target pixel is included in a color noise region when it is determined that the target pixel is included in the high frequency region. | 05-28-2009 |
20090136128 | Automatic Color Adjustment of a Template Design - The present invention generates a color template design. According to one aspect, a source image is selected. Colors of a selected template design are adjusted automatically based on placement of a cursor on a source image that is separate from the template design. The adjusted color on the template design may match the color of the source image. Alternatively, a color template design system may be configured to adjust the color to a contrast or any predetermined variation of the color of the source image. The system may display the selected template design after automatically adjusting colors and store the selected template design for use as a template. The template design may include a framing portion, a mat portion, a foreground portion, and a background portion and at least one of those portions may be adjusted based on the placement of the cursor on the source image. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141975 | IMAGE SENSOR APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCENE ILLUMINANT ESTIMATION - An image sensor apparatus is disclosed. The image sensor apparatus includes an image sensor for generating pixel data corresponding to a scene under a scene illuminant and a processor. The processor includes an illuminant estimation module for receiving a subset of the pixel data associated with a subset of a color space and finding a chromaticity trend in the pixel data subset to estimate the scene illuminant. A white balance and color correction module in the processor applies white balance and color correction coefficients to the pixel data according to the estimated scene illuminant. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141976 | Color Correction Method and Color Correction Apparatus - A color correction method in which an input image is corrected to generate an output image with an illumination condition different from that in the input image includes: detecting a region of a particular subject from the input image to extract color information on the region; restoring a spectral distribution of illumination in the input image by using the extracted color information and a surface reflectance of the particular subject designated in advance, calculating a spectral distribution of illumination in the output image by using the restored spectral distribution of illumination in the input image and the spectral distribution of designated target illumination, and calculating color information on each pixel of the output image on the basis of color information on each pixel of the input image, the restored spectral distribution of illumination in the input image and the calculated spectral distribution of illumination in the output image. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141977 | TEXTURE REPRODUCTION SYSTEM AND METHOD AND CHROMA CORRECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRESENCE ENHANCEMENT - A texture reproduction system and method and a chroma correction system and method for presence enhancement are provided. The texture reproduction system including: a texture analysis unit to classify a pixel included in an input image using Red Green Blue (RGB) values of the pixel; a chroma correction unit to correct a chroma based on at least one of an average chroma value of the input image and a hue value of the pixel according to a classification of the pixel; and a spatial filter unit to output a final output value of the pixel via a high frequency component extracted using the RGB values for each pixel. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141978 | IMAGE NOISE CORRECTION - An image noise correction method is provided. For at least one target pixel having a determined pixel value, for each pixel in a window of pixels surrounding the target pixel, a weighting factor for the pixel is estimated based on the value of the target pixel and at least one pixel value in the window. An average of pixel values for the pixels in the window is calculated, with each pixel value being weighted by the weighting factor corresponding to the pixel. A new value is assigned to the target pixel based on the average of pixel values that is calculated. Also provided is an image noise correction device. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141979 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM STORING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An inspection apparatus includes an imaging device and an image processing device. The imaging device photographs a specimen and outputs a color image of the specimen to the image processing device. The image processing device subjects the color image of the specimen to negative-positive reversal. After detecting a mode value of the hue the color image having been subjected to negative-positive reversal, the image processing device changes the hue of the color image in accordance with a difference between a boundary value of two predefined hues and the detected mode value. In accordance with the change of the hue, a plurality of target pixels different in the saturation is extracted and the saturation and the intensity of each pixel are changed, or the gradation of each pixel is converted so that the plurality of target pixels becomes most distant from one another in a color space. | 06-04-2009 |
20090148040 | SPECTRAL GAMUT MAPPING BASED ON A COLORIMETRIC GAMUT MAPPING - Mapping spectral colors in an Interim Connection Space (ICS) of a full spectral space based on a colorimetric gamut map in a color space is provided. A spectral color value in the ICS is accessed, and the spectral color value is transformed into a calorimetric color value in the color space. The calorimetric color value is mapped into mapped calorimetric color value in a first subspace of the ICS. Mapping the colorimetric color value includes gamut-mapping the calorimetric color value using the calorimetric gamut map, followed by identifying the color space with the first subspace. An intersection of a spectral gamut in the ICS and an affine subspace characterized by the mapped colorimetric color value is determined, and the spectral color value is projected onto the intersection. The first subspace is an orthogonal complement of a null space of a transformation from the ICS to the color space. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154804 | DIGITAL CORRECTION FOR ALIGNMENT OF A PLURALITY OF COLOR CHANNELS OF A COLOR IMAGE FORMING DEVICE - A system and method are provided for digital correction of a plurality of color channels and color image data. In color reproduction, a color image may be composed of a plurality of superimposed color channels in a color space hi order to assure the proper alignment of color channels and exemplary applications such as color printing, one or more of the plurality of color channels which compose a complete color image may be scaled to an output resolution, and corrected in order to ensure proper alignment and authentic reproduction of a color image. In place of a plurality of independent clocks, one for each channel, a single clock is provided for every channel, and additional unit is supplied to scale each channel according to independent characteristics. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154805 | METHOD FOR CONVERTING AN INPUT COLOR SIGNAL - A white light-emitting microcavity light-emitting diode device, comprising a method for converting a red, green, and blue (RGB) input signal to a converted signal having RGB color signals and an additional saturated color signal, by calculating saturation of the additional saturated color in the RGB input signal to determine the proportion of the additional saturated color signal to the sum of the converted RGB color signals such that the proportion of the additional saturated color signal is constant or decreases as the saturation of the additional color in the RGB input signal increases. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161951 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING RED-EYE - A method for correcting red-eye is described. Through facial features, at least one facial region is obtained in an image, a nose position in each facial region is obtained by using a nose feature, and at least one eye position is obtained based on a relative position relation between the nose and the eyes. After a color gamut of the image is converted, a red region is obtained from the eye position, and a plurality of edges is formed by using a luminance of the color gamut on the image with the converted color gamut according to the eye feature, so as to exclude the red region out of the plurality of edges, thereby improving accuracy of the red region on the eye position. Then, the red region is covered by an iris color, so as to correct the red-eye. | 06-25-2009 |
20090169101 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS, IMAGE SENSING APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - An eye region is extracted from an input image. A poor pupil hue quality region is extracted from the eye region. A high brightness region is extracted from the poor pupil hue quality region. A region obtained by excluding the high brightness region from the poor pupil hue quality region is extracted as a red-eye region. The high brightness region is corrected by using a method different from that for the red-eye region. | 07-02-2009 |
20090169102 | MULTI-SCALE MULTI-CAMERA ADAPTIVE FUSION WITH CONTRAST NORMALIZATION - A computer implemented method for fusing images taken by a plurality of cameras is disclosed, comprising the steps of: receiving a plurality of images of the same scene taken by the plurality of cameras; generating Laplacian pyramid images for each source image of the plurality of images; applying contrast normalization to the Laplacian pyramids images; performing pixel-level fusion on the Laplacian pyramid images based on a local salience measure that reduces aliasing artifacts to produce one salience-selected Laplacian pyramid image for each pyramid level; and combining the salience-selected Laplacian pyramid images into a fused image. Applying contrast normalization further comprises, for each Laplacian image at a given level: obtaining an energy image from the Laplacian image; determining a gain factor that is based on at least the energy image and a target contrast; and multiplying the Laplacian image by a gain factor to produce a normalized Laplacian image. | 07-02-2009 |
20090169103 | METHOD OF CORRECTING FALSE-COLOR PIXEL IN DIGITAL IMAGE - A method of correcting a false-color pixel in a digital image is used to correct a false-color pixel generated after being processed by a color correction matrix (CCM). The method includes the following steps. Obtaining a raw image, for being processed by the CCM operation to generate a processed image; comparing pixels of the raw image with that of the processed image according to a color difference ratio, to find out a false-color pixel in the pixels of the processed image; then, performing a color correction on the false-color pixel at the corresponding position of the raw image and the processed image. The false-color pixel is corrected according to the pixel color at the corresponding position of the raw image. | 07-02-2009 |
20090196498 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING COLOR ARTIFACTS IN DIGITAL IMAGES - Systems and methods for reducing color artifacts in digital images. A disclosed embodiment includes averaging original color pixel values of a subject pixel in a first color domain (e.g., red, green, and blue values when operating on demosaiced pixels in the Bayer domain) with respective color pixel values of adjacent pixels, converting the average color pixel values to a second color domain, determining replacement color pixel values in the first color domain based on the color pixel values in the second color domain, and replacing the original color pixel values of the subject pixel with the replacement color pixel values. Embodiments can be repeated for some or all pixels in a digital image to reduce color artifacts across a portion of the image or the entire image, and can be performed during or at any time after demosaicing. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196499 | IMAGE CONVERTING METHOD AND IMAGE CONVERTING APPARATUS - An image converting method includes the steps of: converting each pixel of an input image into 2-dimensional conversion chromaticity coordinate values which are obtained by projecting conversion chromaticity coordinate values obtained by converting each of said pixels by using parameters for converting in chromaticity coordinates onto a unit plane, and obtaining parameter values in which a barycenter of a color region including the 2-dimensional conversion chromaticity coordinate values are set to ⅓; and converting the input image by the obtained parameter values. | 08-06-2009 |
20090202148 | Image Capturing System and Method for the Analysis of Image Data - This application relates to image capturing systems and methods for the analysis of image data. | 08-13-2009 |
20090208099 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus enhances contrast without producing color balance distortion or color collapse by generating a gradation-scale correction table from a distribution of a characteristic quantity of an input image signal, using the gradation-scale correction table to derive a gradation correction parameter for each pixel from a maximum component value of the pixel, and multiplying all components of the pixel by the gradation correction parameter. | 08-20-2009 |
20090208100 | Website color match system - The present invention includes a colored appliance, which could be in the form of a standard color wheel in the form of a collapsible keychain or mailer. which is placed on or next to the colored item being photographed and used in a system to standardize the colors seen by a viewer. The consumer is sent a brochure with a color wheel or told to look at a standard overnight envelope like that of Fedex™ or USPS™. When looking at the digital photograph on the business's web site, the consumer would be able to instantly make adjustments to the colors on his computer monitor to see colors accurately by comparing the color wheel on the monitor to the overnight envelope's printed color or to a preferred standard color wheel. | 08-20-2009 |
20090208101 | COLOR CORRECTION COEFFICIENT GENERATOR, COLOR CORRECTION COEFFICIENT GENERATION METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The color correction coefficient generator includes a first color value acquiring unit that acquires correction-intended color values in a first color space configured of color components including a particular color component; a second color value acquiring unit that acquires correction color values being color values in a second color space configured of color components including the particular color component, and the correction color values being color values used to correct the correction-intended color values; a weight coefficient acquiring unit that acquires weight coefficients for the correction-intended color values; and a generating unit that generates a color correction coefficient on the basis of the correction color values for correcting the correction-intended color values having the particular color component at a density of a particular density value and on the basis of the weight coefficients for the correction-intended color values, the color correction coefficient used to correct the particular density value. | 08-20-2009 |
20090214111 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING IN-VIVO IMAGE CONTRAST - This invention relates to methods for enhancing an image by expanding the color contrast of the image presented to a wider range of colors that is optimized for the item sought to be viewed. The method also increases contrast of an image or a portion of an image for example an in vivo image captured by an autonomous in vivo device. A user interface with a display provides the user with the option of viewing selected images captured by the in-vivo imaging device in either regular view or in a color enhanced view to enable more distinct viewing of the selected images. | 08-27-2009 |
20090214112 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ACCESSING RANDOM ACCESS CACHE FOR RESCANNING - An efficient method and system to enhance digital acquisition devices for analog data is presented. The enhancements offered by the method and system are available to the user in local as well as in remote deployments yielding efficiency gains for a large variety of business processes. The quality enhancements of the acquired digital data are achieved efficiently by employing virtual reacquisition. The method of virtual reacquisition renders unnecessary the physical reacquisition of the analog data in case the digital data obtained by the acquisition device are of insufficient quality. The method and system allows multiple users to access the same acquisition device for analog data. In some embodiments, one or more users can virtually reacquire data provided by multiple analog or digital sources. The acquired raw data can be processed by each user according to his personal preferences and/or requirements. The preferred processing settings and attributes are determined interactively in real time as well as non real time, automatically and a combination thereof. | 08-27-2009 |
20090214113 | Removing Ringing and Blocking Artifacts from JPEG Compressed Document Images - A method of removing ringing and blocking artifacts from a decompressed digital image. In one method, a background value of the digital image a background region and foreground regions is determined, and a threshold value is computed. A mapping of the digital image is then generated by thresholding the digital image based on the threshold value to produce a thresholded image, and enlarging the foreground regions of the thresholded image to form a map image. The mapping includes the background pixels of the map image. The background region of the decompressed digital image is then cleansed based on the mapping. In an alternate method, ringing artifacts are removed from a decompressed digital image based on a signal-to-noise ratio of the image. In yet another alternate embodiment, ringing artifacts are from a decompressed digital color image that includes a chrominance channel and a luminance channel. An alternate embodiment removes ringing and blocking artifacts. | 08-27-2009 |
20090220150 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC CORRECTION OF FLESH-TONES (SKIN-TONES) - Flesh-tones corrections may be performed to correct color shifts that may occur in transmitted video frames wherein chroma information corresponding to flesh-tone video pixels may be distorted. A target region may be determined based on a determined flesh-tones region within a spatial representation of chroma in video color space, such as Y′CrCb. The flesh-tones correction may utilize one or more methodologies based on an elliptical shape and/or a triangular shape algorithm(s). A video processing system may be utilized to analyze chroma information of received video pixels and/or to perform flesh-tones corrections by shifting the chroma value of received video pixels towards good flesh-tones regions to compensate for possible distortions. The video processing system may perform conversion calculation and/or shift operations dynamically. The video processing system may also utilize lookup tables (LUTs) to convert received chroma values. The LUTs may be programmable to enable modifying and/or updating of the system. | 09-03-2009 |
20090220151 | Device for adjusting image color difference value and adjusting method thereof - A three-dimensional color difference value adjusting method for adjusting a selected region of an image is provided. The method includes the following steps. First, a plurality of color difference adjusting values corresponding to a plurality of reference brightness values are received. Next, target color difference adjusting value corresponding to brightness value of each pixel within the selected region is estimated according to the color difference adjusting values. Then, color difference value of each pixel within the selected region is adjusted according to target color difference adjusting value of each pixel within the selected region. | 09-03-2009 |
20090232395 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image signal inputted from an image signal input unit ( | 09-17-2009 |
20090232396 | Method for correcting chromatic aberration - The invention relates to a method for correcting chromatic aberration in an image capture device like a camera. It comprises the steps of determining, in the image, an analyzing area around the current pixel, comparing, for the current pixel, a first color component data of a first block of pixels comprising the current pixel to a second color component data of pixels of second blocks of pixels having the same size as the first block within the analyzing area, selecting the second block of pixels having the highest correlation with the first block of pixels, determining the shift vector to be applied to the selected second block in order that said selected second block coincides spatially with said first block of pixels, and shifting the second color component data of the pixel of the selected second block corresponding to the current pixel in accordance with the shift vector so as to correct chromatic aberration. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238454 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a red eye candidate detecting section, a gold eye candidate detecting section, and a red eye-gold eye-correcting section. Herein, the red eye candidate detecting section detects a red eye candidate, which is an area of a color included in a color range of a predetermined red color, from image by using a detecting threshold value differentiating a red eye from a gold eye. The gold eye candidate detecting section detects a gold eye, which is an area of a color included in a color range of a predetermined gold color that is not overlapped with a color range of the predetermined red color, from image by using the detecting threshold value. The red eye-gold eye-correcting section performs a predetermined red eye correcting process to a red eye candidate detected by a red eye candidate detecting section, and performs a predetermined gold eye correcting process, which is different from a predetermined red eye correcting process, to a gold eye candidate detected by a gold eye candidate detecting section. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238455 | Imaging apparatus - A disclosed imaging apparatus includes a wide-angle optical system having at least chromatic aberration of magnification; an imaging device including color filters and configured to receive an optical image from the optical system via the color filters and to convert the optical image into image data; and a chromatic aberration of magnification correcting unit configured to convert coordinates of the image data and thereby correct chromatic aberration of magnification of the image data. The chromatic aberration of magnification correcting unit is configured to convert the image data into different-wavelength image data having wavelength bands different from original wavelength bands of the color filters before correcting the chromatic aberration of magnification. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238456 | Image Data Analysis Apparatus, Image Data Analysis Method, and Program - An image data analysis apparatus adapted to receive color image data having three components for every pixel, detect a color gamut as a range of colors the color image data represents in a predetermined color space, and determine a plurality of apexes defining the color gamut in the color space is disclosed. The image data analysis apparatus includes: a first apex determining unit that detects a minimum grayscale value as a smallest grayscale value among the three components with respect to the pixels included in the color image data, and determines a first apexe, which defines the color gamut in the color space, based on the minimum grayscale value; a color image data converting unit that converts the color image data of each of the pixels having the three components into a coordinate point on a predetermined chromaticity plane; a color gamut triangle detecting unit that detects a color gamut triangle as a triangle including the coordinate points of the color image data converted on the chromaticity plane; a second apex determining unit that determines a second apex defining the color gamut in the color space based on a coordinate value of the apex closest to a reference R (red) point of the apexes of the color gamut triangle; a third apex determining unit that determines a third apex defining the color gamut in the color space based on a coordinate value of the apex closest to a reference G (green) point of the apexes of the color gamut triangle; and a fourth apex determining unit that determines a fourth apex defining the color gamut in the color space based on a coordinate value of the apex closest to a reference B (blue) point of the apexes of the color gamut triangle. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245632 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMAGE SIGNAL COLOR CORRECTION WITH REDUCED NOISE - A method and apparatus for applying color correction to image signals provides different color corrections depending on a characterization associated with a pixel signal being processed or the gain applied to the pixel signal such as a value of a pixel signal being processed. The color corrections may be configured such that darker pixels have less color correction applied to them. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245633 | Method, a Device, a Module and a Computer Program Product for Determining the Quality of an Image - The invention relates to a method, a device, an image quality evaluation module and a computer program product for determining the quality of an image. In an input image, at least one color component is iteratively restored with a deblur parameter, which deblur parameter is increased at each iteration. The iteration is stopped when an overshooting in the final image exceeds a predetermined value. After the iteration has been stopped, a number of iterations is defined and the quality of the image is determined according to the number of iterations. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245634 | Detection of Face Area in Image - An image processing apparatus. An application identification information acquisition unit acquires application identification information that identifies an application of detection results of a face area corresponding to the image of a face in a target image. A condition setting unit sets a condition, relating to an angle of the face to be represented in the face area, based on the application identification information. A face area detection unit detects the face area corresponding to the image of the face satisfying the set condition, based on image data representing the target image. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252408 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PATTERN INTERPOLATION - Apparatus and method for pattern interpolation are disclosed. Horizontally interpolated green, red and blue pixel values, and vertically interpolated green, red and blue pixel values are generated according to the pixels received from a pattern color filter. Subsequently, a direction is selected for the green value interpolation according to the horizontally and vertically interpolated pixel values. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252409 | IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image forming apparatus of the invention includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, a HDD, a network connection unit, an operation panel, a JOB execution unit, a surrounding color correction coefficient storage unit, an area correction function storage unit and a database. The CPU functions as an image processing unit (image processing apparatus) by an image processing program. The image processing unit includes a noted color extraction unit, an area calculation unit, an area correction coefficient calculation unit, and a color correction unit. The area calculation unit calculates an area of the noted color region. The area correction coefficient calculation unit calculates an area correction coefficient based on a function stored in the area correction function storage unit, the area of the noted color region and the like. Based on the area correction coefficient received from the area correction coefficient calculation unit, the color correction unit corrects a skin color of image data to a skin color taking the area into consideration. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252410 | SATURATION ADJUSTMENT METHOD AND RELATED COLOR ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM - A saturation adjustment method is disclosed for compensating over-saturation adjustment. The saturation adjustment method includes: adjusting a first full-scale saturation corresponding to a hue of a color wheel to become a second full-scale saturation wherein the second full-scale saturation is greater than the first full-scale saturation; setting a critical saturation corresponding to the hue based on the first and second full-scale saturations; and adjusting a first saturation within a range between the critical and second full-scale saturations corresponding to the hue to become a second saturation based on the first full-scale, second full-scale and critical saturations. Furthermore, disclosed is a color adjustment system essentially including a saturation adjuster for adjusting the first saturation greater than the critical full-scale saturation to become the second saturation based on an adjusted full-scale saturation and the critical saturation. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252411 | INTERPOLATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Interpolations systems and methods are disclosed. In a particular embodiment, a system is disclosed that includes an input to receive image data. The system also includes an image processing system responsive to the image data and including a demosaicing module. The demosaicing module is configured to use adaptive bi-cubic spline interpolation. The system further includes an output responsive to the image processing system and adapted to provide output data. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252412 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - When the range of luminance values that can be expressed by an image is divided into a plurality of levels, a histogram measurement unit generates histogram data indicating the numbers of pixels for respective levels by calculating, for respective levels, total of the number of pixels in the image, which have luminance values belonging to an identical level. A microcomputer calculates, for respective levels, the difference between the numbers of pixels belonging to an identical level using the histogram data of a first frame image and that of a second frame image input immediately before the first frame image. The microcomputer determines based on the differences for respective levels whether or not to update a tone correction table held by a tone correction unit, and then converts the tone characteristic of the first frame image using the tone correction table, and outputs the converted image. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257652 | AUTOMATIC IMAGE COLOR TONE CORRECTION - A method of image color tone correction is disclosed, which may include the steps of (a) providing a reference image and one or more source images, wherein all images are comprised of pixels of a scene; (b) correcting a designated portion of one of the source images based on the reference image to create a color tone corrected image; and (c) outputting the color tone corrected image to a computer readable medium. The designated portion may be any subset of one of the source images, and may be a simple cropping, interlace, or other form of selection, such as areas of interest in the scene. Additionally, the designated portion may be used for determining a set of coefficients for overall color image correction of the complement of the source images. This method brings the increased tonal and saturation qualities of still images to those in motion. | 10-15-2009 |
20090263015 | Method And Apparatus For Correcting Underexposed Digital Images - A method of correcting an underexposed digital image comprises determining the stop of underexposure at which the digital image was captured, correcting for one integer stop of underexposure iteratively until the amount of underexposure correction is equal to the integer component of the determined stop of underexposure and correcting for any remaining fractional component of the determined stop of underexposure. | 10-22-2009 |
20090263016 | AUTOMATIC COLOR CONTRAST ANALYZER - A computerized method and apparatus to analyze color contrast are provided. In an example embodiment, a computer readable storage medium is provided that comprises executable instructions. When executed, the instructions access data associated with a visual representation including text and perform optical character recognition on the visual representation to identify at least one character of the text. Further color data is extracted from a first area and a second area, the first area forming part of the at least one character and the second area external to the at least one character; and calculate a color contrast value based on the first and second areas. The instructions to access the data, perform the optical character recognition, extract the color data and calculate the color contrast are performed sequentially and automatically by a processor without human intervention. | 10-22-2009 |
20090263017 | Method for reconstruction of pixel color values - A method of color reconstruction includes a first process for a first pixel and a second process for the first pixel. The first process includes extracting a first kernel from a multi-color matrix, generating first variance weights from the first kernel, and generating a first color based on the first variance weights and adjacent pixel values of the first color. The second process includes extracting a second kernel from the multi-color matrix, generating second variance offsets from the second kernel, and generating a second color based on the second variance offsets and an adjacent pixel of the second color. | 10-22-2009 |
20090263018 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD FOR REDUCING COLOR BLUR - The image processing apparatus includes a first reducing part configured to reduce a component of chromatic aberration of magnification which is included in the image, and a second reducing part configured to reduce a component of longitudinal chromatic aberration which is included in the image in which the component of chromatic aberration of magnification has been reduced. The image processing method includes a first step of reducing a component of chromatic aberration of magnification which is included in the image, and a second step of reducing a component of longitudinal chromatic aberration which is included in the image in which the component of chromatic aberration of magnification has been reduced. The apparatus and method can reduce color blur in the image caused by the chromatic aberration of magnification and the longitudinal chromatic aberration. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268961 | COLOR-SATURATION CONTROL METHOD - For performing saturation control of one or more selected colors of the image, respective color values of the selected color(s) are pre-defined. Meanwhile, a specified pixel is selected from the image. Then distance(s) between the color space coordinate of the specified pixel and the color space coordinate(s) of the selected color(s) is (are) calculated. The color values of the specified pixel are thus adjusted depending on comparing results of the distance(s) with corresponding threshold distance(s). | 10-29-2009 |
20090274368 | Image correction method and apparatus - A computer readable storage medium contains instructions that, when executed by a computer, cause the computer to perform detecting a flat image portion having a color variation amount less than a predetermined amount from a specific color region having a specific color in an image, measuring a size of the flat image portion detected, and correcting the flat image portion by a first correction amount if the size of the flat image portion measured is larger than a predetermined value, and correcting the flat image portion by a second correction amount greater than the first second correction amount if the size of the flat image portion measured is not greater than the predetermined value. | 11-05-2009 |
20090285480 | MULTI-CHANNEL EDGE-AWARE CHROMINANCE NOISE REDUCTION - Noise in an image is reduced in a manner that takes into account edge information in one or more channels of the image. A first image is received that is formatted according to a red-green-blue (RGB) color model. The first image is converted from the RGB color model to a second color model that includes at least a luminance channel, a first chrominance channel, and a second chrominance channel that are representative of the first image. The first and second chrominance channels are each denoised in a manner that accounts at least for edge information in the luminance channel, and may also include edge information from other channels in a manner that accounts for per-channel noise characteristics. The luminance channel and denoised first and second chrominance channels are converted to a second image formatted according to the RGB color model that is a noise-reduced version of the first image. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285481 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREFOR - To provide adaptive image processing for a portrait, face information about the face of a person contained in an image is acquired, and it is determined on the basis of the face information whether a significant personal face is contained in the image. If there is face information representing the presence of a significant personal face, adaptive processing adjustment information which adjusts the contents of high quality processing for a portrait, which should be executed for the process target image, is generated from the face information about the face of the person contained in the image. The high quality processing adjusted on the basis of the adaptive processing adjustment information is executed for the image. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290792 | METHOD FOR SETTING AUTO WHITE BALANCE AREA - Disclosed is a method for setting an auto white balance area. An image is received from an image sensor. An edge from the image is detected and an edge area having no color information is removed from the image. The image, from which the edge area is removed, is divided into blocks having preset sizes. Remaining areas are set as an auto white balance area except a darkest area and a brightest area by applying a threshold value for brightness to the divided image. | 11-26-2009 |
20090297025 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing device corrects brightness/hue in appearance of an object of interest while suppressing an effect of an optical illusion even if the object of interest is overlapped with a background part of any color. The image processing device includes an evaluation device that evaluates a record value of the object of interest and the background part thereof, a device that corrects the record value of the object of interest in order to correct the optical illusion of a human being according to a result of evaluation by the evaluation device, and a device that performs record with the record value after the correction. | 12-03-2009 |
20090297026 | IMAGING DEVICE - The imaging device has an image sensor with a mosaic color filter array composed of three or four color elements. The color elements are arrayed such that each color element is opposite a pixel in said image sensor. The imaging device further has a first interpolate on processor, a color-transform processor, and a second interpolation processor. The first interpolation processor carries out a first interpolation process for generating a series of color signals in each pixel. The first interpolation processor interpolates missing color signals in each pixel on the basis of color signals generated in adjacent pixels. Then, the color-transform processor carries out a color-transform process for generating a series of color-transform signals from the series of color signals in each pixel. The second interpolation processor replaces at least one color-transform signal that is based on a color signal interpolated by the first interpolation process with at least one interpolated color-transform signal. The second interpolation processor carries out a second interpolation process for generating the interpolation color-transform signal from color-transform signals of surrounding pixels. | 12-03-2009 |
20090304274 | Image Processing Apparatus and Image Display Apparatus - A luminance information detector ( | 12-10-2009 |
20090304275 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC AND ADAPTIVE ENHANCEMENT OF COLORS IN DIGITAL VIDEO IMAGES - A method and apparatus for dynamically, adaptively and/or concurrently enhancing and diminishing of colors in digital video images is disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes dynamically computing a saturation gain, adaptive to slow or fast moving image sequences, for each user chosen color of a substantially current video frame, dynamically computing a saturation dependent value gains, adaptive to slow or fast moving image sequences, for each user chosen color of the substantially current video frame, determining which of the dynamically computed saturation gain and a saturation dependent value gains associated with each user chosen color or no gain is to be applied on a per-pixel basis by comparing Hue, saturation and value (HSV) components of each pixel with predefined HSV ranges of various user chosen colors, respectively, and applying the determined saturation and/or saturation dependent value gain on the per-pixel basis, in the substantially current or next video frame. | 12-10-2009 |
20090304276 | COLOR DEVIATION COMPENSATING APPARATUS AND METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSOR USING IT, RECORDED MEDIUM - Color deviation compensating apparatus and method of compensating distortion of captured image caused by lens of the image sensor. According to the one embodiment of the present invention comprises n image analyzer, configured to receive a reference image, divide the reference image into n regions, and perform sampling on data of at least one sampling pixel from each of the regions, wherein n is a natural number, and a mask generator, configured to generate a mask for compensation based on the sampling data from the image analyzer. All distortion such as white balance, irregular color deviation caused by micro lens of image sensor can be compensated. | 12-10-2009 |
20090304277 | Image processing device and image processing method - A first aberration correcting unit respectively correcting, for the first wavelength and the second wavelength, amount of distortion by a correction value for a chromatic aberration of magnification at the image height, and a first position calculating unit estimating, for respective pixels corresponding to the reference wavelength, amount of displacement of an image location due to a distortion by using a basic equation expressing a relation between amount of distortion at the image height and amount of displacement, and estimating, for respective pixels corresponding to the first wavelength and the second wavelength, amount of displacement of an image location due to a distortion including a correction for the chromatic aberration of magnification by replacing the amount of distortion in the basic equation with the amount of corrected distortion. | 12-10-2009 |
20090304278 | Method and Apparatus for Red-Eye Detection in an Acquired Digital Image - A method for red-eye detection in an acquired digital image comprises acquiring a first image and analyzing the first acquired image to provide a plurality of characteristics indicative of image quality. The process then determines if one or more corrective processes can be beneficially applied to the first acquired image according to the characteristics. Any such corrective processes are then applied to the first acquired image. Red-eye defects are then detected in a second acquired image using the corrected first acquired image. Defect detection can comprise applying a chain of one or more red-eye filters to the first acquired image. In this case, prior to the detecting step, it is determined if the red-eye filter chain can be adapted in accordance with the plurality of characteristics; and the red-eye filter is adapted accordingly. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310858 | Image processing - An image processing technique comprises the steps of: (a) stretching an original image in the Y-direction (vertical) by a factor falling within the range of 2-10%; selecting a fixation point and disordering operation around the fixation point; and rotating the image through an angle falling within the range of 3-9°, preferably clockwise; (b) stretching a copy of the original image in the X-direction (horizontal by a factor falling within the range of 2-10%; and selecting an area of the image around the selected fixation point; and (c) merging the selected area of the image formed in step (b) with the image formed in step (a). | 12-17-2009 |
20090310859 | Automatic color balance control method - An automatic color balance control method is used for color balancing an image including a foreground object and a background. The background is extracted from the image by an object detection procedure. Then, the background is analyzed to get the color deviation information. According to the color deviation information, the control method adjusts the gain value to adjust the color value of the image. Accordingly, the present automatic color balance control method can properly adjust the color of the image according to the light source without being affected by the moving foreground objects. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310860 | IMAGE PROCESSOR, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC APPARATUS - An image processor includes a hue region judging section judging which one of a plurality of hue regions corresponds to a hue and a converting section obtaining a correction value by using the hue to correct the hue based on the correction value. The converting section obtains a first difference value by using a difference between the hue and a first reference value, obtains a second difference value by using a difference between a second reference value and the first difference value, and obtains the correction value by using the second difference value. The hue is corrected based on the correction value. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316985 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Software of a simple configuration checks whether an original image to be corrected is an image picture, and an image correction process based upon a formed histogram of the original image is not performed for an image different from the image picture. An image processing condition is set in accordance with the formed histogram to perform the image correction process for the original image. An image processing method judges from a shape of the formed histogram whether the original image is an image picture, and does not perform not perform the image correction process for the original image if it is judged that the original image is not an image picture. | 12-24-2009 |
20090324071 | Color enhancement for graphic images - A color enhancement system may enhance color components in an image. In one embodiment, the color enhancement system suppresses banding by combining an input color value with an enhanced colored value. In another embodiment, local variation in saturation values around a pixel may be used to determine a modification of an input saturation value for color enhancement. As still another embodiment, flickering between frames may be suppressed by combining a histogram that counts the number of times a given pixel value occurs in a particular image with a historical histogram that keeps track of an average of how often given values have occurred in previous frames. | 12-31-2009 |
20090324072 | DENTAL IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - A subtle color difference between a tooth and a color sample is made recognizable by accentuating the color difference therebetween. The invention provides a dental image processing device including a row-of-teeth image storing unit | 12-31-2009 |
20100008573 | METHODS AND MECHANISMS FOR PROBABILISTIC COLOR CORRECTION - Methods and systems to determine a probability that a given illumination is a reference illumination. In an embodiment, data representing a set of respective captures of reference targets under a reference illumination may be used to generate a probability distribution for the reference illumination. In another embodiment, one or more such probability distributions, each corresponding to a respective reference illumination, may be used in estimating a non-reference illumination. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008574 | Image processing method - An image processing method for removing a noise component contained in an original image includes: extracting a noise component contained in an original image in a work color space; creating a noise-free image in the work color space based upon the extracted noise component and a difference between gradation characteristics in the work color space and gradation characteristics in an output color space; converting the noise-free image in the work color space to an image in the output color space. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014754 | DIGITAL IMAGE EDITING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A digital image editing method includes: reading a foreground image and a background image, where the foreground image has a foreground portion; calculating three correction constants each of which is used to correct one of three components of the foreground portion of the foreground image using color information of the foreground and background images; correcting color of the foreground portion of the foreground image using the three correction constants; and pasting the foreground portion of the foreground image onto the background image. | 01-21-2010 |
20100027884 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING COLOR AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for correcting colors and an apparatus using the same are provided. A method for correcting colors includes generating a luminance histogram using an image signal; determining a color matrix corresponding to luminance information of the luminance histogram; and converting the image signal from a color space to another color space using the determined color matrix, and outputting a Red, Green, Blue (RGB) signal. Accordingly, the advantage of a reduction in color noise is achieved. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027885 | COMPONENT EXTRACTION/CORRECTION DEVICE, COMPONENT EXTRACTION/CORRECTION METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - Provided is a component extraction/correction device, comprising: a decomposition unit that decomposes an original image signal into a plurality of frequency bands to generate a plurality of band signals; an extraction unit that extracts a skeleton component from among a plurality of components constituting the band signal; a first correction unit that corrects the extracted skeleton component by using the band signal and one component other than the skeleton component among the plurality of components; and a second correction unit that corrects the one component by using the corrected skeleton component and the band signal. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027886 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ELIMINATING CHROMATIC ABERRATION - A method and apparatus for eliminating chromatic aberration; in an embodiment, only the chrominance signal is filtered in the luminance/chrominance coordinates so as to eliminate the chromatic aberration so that the chromatic aberration can be eliminated regardless of a property of a lens. In addition, there are advantages in not only eliminating the chromatic aberration but also preventing resolution of the original image from being damaged. | 02-04-2010 |
20100034458 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - The present invention includes a calculation unit configured to calculate a target value of gradation correction of a captured image; an extraction unit configured to extract a luminance component image and a low frequency component image of the luminance component image from the captured image; a first processing unit configured to execute first gradation correction processing to the captured image using the luminance component image and the low frequency component image; a second processing unit configured to execute second gradation correction processing to the captured image by tone curve; a setting unit configured to set a correction level of the first gradation correction processing in response to input by user operation; and a determination unit configured to determine a correction amount of the first gradation correction processing and a correction amount of the second gradation correction processing based on the calculated target value and the set tone curve. | 02-11-2010 |
20100040283 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND RECORDING MEDIUM RECORDING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a histogram calculating section, a tone curve determining section and a tone curve applying section that perform different tone corrections on pixels at different positions in a color image and a false contour detecting section that calculates the degree of false contour occurrence for the color image based on the difference in signal saturation level between color signals. Based on the result of the calculation by the false contour detecting section, the tone curve determining section controls the tone correction characteristics to make a false contour less prominent. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040284 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CORRECTING HYBRID FLASH ARTIFACTS IN DIGITAL IMAGES - A method for digital image eye artifact detection and correction include identifying one or more candidate red-eye defect regions in an acquired image. For one or more candidate red-eye regions, a seed pixels and/or a region of pixels having a high intensity value in the vicinity of the candidate red-eye region is identified. The shape, roundness or other eye-related characteristic of a combined hybrid region including the candidate red-eye region and the region of high intensity pixels is analyzed. Based on the analysis of the eye-related characteristic of the combined hybrid region, it is determined whether to apply flash artifact correction, including red eye correction of the candidate red-eye region and/or correction of the region of high intensity pixels. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046832 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BACKLIT IMAGE ADJUSTMENT - The subject application is directed to backlit image adjustment. First, image data is received that includes an image portion defined by an associated backlit region, from which a tonal curve is then isolated. At least one anchor point on the isolated tonal curve is selected based upon backlighting characteristics in the received image data. A sectional bulging operation is applied on the isolated tonal curve in accordance with the selected anchor point. Adjusted image data is then generated based upon the applied sectional bulging operation, and is then communicated to an associated data storage | 02-25-2010 |
20100046833 | LOOK-UP TABLE ON FILM - A color look-up table includes a plurality of images recorded on a film. Each of the images being recorded on a separate picture of the film and containing at least a first level and a second level. The first and second levels having different pixel color values and are arranged to form a detectable geometric pattern on each of the pictures. The first field and a second field having detectable boundaries assigned to characterize distortions on the film. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046834 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A spatial CAM forward conversion unit forward-converts XYZ data of the input side into JCh data based on input viewing condition parameters including parameters, which are used to determine field sizes of an input image based on the viewing angle. A Gamut mapping algorithm unit converts the JCh data into those in a color reproduction range of an output device by gamut mapping according to the color reproduction range of the output device. A spatial CAM inverse conversion unit inversely converts the JCh data in the color reproduction range of the output device into XYZ data of the output side based on output viewing condition parameters including parameters, which are used to determine field sizes of an output image based on the viewing angle. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046835 | Signal processing apparatus and method, and program - Signals are provided which allow colors in a wider color range than predetermined standards, which can be handled by apparatus according to such predetermined standards. A primary color converter converts first color signals having primary color points in a wider color range than the primary color points according to BT.709 into second color signals based on the primary colors according to BT.709. A photoelectric transducer converts the second color signals into third color signals according to photoelectric transducer characteristics defined in a numerical range wider than a range from 0 to 1.0 of color signals corresponding to a luminance signal and color difference signals according to BT.709. A color signal converter converts the third color signals into a luminance signal and color difference signals. A corrector incorporated in the color signal converter corrects the color difference signals into color difference signals. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054588 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND MANUFACTURE FOR CORRECTING COLOR SHADING IN CMOS IMAGE SENSORS - A device for color shading correction is provided. Local color matching is performed as follows. For each pixel of the image that is being color matched, the RGB value is treated as a one-by-three matrix, which is multiplied by a three-by-three matrix that is generated during factory calibration. The matrix product is a one-by-three matrix that is used as the RGB value for the pixel in the color matched image. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054589 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A first processor calculates a white point of a pixel of interest of image data from surrounding pixels of the pixel of interest, and executes adaptation processing using the calculated white point. A second processor executes adaptation processing using a fixed white point of image data. A selector selects an area of input image data. A color converter executes color conversion of the input image data using the first or second processor corresponding to the selected area. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054590 | Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Program - An information processing apparatus includes: a first generating unit which generates, based on feature points detected on a cepstrum from an input image, a point-spread function that represents the degree of blurring generated in the input image; a second generating unit which generates a structure that represents an image obtained by reducing the input image with a size based on the point-spread function and enlarging this with the size, based on the point-spread function; and an updating unit which executes an updating process to update at least either the point-spread function or the structure such that the point-spread function and the structure approximate to a true value, with the updating unit repeatedly executing the updating process to set, of a structure component and a texture component making up the updated structure, the structure component as a new updated structure, and set the updated point-spread function as a new updated target. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054591 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus includes an input unit for inputting image data, an attribute information generation unit for generating attribute information about each pixel of the image data, a block division unit for dividing the image data into a plurality of blocks of a predetermined size, a histogram generation unit for generating a histogram of colors and the number of pixels of each color existing in a focused block divided by the division unit, and a color replacement unit, if it is not determined that the area having the focused color is a significant area, for replacing a color of a pixel existing within the area having the focused color with a different color so that the color of the area having the focused color becomes the same as the color of another area contacting the area having the focused color and having the different color according to a predetermined condition. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054592 | ANALYZING PARTIAL FACE REGIONS FOR RED-EYE DETECTION IN ACQUIRED DIGITAL IMAGES - A method for red-eye detection in an acquired digital image includes acquiring a first image, and analyzing one or more partial face regions within the first image. One or more characteristics of the first image are determined. One or more corrective processes are identified including red eye correction that can be beneficially applied to the first image according to the one or more characteristics. The one or more corrective processes are applied to the first image. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054593 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus executes smoothing processing (reduction conversion) of an input image to acquire a smoothed image (reduced image), acquires a normalization parameter for normalization from the smoothed image, and normalizes pixel values of the input image based on the normalization parameter. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054594 | IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM FOR RECORDING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - A tone conversion unit, when performing tone conversion on an image signal, performs the tone conversion so as to provide a more appropriate tone to a feature area such as a face extracted from the image signal. Specifically, a correction coefficient calculation unit performs multi-resolution decomposition on a specific signal with the extracted feature area, and sets all pixels of low-frequency component to 1, while setting high-frequency components considered to include noise to 0, so as to calculate a correction coefficient. Then, a correction coefficient processing unit performs a processing of multiplying the correction coefficient to the image signal similarly performed with multi-resolution decomposition. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061628 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a defined binary image generating unit configured to generate a defined binary image associated with a level image, which is associated with an input image, the level image having pixel values of pixels represented using a first value, by regarding a pixel as a defined or undefined region pixel and setting the pixel to have a predetermined second or third value; and an estimated foreground color image generation unit configured to generate an estimated foreground color image associated with the input image, by setting the pixel values of the pixels regarded as the undefined region pixels in the defined binary image to pixel values of pixels in the input image corresponding to pixels for which distances each obtained from an integrated value of the amounts of change in continuity information are shortest from among the pixels that are regarded as the defined region pixels. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067791 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND MEDIUM STORING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - Illumination information indicating the center of illumination and lightness change direction is acquired from an image, and the image is divided into regions for respective colors based on the acquired illumination information and color information of respective pixels included in the image. Especially, thresholds in clustering are set step by step in accordance with the lightness change direction from the center of the illumination information, and the image is clustered to the regions for respective colors according to the thresholds which are set step by step. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074519 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING IMAGE COLOR AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing device of the present application includes a color drift correcting section, a saturation reduction calculating section, and a color correcting section. The color drift correcting section corrects a color drift of an input image and generates a color drift correction image. The saturation reduction calculating section calculates a degree of saturation reduction caused by the color drift correction by comparing the input image with the color drift correction image. The color correcting section performs a color correction depending on the degree of saturation reduction with respect to a processed image of either one of the input image and the color drift correction image. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074520 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device and an image processing method can simply reduce, at pixel level, generation of a color that should not appear in a subject image due to the influence of a PSF. The image processing device includes: a filter processing portion that applies a filter having tap coefficients corresponding to the number of pixels in a pixel signal array formed of pixel signals of pixels located in an image height direction to the pixel signal array, and generates a correction signal array; and a signal array addition portion that adds the correction signal array to the pixel signal array, and generates a processed signal array. The tap coefficients include one reference tap coefficient having a maximum value, and negative tap coefficients having negative values. In a tap coefficient array, the reference tap coefficient is positioned off center at a position other than the center of the tap coefficients. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074521 | Image Processing Apparatus, Image Processing Method, and Program - An image processing apparatus includes: means for extracting, for each pixel of an image, a high-frequency component as focus information from a brightness signal for a neighboring pixel; means for integrating, for each pixel, the focus information on the neighboring pixel; means for replacing the focus information on each pixel with a value obtained using the focus information on the neighboring pixel greater than the focus information on that pixel to generate dark area focus information; means for integrating the brightness signals of each pixel and the neighboring pixel to extract an illumination component; means for calculating a depth value of each pixel using a coefficient based on the illumination component; means for normalizing the depth value of each pixel; means for controlling the normalized depth value using a tone curve; means for detecting a saturation of each pixel; and means for controlling the controlled depth value using the saturation. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074522 | Method and Apparatus of False Color Suppression - A false-color suppression method for correcting a pixel value of a target position of an output frame corresponding to a target field is disclosed. The false-color suppression method includes determining whether the target position has motion; determining whether image corresponding to the target position meets a predetermined condition; and if the target position is determined to have motion and the image corresponding to the target position meets the predetermined condition, performing at least one false-color suppression operation to correct the pixel value of the target position of the output frame. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080457 | Method and apparatus for colour correction of image sequences - A visual summary of the image sequences is generated, displaying at least one image from a plurality of the image sequences. Colour correction is applied to a feature in one of the displayed images and images comprising at least one feature being close to the colour corrected feature according to a distance criterion are selected, displayed, and colour correction, based on the colour correction to the feature, is applied to the features in the selected images. An apparatus is also provided. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080458 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An apparatus and a method for efficiently executing correction of false color, such as purple fringe, caused by chromatic aberration and for generating and outputting high-quality image data are provided. A white-saturated pixel is detected from image data, a false-color-pixel detection area is set around the detected white-saturated pixel, and pixels having color corresponding to false color such as purple fringe are detected from the set area. The detected pixels are determined as false-color pixels and correction processing based on the values of the surrounding pixels is performed on the determined false-color pixels. With this configuration, an area of false color such as purple fringe generated in the neighborhood of a white-saturated pixel can be efficiently detected, pixel values can be partially corrected, and high-quality image data can be generated and output without affecting the entire image. | 04-01-2010 |
20100086205 | NOISE FILTER - A noise removal circuit in an image signal includes a boundary determination unit configured to determine a position of a light-dark boundary on the basis of, or as a function of, a pixel value of a plurality of surrounding pixels, and a selection filter configured to perform filtering in a range of the plurality of surrounding pixels which belong to a range which does not cross a boundary determined by the boundary determination unit. | 04-08-2010 |
20100092081 | COLOR GAMUT OUTLINE COMPUTING DEVICE, METHOD, AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A device includes a setting section that sets a single-color amount limit and an ink total amount limit, an upper half outline constructing section, a lower half outline constructing section, a restricting outline constructing section, and a color space converter. The upper half outline points are points at which one or more color components are 0% and that satisfy the single-color amount limit and the ink total amount limit. The lower half outline points are points at which one or more color components satisfy the single-color amount limit and that satisfy the ink total amount limit. The restricting outline points satisfy the single-color amount limit and the ink total amount limit, and are connected to the upper or lower half outline points which satisfy the single-color amount limit and the ink total amount limit. The color space converter converts the constructed outline points into another color space. | 04-15-2010 |
20100092082 | FRAMEWORK FOR WAVELET-BASED ANALYSIS AND PROCESSING OF COLOR FILTER ARRAY IMAGES WITH APPLICATIONS TO DENOISING AND DEMOSAICING - One aspect of the present invention relates to a new approach to the demosaicing of spatially sampled image data observed through a color filter array. In one embodiment properties of Smith-Barnwell filterbanks may be employed to exploit the correlation of color components in order to reconstruct a sub-sampled image. In other embodiments, the approach is amenable to wavelet-domain denoising prior to demosaicing. One aspect of the present invention relates to a framework for applying existing image denoising algorithms to color filter array data. In addition to yielding new algorithms for denoising and demosaicing, in some embodiments, this framework enables the application of other wavelet-based denoising algorithms directly to the CFA image data. Demosaicing and denoising according to some embodiments of the present invention may perform on a par with the state of the art for far lower computational cost, and provide a versatile, effective, and low-complexity solution to the problem of interpolating color filter array data observed in noise. According to one aspect, a method for processing an image is provided. In one embodiment, image data captured though a color filter array is trans-formed into a series of filterbank subband coefficients, by estimating the filterbank transform for a complete image (which estimation can be shown to be accurate in some embodiments) computation complexity associated with regenerating the complete image can be reduced. In another embodiment, denoising of the CFA image data can occur prior to demosaicing, alternatively denoising can occur in conjunction with demosaicing, or in another alternative, after demosaicing. | 04-15-2010 |
20100098334 | COLOR-INTERPOLATION DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM - Provided is a color-interpolation device including: an interpolation processor that generates a first interpolated image signal and a second interpolated image signal by respectively performing first interpolation processing and second interpolation processing on a color image signal formed of pixels having a missing color component; an evaluation-value calculating unit that calculates, for each pixel, an evaluation value for specifying a specified region which becomes the target of the first interpolation processing; a region defining unit that defines the specified region on the basis of the evaluation value; and an interpolation-process determining unit that generates the interpolated color image signal by extracting the image signal of the specified region from the first interpolated image signal, extracting the image signal of the region other than the specified region from the second interpolated image signal, and combining the extracted image signals. | 04-22-2010 |
20100104178 | Methods and Systems for Demosaicing - Aspects of the present invention are related to systems and methods for image demosaicing. | 04-29-2010 |
20100104179 | NUMERICALLY ROBUST IMPLEMENTATION OF SPECTRAL GAMUT MAPPING - Color management in which gamut mapping is performed in a spectral color space. The gamut mapping process includes a calorimetric gamut mapping step, in which a calorimetric projection of the source-side color is gamut-mapped into a calorimetric projection of the destination side's spectral gamut. To ensure that the resulting gamut-mapped calorimetric color can be inverted into a set of feasible points in the spectral gamut, an additional step is inserted into the gamut-mapping process. Specifically, a further projection is made of the gamut-mapped calorimetric projection, whereby the calorimetric color is projected onto within the numerical boundary of the calorimetric projection of the destination side's spectral gamut. This additional projection yields a numerically robust color space color, that largely avoids adverse effects that otherwise might be caused by “numerical voids” found in the floating point representation of numbers by digital computers. | 04-29-2010 |
20100104180 | IMAGE NOISE REDUCTION METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS USING THE SAME - An image noise reduction method is provided. An image is received. A first-stage process is performed to the image to obtain a luminance information Y and a color information Cb and/or Cr corresponding to a pixel array in an YCbCr domain. A second-stage process is performed to the luminance information Y to reduce at least a luminance noise. A third-stage process is performed to the color information Cb and/or Cr to reduce at least a color noise. The luminance information Y and the color information Cb and/or Cr are then combined. | 04-29-2010 |
20100104181 | COLOR LOOK-UP TABLE ON FILM - A color look-up table includes a plurality of images recorded on a film. Each of the images being recorded on a separate picture of the film and containing at least a first level and a second level. The first and second levels having different pixel color values and are arranged to form a detectable geometric pattern on each of the pictures. | 04-29-2010 |
20100104182 | Restoring and synthesizing glint within digital image eye features - A digital camera device ( | 04-29-2010 |
20100104183 | IMAGE ENLARGEMENT METHOD - A correlation value calculation circuit calculates respective correlation values of each pixel for color image or for gray image in four directions. A selection circuit determines respective correlation values (Cv, Ch, Cd | 04-29-2010 |
20100119148 | MODIFYING COLOR AND PANCHROMATIC CHANNEL CFA IMAGE - A method of modifying a CFA image or full-color image having a plurality of color channels and a panchromatic channel, includes capturing the panchromatic channel at a different exposure time than at least one of the color image channels with the CFA sensor within one image; producing a panchromatic edge map and a color edge map from the CFA image; using the panchromatic edge map and the color edge map to provide motion estimates; and using the motion estimates to modify at least one of the channels of the CFA image or full-color image. | 05-13-2010 |
20100119149 | Image processing apparatus and method of enhancing depth perception - Disclosed is an image processing apparatus and method for enhancing a depth perception. The image processing apparatus and method for enhancing the depth perception may classify an input image including a plurality of layers according to a depth into a foreground layer, a middle layer, and a background layer, and process a colour component of each of the layers. The image processing apparatus and method for enhancing the depth perception may enhance the depth perception by stages according to the depth, thereby generating an image expressing natural realism. | 05-13-2010 |
20100119150 | IMAGE PROCESSOR, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processor that corrects an image signal, includes: a frequency analysis section that analyzes a spatial frequency of a luminance component of the image signal; a luminance component correction amount calculating section that calculates an amount of correction of the luminance component of the image signal according to the analysis result of the frequency analysis section only for an image signal in a predetermined luminance level range of a predetermined spatial frequency band; and a luminance component correcting section that corrects the luminance component of the image signal by using the amount of correction calculated by the luminance component correction amount calculating section. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124373 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING IMAGE - An image processing apparatus and method are provided. In an exemplary method, noise of a main image signal is removed or reduced, using information about a subsidiary image signal with sensitivity higher than the main image signal or information about the main image signal, and details of the main image signal are restored using high-frequency components of the subsidiary image signal. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124374 | METHOD OF DETECTING AND RECTIFYING RED-EYES AUTOMATICALLY WHEN TAKING PHOTOS - The present invention discloses a method for automatically detecting and correcting red eye in a photo taking process. The method utilizes a preview function which all of the current digital cameras have. When flash light is needed during the photo taking process, an image which is closest to the shutter pressing time is read from a preview image sequence and this image is stored. Then, red eye detection is performed according to various related information (e.g., chroma information) of this image and the image actually taken. A correction process is conducted on the detected red eye area. The corrected image is stored as a resulting image in a storage unit in the camera. Therefore, the red eye is removed rapidly and accurately during a single normal exposure process and the image without red eye is thus obtained. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128980 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHROMA KEY PRODUCTION - The method and apparatus for generating an adaptive chroma key includes taking into consideration foreground object information during the creation of a composite scene. The luminance and chrominance of an area of interest between a foreground key and a background scene are considered and accounted for during the created of the composite scene. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128981 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM FOR SUPERIOR IMAGE OUTPUT - An image processing apparatus includes the following elements. An image data obtaining unit obtains image data. A sampling unit samples the image data. A statistic value determining unit determines a statistic value based on statistic information in a histogram with respect to a grayscale value of image data that is obtained by performing rough quantization and linear interpolation on the sampled image data. A correction-amount determining unit determines a correction amount to be used for image processing based on the statistic value. An image processing unit performs the image processing according to the correction amount. | 05-27-2010 |
20100142814 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE FOR TONAL BALANCING OF MOSAIC IMAGES AND RELATED METHODS - An image processing device may include a memory, and a controller cooperating with the memory for registering images including overlapping portions to define a mosaic image. The controller is also for determining an exemplar, generating tonal values for the exemplar, and generating adjustment tonal values for at least some of the images based upon the tonal values for the exemplar to thereby provide tonal balancing for the mosaic image. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142815 | Method and apparatus for correcting depth image - An apparatus and method for correcting a depth image of an object based on a table, the table being formed according to color identification information of a target color, and a first measurement error in which a difference between a ground truth depth value of a base color and a measured depth value of the target color is reflected. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142816 | Device for Detecting Anomalies in a Digital Image - The aim of the inventive device is to facilitate the verification of conformity between an anticipated digital image, or reference image, and a digital image actually obtained. The inventive device implements a method that makes it possible to quickly and effectively distinguish the differences between a reference image and an obtained image. The inventive device comprises means that take as input the two images, reference and obtained, and produce as output a single image, resulting from the merging of the two input images in which the portions common to both images are represented in shades of grey, the differences between the first and the second image being represented in green or red depending on whether they belong to the first or the second image. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142817 | Signal correcting method - A signal correcting method includes: obtaining multiple types of signals at each of a plurality of points; extracting a point with signal values corresponding to the multiple types of signals, which have a predetermined relationship to signal values of the multiple types of signals at a target point; and correcting the multiple types of signals at the target point based upon the signal values corresponding to the multiple types of signals at the target point and the signal values corresponding to the multiple types of signals at the extracted point. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150437 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING PHOTO PRODUCT TEMPLATES - A system and method for processing digital photo product templates to enhance a personalized photo product and to enable greater flexibility when selecting options for the photo product template. One or more photo product templates can be defined as a series of objects, some of which are capable of being colorized by a user. Color sets applicable to the photo product template can be displayed based on a predefined set of colors and/or a user-defined “seed color”. The selected color sets can be automatically applied to the photo product template utilizing a predefined rank. The color sets can be ranked and complementary color set suggestions provided based on the evaluation of the colors in an image. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150438 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING INTEGRATED REMOTE CUSTOM RENDERING PROFILE - A system and method for creating a remote custom rendering profile and automatically delivering and installing the resulting remote custom profile into a digital front end (DFE) in order to perform color management for a rendering device. A color test rendering job comprising color swatches with a number of additional information can be forwarded to a remote service provider and the test job can be scanned and the custom rendering profile can be generated utilizing a profiler application. The resultant rendering profile can then be electronically transferred back to the rendering device based on the additional information and can be installed without user intervention. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150439 | Apparatus and method for adjusting auto white balance using effective area - An apparatus and method for auto white balance adjusting using an effective area. The auto white balance adjusting apparatus may extract a grey area from an input image, and select an effective area from the grey area according to color temperature and luminance, thereby performing white balance using the effective area. The auto white balance adjusting apparatus may perform white balance of the input image using image information of the effective area which is a more precise grey area, thereby improving the white balance. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150440 | COLOR INTERPOLATION APPARATUS - A color interpolation apparatus includes: a threshold value determining unit that calculates a luminance value of each of a plurality of areas set based on each pixel of a bayer pattern image generated by an image sensor, and determines edge determining threshold values used for determining each edge of the set areas; an edge information calculating unit that calculates pixel value variations in multiple directions of horizontal, vertical, diagonal, and central directions of the corresponding set areas by using pixel values of pixels included in each set area, and calculates edge information regarding each set area by using the calculated multi-directional pixel value variations; an area determining unit that determines a type of an edge present in each set area by using the edge determining threshold values deterred by the threshold value determining unit and the edge information calculated by the edge information calculating unit; and a color interpolation unit that applies a color interpolation filter previously set according to the edge types to a corresponding set area according to the edge types determined for each region set by the area determining unit. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150441 | Strategies for Processing Image Information Using a Color Information Data Structure - Strategies are described for processing image information using a data structure which conveys color information. The color information describes color-related formatting applied to the image information. The data structure can be passed down a video processing pipeline, where each functional component in the pipeline can draw color information from the data structure to improve the accuracy of its processing. Further, each component can supply previously unknown color information to the data structure for use by other (downstream) components in the pipeline. Exemplary fields of the data structure can include one or more of: a video transfer function field; a color primaries field; an image light field; a transfer matrix field; a nominal range field; and a video chroma sampling field. The transfer matrix field can be used to convert image information from one color space to another, such as a luma-related color space to an RGB-related color space. Processing operations can be performed on progressive and linear RGB image information. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150442 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SKIN COLOR CORRECTION AND DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHING APPARATUS USING BOTH - An apparatus and method of correcting skin color in an image is disclosed. The method may include extracting skin colors; analyzing the extracted skin colors to calculate axes of a different vector space; transforming the extracted skin colors to the different vector space; using the result of the transformed skin colors to identify a color from an input image as a skin color; and correcting the color identified as a skin color. The different vector space may be a principal components analysis (PCA) vector space. Extracting skin colors may include detecting a face region as a skin region in an input image and extracting skin colors from the face region. A lookup table be generated according to the result of projecting the skin colors to fewer dimensions of the different vector space. Extracting skin colors may include extracting colors from a training image of skin colors. | 06-17-2010 |
20100158366 | Continuous Color Grading Technique - The continuity of at least one image characteristic, such as color, is maintained through image creation, processing and distribution by correlating that characteristic to a frame of reference. During a first processing operation such as image capture, an initial image decision list is generated indicative of at least a one change in at least one characteristic of an image adjusted during that operation. At the completion of that operation, the image is transformed to emulate a film print that serves as the reference for subsequent operations. In this way, the initial image decision list can be modified to further adjust the at least one characteristic of the image using the emulated film print during a second image processing operation. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158367 | MODELING SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AN INPUT IMAGING DEVICE - A method of modeling spectral characteristics of an input imaging device comprising includes adjusting digital values measured from a target to be linear relative to luminance of neutral patches of the target, for each channel of the input imaging device. The method further includes modifying the adjusted digital values to compensate for cross-channel interaction, for each channel of the input imaging device. In addition, the method includes converting the modified digital values to a spectrum, for each channel of the imaging device. An apparatus for modeling spectral characteristics of an input imaging device is also provided. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158368 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device may create corrected image data by correcting target image data. The image processing device may determine a representative value which represents specific pixels in the object image data, determine a target value based on the representative value and a degree of correction designated by a user, and correct a value of each particular pixel included in the object image data such that the value of the each particular pixel approaches the target value. The each particular pixel may be included in a surrounding area of the representative value. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158369 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device may create corrected image data by correcting object image data by utilizing base image data. The image processing device may determine a first polar coordinate value which represents first pixels in the object image data, calculate a first orthogonal coordinate by executing an orthogonal transformation on the first polar coordinate value, determine a second polar coordinate value which represents second pixels in the base image data, calculate a second orthogonal coordinate value by executing an orthogonal transformation on the second polar coordinate value, and create the corrected image data by correcting the object image data such that a coordinate value of each particular pixel in the object image data approaches the second orthogonal coordinate value. The each particular pixel may be included in a surrounding area of the first orthogonal coordinate value. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158370 | SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE, SIGNAL PROCESSING PROGRAM AND ELECTRONIC CAMERA - The present invention includes a color converting section carrying out color conversion processing and a coefficient correcting section setting a correcting coefficient group to a coefficient group of the color conversion. The coefficient correcting section sets a local area containing a pixel to be processed, and calculates “feature information of the local area” containing at least one of averaged color information, averaged luminance information, and flatness on the basis of the pixel signals of the local area. The coefficient correcting section determines a correcting coefficient group to be used for the pixel to be processed on the basis of the feature information of the local area. With this construction, the present invention suppresses influence of noise when changing the color conversion processing for each pixel. | 06-24-2010 |
20100166304 | Method for Adjusting Skin Color of Digital Image - A method for adjusting a skin color of a digital image adjusts the skin color of an input image. The method includes performing a skin color detection process on the input image to generate a skin-color probability plot Sp in a size corresponding to the input image; providing a hue-saturation lookup table named LUT_Color; performing a skin-color reproduction process on the input image to look up the LUT_Color for a chrominance pixel value for each pixel value of the input image to generate a first image, and adjust each pixel value of the first image by using the skin-color probability plot Sp to generate a second image; performing a skin color smoothing process on the second image to generate a third image; and mixing pixel values of the input image and the third image to generate a target image. | 07-01-2010 |
20100166305 | METHOD FOR DETECTING AND CORRECTING CHROMATIC ABERRATION, AND APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING IMAGE USING THE SAME - A method for detecting and correcting a chromatic aberration, and an apparatus and method for processing an image using the same are provided. A chromatic aberration is detected by dividing an edge portion of the image into static areas where a color varies below a reference value and a dynamic area where a color varies above the reference value, calculating a intensity difference value between at least one reference color and a comparative color for each of the static areas and the dynamic area, and determining at least one pixel having a intensity difference value exceeding a range of intensity difference values in the static areas among pixels in the dynamic area, as a chromatic aberration region. The chromatic aberration is corrected by correcting the intensity difference value for the pixels in the chromatic aberration region using a correction value in the intensity difference value range in the static area. | 07-01-2010 |
20100166306 | COLOR CONVERSION TABLE CREATING DEVICE - A color conversion table creating device for creating a color conversion table for converting first color data defined in a first color space to second color data defined in a second color space different from the first color space, includes a first data acquiring unit, a reference value determining unit, a lightness judging unit, a third data determining unit, and a creating unit. The first data acquiring unit is configured to acquire a plurality of sets of first data defined in the first color space. The first data sets are determined by measuring test patches each corresponding to a set of second data defined in the second color space. The first data sets include a set of black color data corresponding to data representing black in the second color space. Each first data set has a lightness value. The reference value determining unit is configured to determine a reference value based on a lightness value of the black color data set. The lightness judging unit is configured to judge, for each first data set, whether or not a lightness value of the subject first data set is smaller than the reference value. The third data determining unit is configured to determine the first data set as a set of third data when the lightness judging unit judges that the lightness value of the first data set is smaller than the reference value. The creating unit creates a color conversion table based on the first data sets excluding the third data set. | 07-01-2010 |
20100166307 | Method and Apparatus for Removing Noise from a Digital Image - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system that removes noise from an image. During operation, the system first identifies blobs in the image, wherein a blob is a set of contiguous pixels which possibly represents a character or a portion of a character in the image. Next, the system analyzes the blobs to dynamically determine a “noise threshold” for the blobs. The system then removes blobs from the image which are below the noise threshold. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172584 | Method Of Classifying Red-Eye Objects Using Feature Extraction And Classifiers - Disclosed are methods, devices, and computer program products for red-eye detection in an image. In one example embodiment, a method for detecting red-eye objects in an image includes several acts. First, a set of candidate red-eye objects identified in the image is received. Then, features are extracted from the candidate red-eye objects and, with a plurality of classifiers, a false red-eye object is eliminated from the set of candidate red-eye objects based on the extracted features. First and second ones of the plurality of classifiers are optimized for classifying objects in a first range of sizes using first and second ones of the extracted features, respectively. Furthermore, third and fourth ones of the plurality of classifiers are also optimized for classifying objects using the first and second ones of the extracted features, respectively, but for objects in a second range of sizes. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177960 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a red eye candidate detecting section, a red eye-gold eye separating section, a gold eye converting section, and a red eye correcting section. Herein, the red eye candidate detecting section detects a red eye candidate included in images. The red eye-gold eye separating section judges whether a red eye candidate detected by the red eye candidate detecting section is either red eye or a gold eye respectively specified in a predetermined color range. The gold eye converting section converts a color of the red eye candidate, which was judged as red eye by the red eye-gold eye separating section, into a color, which is judged as a red eye by the red eye-gold eye separating section. The red eye correcting section performs a red eye correction to a color of the red eye candidate converted by the gold eye converting section. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177961 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMAGE DEMOSAICING - A method for generating an interpolated output image, including generating a first interpolation array including RGB values, at least one of which is interpolated, based on a first interpolation region, and generating a first homogeneity array based on the first interpolation array including homogeneity values calculated based on a first homogeneity neighborhood having the same pixel locations as the first interpolation region. The method includes generating a second interpolation array based on a second interpolation region, and generating a second homogeneity array based on the second interpolation array and a second homogeneity neighborhood, where the second homogeneity neighborhood includes the same pixel locations as the second interpolation region. The method includes determining, for a first pixel location, that the homogeneity value in the first homogeneity array is greater than the homogeneity value in the second homogeneity array, and outputting the RGB color values in the first interpolation array. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177962 | System and Method for Adaptively Sharpening Digital Images - Embodiments of the invention provide a technique to sharpen luminance data associated with each pixel of a digital image without introducing certain sharpening artifacts. An alpha mask is generated based on first, second, and third alpha submasks that indicate how strongly overshoot, color fringe, and dark regions, respectively, are detected at each pixel location. The alpha mask is used to combine luminance data derived from the digital image with sharpened luminance data that is generated by applying a sharpening filter to the luminance data. | 07-15-2010 |
20100189348 | SPOT COLOR TABLE COMPENSATION - Spot color tables, or spot color emulation colorant recipes are updated using information generated during a first and second process color related system calibration. Rather than separately calibrate, through trial and error, individual spot color emulation colorant recipes, information from the first and second general system calibrations is used to adjust spot color recipes. In one embodiment, processing an existing or initial spot color recipe through both a first system model and a second system model generates a device independent color difference. A colorant difference is then determined by transforming a predicted color difference according to estimated partial derivatives of aspects of the second system model, wherein the partial derivatives relate changes in colorant amounts to changes in parameter values of a machine independent color space. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189349 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, DISPLAY DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND ITS PROGRAM - To provide an image processing device, a method and its program, and a display device capable of properly performing gray-scale extension processing with low costs. An image processing device including a detection unit | 07-29-2010 |
20100189350 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus for tone conversion of a color image having s bit (s is an integer which is equal to or larger than 3) to a color image having d bit (d is an integer which is equal to or smaller than (s−2)) comprises: a conversion table generation unit configured to generate a conversion table, which varies in dependence on a tone value of the s bit, and has dispersion of which level varies in accordance with chroma and luminance of the color image; and a tone conversion unit configured to convert, before image compression or image file storage is performed and after color space conversion is performed, the color image having s bit to the color image having d bit using the conversion table. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195905 | METHOD OF SETTING CONTRAST IN DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING, AND AN ARRANGEMENT FOR THIS PURPOSE - The invention relates to a method of setting contrast in digital image processing in which a brightness distribution in the form of a histogram is produced from image pixels and the histogram is revised with the help of transfer functions, and in which a linear increase in contrast takes place in a region of the image. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195906 | AUTOMATIC IMAGE ENHANCEMENT - Disclosed is a method for correction of pixel values of an input image to compensate for variation in image capturing conditions is proposed. In an embodiment, the method enables computing a statistical value from a selected set of pixel values associated with the input image. Based, at least in part, on the computed statistical value a set of parameter values is derived. The parameter values correspond to at least two gompertz functions. The method further enables applying the at least two gompertz functions to the input image to obtain an output image. This results in an output image with one or more corrected pixel values. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195907 | IMAGE PROCESSOR FOR CORRECTING IMAGE DATA - An acquiring unit acquires image data and ambient light data indicating a first color for a first ambient light and a second color for a second ambient light. A third color of a first pixel data is closer to the first color than the second color. A fourth color of a second pixel data is closer to the second color than the first color. A correcting unit corrects the first pixel data such that a third color-appearance of a pixel according to the corrected first pixel data under the second ambient light is perceived as a color-appearance that is the same as a fourth color-appearance of a pixel according to the first pixel data under the first ambient light. The correcting unit corrects the second pixel data such that a fifth color-appearance of a pixel according to the corrected second pixel data under the second ambient light is perceived as a color-appearance that is different from a sixth color-appearance of a pixel according to the second pixel data under the first ambient light and a correction degree by which the correcting unit corrects the second pixel data is less than a correction degree by which the correcting unit corrects the first pixel data. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195908 | DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING AND SYSTEMS INCORPORATING THE SAME - In at least one embodiment, a spectrally mozaiced digital image is provided with missing color data imputed for each pixel. At least one embodiment of the present invention is related to circuitry configured to perform at least a portion of the calculations related to demosaicing a high dynamic range image. | 08-05-2010 |
20100208990 | COMPENSATION METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING COLOR SHADING IN DIGITAL IMAGE - A compensation method for alleviating color shading in a digital image is adapted to correct a color shading phenomenon in a digital image that causes luminance differences between regions in the digital image. The compensation method includes capturing a uniform color block image; calculating horizontal compensation coefficients of a plurality of horizontal segments of the color block image; performing a linear interpolation process on the horizontal compensation coefficients to generate corresponding horizontal interpolation coefficients, and calculating determination horizontal correction coefficients corresponding to all the horizontal segments, respectively; calculating vertical compensation coefficients of a plurality of vertical segments; multiplying the determination horizontal correction coefficients by the vertical compensation coefficients, respectively, so as to obtain a color shading compensation coefficient of each segment, respectively; and multiplying an average luminance value of each segment by a corresponding color shading compensation coefficient, respectively, thus compensating for color shading in the color block image. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208991 | IMAGE GENERATION METHOD AND APPARATUS, PROGRAM THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM WHICH STORES THE PROGRAM - An image generation method for generating image information of a color signal Y of an image A by using a color signal X of image A, and color signal X and color signal Y of an image B. The presence or absence of a point in color signal X of image B corresponding to each pixel position of color signal X of image A, and the position of the relevant corresponding point are estimated. To each estimated pixel position in color signal Y of image A, image information of the corresponding position in the second color signal Y of image B is assigned. Color signal Y at a pixel position in image A for which it is estimated that there is no corresponding point is generated by using the image information of color signal Y assigned to pixels having a corresponding point. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208992 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus sets the pixels of an input image as process target pixels by using low pass filters (LPF # | 08-19-2010 |
20100215264 | IMAGE TRANSFORM APPARATUS AND IMAGE TRANSFORM PROGRAM - An image transform apparatus includes: a resolution device performing wavelet resolution based on an image representing distribution of psycho-physical color to generate sub band images at one resolution level or more; a transform device transforming values of pixels of the sub band images from values of the psycho-physical color to values of perceived color based on a predetermined relation between the psycho-physical color and the perceived color; and a synthesis device performing wavelet synthesis based on the sub band images at one resolution level or more resulting from the transform by the transform device, to generate an image representing distribution of the perceived color, thereby correlating a color system of psycho-physical color (for example, the XYZ color system) and a color system of perceived color (for example, the L*a*b* color system) to each other without setting standard light. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215265 | Image processing device and method for reducing color artifact - An image processing device and method is provided to reduce color artifact. A smooth unit performs a smooth operation on color signal corresponding to a pixel and adjacent pixels to generate smooth color signal. A level shifter performs a level-shifting on the smooth color signal to obtain level-shifted color signal. A color strength unit calculates a color strength indicator based on the color signal. A gray level decision unit is connected to the color strength unit for deciding whether the pixel is in a gray level region or not based on the color strength indicators of the pixel and adjacent pixels to generate a gray level indicator. An adjustment unit adjusts the smooth color signal and the level-shifted color signal based on the gray level indicator to generate an output color signal. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215266 | Image processing device and method, and program recording medium - To enhance the accuracy of detection correction of a defective pixel. An image processing device including a predominant color edge detection unit for detecting an edge using a predominant color signal which is a color signal with the highest appearance frequency; a sub-color parameter calculation unit for calculating, with respect to a sub-color signal or a color signal other than the predominant color signal, from a pixel of interest and neighboring pixels of the same color as the pixel of interest, a sub-color parameter value related to a degree of isolated point of the pixel of interest; and a sub-color isolated point correction unit for correcting the pixel of interest based on the sub-color parameter value and the information of the edge. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215267 | Method and Apparatus for Spatial Noise Adaptive Filtering for Digital Image and Video Capture Systems - A system and method of adaptive edge detection and noise reduction in an image where edge information is detected for each color component of each pixel, whether sensed or synthesized. In some embodiments, the filter applied to a selected non-edge pixel may be determined by the ultimate size of a region around the selected pixel, where the size of the region may be increased if a count of the non-edge pixels in the region is less than a threshold value. | 08-26-2010 |
20100226570 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FUSION OF IMAGE PAIRS UTILIZING ATMOSPHERIC AND SOLAR ILLUMINATION MODELING - A method for processing imagery includes receiving data ( | 09-09-2010 |
20100226571 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR IMAGE PROCESSING - An image processing apparatus includes a first calculating section that calculates a non-contour degree for pixel of a processing target image data, a second calculating section that calculates a thin line degree for pixel of the processing target image data, a region extracting section that extracts a thin line or non-contour region based on the non-contour degree and the thin line degree and a color value extracting section. The color value extracting section extracts a color value within a range of a predetermined number of colors based on a color used in the thin line or non-contour region extracted by the region extracting section in the processing target image data. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226572 | COLOR CORRECTION CIRCUIT AND IMAGE DISPLAY APPARATUS USING SAME - A color correction circuit includes a detection part configured to detect the luminance information and chromaticity histogram information of an input video signal of one of an RGB color space and a YCbCr color space, the chromaticity histogram information including chroma and hue information; and a control part configured to control the color reproduction of the video signal based on the luminance information and the chromaticity histogram information detected by the detection part. The detection part includes a hue detection part configured to convert the video signal to an HSV color space and to detect a hue of the video signal from hues of the HSV color space. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232692 | CFA IMAGE WITH SYNTHETIC PANCHROMATIC IMAGE - A method for forming a final digital color image with reduced motion blur including of a processor for providing images having panchromatic pixels and color pixels corresponding to at least two color photo responses, interpolating between the panchromatic pixels and color pixels to produce a panchromatic image and a full-resolution color image to produce a fall-resolution synthetic panchromatic image from the fill-resolution color image; and developing color correction weights in response to the synthetic panchromatic image and the panchromatic image; and using the color correction weights to modify the fill-resolution color image to provide a final color digital image. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232693 | MAPPING AN OUT OF GAMUT RGB COLOR TO A GAMUT SURFACE - What is disclosed is a system and method for mapping an out of gamut RGB color to a surface of a color gamut in RGB space. A point x | 09-16-2010 |
20100232694 | Minimizing Unwanted Changes Of Color During Image Processing - An image is processed in a device-independent color space by applying a modification function to one or more dimensions of that color space. The image is then converted into a target device-dependent color space. In order to minimize unwanted changes of color arising from the modification function taking image color values out of gamut when converted to the target device-dependent color space, the modification function is scaled to limit modified image values to within modification limits that are determined, for each image pixel or group of pixels, in dependence on the target device-dependent color space gamut boundary in the device-independent color space. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232695 | VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING RECORDED THEREIN VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING PROGRAM - An excellent image is obtained by performing a noise reduction process taking into account a color component. By performing color space conversion on a color video signal, a first color converted signal is generated. By performing color space conversion on a color video signal of a past frame, a second color converted signal is generated. A noise-reduced signal is generated from the first color converted signal and the second color converted signal. The noise-reduced signal is subjected to inverse conversion. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232696 | ALBUM CREATING APPARATUS, ALBUM CREATING METHOD, AND ALBUM CREATING PROGRAM - A color scheme suitable for a captured position is performed on a portion except a captured image based on position information of the captured image. The album creating apparatus according to the present invention includes a captured position specifying section that specifies a captured position at which a captured image constituting an album is taken, an image storing section that stores a captured images in association with a captured position, an image classifying section that classifies a plurality of captured images stored on the image storing section into captured image groups based on the captured position, a color selecting section that selects a color to be used in a portion except the captured image in the album based on the captured position specified by the captured position specifying section, a color adding section that uses the color selected by the color selecting section to add color to the portion except the captured image in the album, and an image arranging section. | 09-16-2010 |
20100239162 | LOCAL REGRESSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEMS - This disclosure provides methods, apparatus and systems for performing image processing regression for approximating multidimensional color transformation. According to an exemplary method, a shaping matrix is selected to minimize a cost function associated with a local linear regression representation of the color transformation. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246947 | IMAGE BACKGROUND ENHANCEMENT FOR COLOR IMAGES - A technique is provided for enhancing the background of an original document image. In the case of a black-and-white image, the background color of the original document image is detected, the desired enhanced background color of the original document image is determined from a background pixel value P | 09-30-2010 |
20100246948 | Systems and Methods for Enhancing Image Differences - Methods disclosed permit the enhancement of difference images associated with an image pair. In some embodiments, an enhanced difference image may be generated by selecting at least one non-zero target pixel in a thresholded difference image and performing operations on pixels that neighbor the target pixel in the thresholded difference image based on the value associated with the target pixel. In some embodiments, the operations on neighbors of the target pixel may be carried out using a user-specified paintbrush. The enhanced difference image may be rendered using a monitor or a printer. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246949 | COMPENSATION METHOD FOR REMOVING IMAGE NOISE - A compensation method for removing an image noise is applicable to compensate for noises generated by Bayer pattern color interpolation. The compensation method includes the following steps selecting a partial region in the Bayer pattern to set a selection region; selecting a plurality of color units from the selection region one by one, in which each of the color units at least includes a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel; sequentially performing a color weight adjustment on the green pixel, the red pixel, and the blue pixel; and compensating for the pixel in the selection region according to each color weight, so as to generate a recovered pixel. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246950 | Color Enhancement - In an image processor, a color format converter (CFC) converts a pixel (P | 09-30-2010 |
20100246951 | COLOUR CORRECTING FOREGROUND COLOURS FOR VISUAL QUALITY IMPROVEMENT | 09-30-2010 |
20100246952 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMAGE RESTORATION IN THE SPATIAL DOMAIN - Method and system embodiments of the present invention are directed to restoration of corrupted images using spatial-domain image-processing methods that can effectively employ spatial-domain information both in order to avoid various types of artifacts and distortions produced by frequency-domain image-processing operations and to achieve computational efficiency. The various method and system embodiments of the present invention employ a family of penalty functions to constrain iterative restoration images corrupted by both deterministic corruptions, such as motion-induced blur and blurring due to optical misalignment, incorrect positioning of optical components, and defective optical components as well as essentially non-deterministic noise corruption introduced at various stages of image acquisition, image encoding, image storage, and image transmission. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254601 | Method and device for use in converting a colour image into a grayscale image - A computerised device for converting a colour image data indicative of a plurality of colour image regions defining a two-dimensional colour image, into a grayscale image data indicative of a plurality of grayscale image regions defining a two-dimensional grayscale image, each of the colour image regions corresponding to one of the grayscale image regions, and wherein a luminance information and a two-dimensional chromatic information is associated with each of the colour image regions, wherein the device includes a processor and a memory store, said memory store being adapted to store a program executable by the processor so as to perform the following method steps:
| 10-07-2010 |
20100254602 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD AND A COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM ON WHICH AN IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM IS STORED - An image processing apparatus converts an input data indicative of a fish-eye image into an output data indicative of a plane image. The apparatus includes an input data conversion unit that converts the fish-eye image into the input data including an input data pixel information and an input data color information; a fish-eye image corrected address generating unit that generates, based on the input data pixel information, an output data pixel information; an input data color information acquiring unit that acquires the input data color information based on a pattern of a color filter array; an output data color information calculating unit that calculates, based on the input data color information, an output data color information; an output data generating unit that generates the output data including the output data pixel information and the output data color information; and a storage unit that stores the input and output data. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260419 | IMAGE CORRECTION METHOD, IMAGE CORRECTION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - An image correction device includes a scene belonging rate computation unit that computes, from the feature value of an input image, a plurality of scene belonging rates each of which prescribes a probability with which the input image belongs to each category scene; an unknown scene belonging rate specification unit that specifies an unknown scene belonging rate prescribing a probability with which the input image belongs to an unknown scene; a by-scene correction parameter memory unit that stores by-scene correction parameters; a correction parameter combination unit that computes a combined correction parameter that is the weighted average of the correction parameters using the plurality of scene belonging rates and the unknown scene belonging rate; and an image correction unit that performs image correction processing for the input image using the combined correction parameter. | 10-14-2010 |
20100266201 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING IMAGE CORRECTION - A system and method for correcting image data. Embodiments of the present invention provide image correction to overcome various lens effects, optical crosstalk, and electrical crosstalk. In one embodiment, the method includes accessing, within an electronic system, a plurality of control points for a patch of a spline surface and calculating a plurality of intermediate control points corresponding to a row of pixels of the patch. The method further includes receiving a pixel of an image and correcting the pixel based on the plurality of intermediate control points in streaming scanline column-wise or row-wise order. | 10-21-2010 |
20100266202 | IMAGING PROCESSOR, BODY-INTRODUCABLE APPARATUS, MEDICAL SYSTEM AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An imaging processor includes an amplifier that increases luminance indicated by green and blue image data on the basis of luminance indicated by red image data out of a plurality of pieces of image data in respective wavelength components, which are pieces of image data representing the same area. | 10-21-2010 |
20100272355 | ADAPTIVE SPATIAL GAMUT MAPPING VIA DYNAMIC THRESHOLDING - What is disclosed is a novel system and method for performing spatial gamut mapping on a received input color image having a plurality of pixels. A standard gamut-mapping algorithm is applied to the input color image to produce a gamut-mapped color image. A difference is computed between a selected channel of the input color image and the gamut-mapped image to produce a difference image. A local measure of complexity is derived for a given pixel in the difference image. One or more parameter values of a spatial bilateral filter are obtained from a lookup table based on the computed local measure of complexity. The spatial bilateral filter is applied, using the obtained parameter values, to the current pixel of the difference image to produce a modified pixel in a modified difference image. Thereafter, a modified gamut-mapped color image is obtained from the modified difference image and the gamut-mapped color image. | 10-28-2010 |
20100284614 | Blue sky color detection technique - An image enhancement technique includes a filter that receives an input image and provides a low-pass filtered image that maintains a substantial number of edges therein. The low pass filtered image is provided a likelihood of being a sky color for each pixel of the low pass filtered image. The low-pass filtered image is filtered based upon a user selection to selectively enhance the sky color. The low-pass filtered image and the filtered low-pass filtered image are blended based upon the user selection based upon the likelihood. The blended image is combined with a high pass filtered input image to provide an enhanced image. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284615 | SPATIALLY BASED TRANSFORMATION OF SPOT COLORS - Colorant recipes for spot colors, or colors associated with vector graphic objects, are transformed to compensate for spatial variation in a rendering device. Inverted Jacobians of color production performance can be used to transform color deviations into colorant recipe changes. The colorant recipe changes are applied to original colorant recipes to provide the transformed colorant recipes. Jacobians can be determined by exercising a system model according to perturbations of the colorant recipes. Alternatively, test patches or strips based on perturbed original colorant recipes can be rendered and measured and the Jacobians can be based on such measurements. Alternatively, spatially dependent tone reproduction curves can be used to transform the colorant recipes associated with the vector graphic objects. Image processing systems can include a spatial variation information determiner, a spatial compensation information determiner and a colorant recipe transformer. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284616 | TEETH LOCATING AND WHITENING IN A DIGITAL IMAGE - A method for changing the color of teeth in a digital image is disclosed herein. An embodiment of the method comprises locating the position of a mouth region in the digital image; defining a correction zone associated with the mouth region; calculating the probability that at least one pixel in the correction zone represents a tooth; and changing the color of the at least one pixel by an amount that is proportional to the probability. | 11-11-2010 |
20100296731 | Information processing device and method and program - An information processing device includes: a control unit to determine whether to perform, according to the relation between a gamut of an image subjected to gamut conversion beforehand and a target gamut, a first conversion processing to perform gamut conversion processing to convert the gamut of the image into the target gamut after performing restoring processing to return at least a portion of the image gamut into the state before the gamut conversion, and a second conversion processing to perform the gamut conversion processing without performing the restoring processing; a restoring unit to execute the restoring processing according to control by the control unit; and a gamut conversion unit to execute the gamut conversion processing according to control by the control unit. | 11-25-2010 |
20100303350 | Purple Fringing Artifact Reduction - Methods and a processing device are provided for reducing purple fringing artifacts appearing in a digital image. A linear filter may be applied to a digital image to identify purplish candidate regions of pixels. Ones of pixels that are in any of the purplish candidate regions and are within a predefined distance of a high gradient/high contrast region may be identified as damaged pixels. A map of the damaged pixels may then be created, or formed. The damaged pixels may be reconstructed based on interpolation of values from undamaged pixels on a fringe boundary with guidance from a green channel. In various embodiments, the damaged pixels may be reconstructed based on a Poisson blending approach, an approximated Poisson blending approach, or a variety of approaches based on interpolation of values from undamaged pixels on a fringe boundary, with guidance from a green channel. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303351 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a unit configured to calculate a plurality of characteristic amounts from an input image, a unit configured to calculate a first multidimensional lookup table based on the characteristic amounts, a unit configured to calculate attribute information of a specific object from the input image, a unit configured to calculate a second multidimensional lookup table based on the attribute information, a unit configured to generate a control parameter from the input image, an interpolation unit configured to apply the first and second multidimensional lookup tables to the input image, and a control unit configured to control interpolation intensity of the second multidimensional lookup table using the control parameter. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303352 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - When determining an area in which color blur occurs from an image, there may be an area where color blur suppression is performed in an area even though color blur does not occur, and the area becomes more noticeable or less noticeable depending on a degree of gamma correction processing. To solve this problem, an image processing apparatus obtains a color blur suppression coefficient based on a gradient value obtained from the image, performs color blur suppression on the image data using the color blur suppression coefficient, and changes the color blur suppression coefficient corresponding to the gradient value according to brightness. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303353 | Output image data generating device and method of generating output image data - A CPU selects multiple objective image data to be pasted on ornamental image data, analyzes the selected multiple objective image data, and rates the image qualities of the respective image data. The CPU specifies the number of plural layout locations included in the ornamental image data and the priority order of the plural layout locations, and allocates the multiple objective image data to the plural layout locations in the ornamental image data, based on the specified priority order and the ratings of the multiple objective image data. The CPU executes image quality adjustment with regard to the multiple objective image data allocated to the plural layout locations and pastes the quality-adjusted image data on the ornamental image data according to layout control information, so as to generate resulting output image data. | 12-02-2010 |
20100310162 | COLOR INTERPOLATION METHOD FOR DIGITAL IMAGE - A color interpolation method for a digital image is described, includes the following steps. Edge information is generated according to the Bayer pattern. A Bayer pattern image is processed by a horizontal band-pass filter and a vertical band-pass filter to generate a horizontal edge signal and a vertical edge signal. A weight process implements a weight adjustment on the horizontal edge signal and the vertical edge signal to generate a luminance signal and outputs the luminance signal to a subtraction unit. The subtraction unit carries out an operation according to the Bayer pattern image and an output result of the weight process to generate a chrominance pattern. The chrominance pattern is compensated through a chrominance interpolation process, so as to generate image signal patterns of different colors. The image signal patterns of different colors are output to an adder for an add operation, thereby outputting a complete color image. | 12-09-2010 |
20100310163 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FILTERING NOISE IN AN IMAGE - A method for filtering noise in an image filters noise pixels in a discrepant block between a current image and a background image firstly, and further filter each small block whose area is less than a preset value from the discrepant block. The method further calculates a total area of each big block whose area is greater than or equal to the preset value from the discrepant block, and adds the current image to a background list of the current image if the total area is less than another preset value. | 12-09-2010 |
20100310164 | COLOR IMAGE OR VIDEO PROCESSING - The present invention relates generally to color image processing. One claim recites a method of color masking an image or video including: reading color values of an image sample of the image or video and a corresponding change of an attribute of the image sample; and based on the color values of the image sample, and using a programmed electronic processor, mapping the change in the image sample attribute to a change in color components of the image sample that is equivalent to the change in the image sample attribute, yet reduces visibility of the change in the image sample attribute for the specific color values of the image sample. Another claim recites a method including: obtaining data representing digital imagery or video; analyzing at least a portion of the data to determine one or more color characteristics associated with the at least a portion of the data, said act of analyzing yielding a result; based at least in part on the result, generating a key; and using a programmed electronic processor, embedding auxiliary data in the data representing digital imagery or video using the key. Of course other claims and combinations are provided as well. | 12-09-2010 |
20100310165 | IMAGE RESTORATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - An image restoration method is disclosed. The method is used in an image restoration apparatus and configured to restore an image captured by an imaging system. The method includes capturing a scenery image by the imaging system and applying restoration processing to the scenery image using a plurality of restoration filters respectively corresponding to a plurality of depths, to generate a plurality of restored images respectively corresponding to the depths. | 12-09-2010 |
20100310166 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD AND IMAGE DISPLAY APPARATUS - A first intermediate image generating means ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100310167 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes a calculating unit configured to calculate an evaluation amount of poor color tone for every pixel in an image and an extracting unit configured to extract a candidate pixel having the poor color tone on the basis of the evaluation amount. The evaluation amount is calculated from red and green components of the image. | 12-09-2010 |
20100322513 | Skin and sky color detection and enhancement system - An image enhancement technique that includes a filter that receives an image and generates a filtered image primarily including lower frequency content and sharp edges of the image. A skin color processing is based upon the filtered image to enhance skin tone regions of the image. A sky color processing is based upon the filtered image to enhance sky color regions of the image. A combiner calculates an output image based upon the skin color processing, the sky color processing, and higher frequency content of the image. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329553 | IMAGE SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE - The present invention aims at suppressing a noise in a low luminance part and a high luminance part and, at the same time, realizing a high contrast of the parts, and realizing high contrast of a characterizing part of the image as well. The image signal processing is provided with: a first area input-output characteristics control unit which controls change of input-output characteristics for every arbitrary areas, associated with a value of an input luminance signal; a second area input-output characteristics control unit which controls change of input-output characteristics for every arbitrary areas, associated with an output of the first area input-output characteristics control unit; and a chrominance input-output characteristics control unit which controls change of the input-output characteristics of an input chrominance signal, utilizing the output of the first area input-output characteristics control unit and the output of the second area input-output characteristics control unit. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329554 | Automatic exposure estimation for HDR images based on image statistics - A method for tone mapping high dynamic range images for display on low dynamic range displays wherein high dynamic range images are first accessed. The high dynamic range images are divided the into different regions such that each region is represented by a matrix, where each element of the matrix is a weight or probability of a pixel value. An exposure of each region is determined or calculated by estimating an anchor point in each region such that most pixels in each region are mapped to mid grey and the anchor points are adjusted to a key of the images to preserve overall brightness. The regions are then placed or mapped to zones and exposure values are applied to the regions responsive to the weight or probability. The regions are fused together to obtain a final tone mapped image. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329555 | Systems and methods for displaying scanned images with overlaid text - Disclosed are techniques and systems to provide a scanned image in which a portion of the image is overlaid with OCR generated text corresponding to the text of the original scanned document. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002539 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - A gradation conversion processor performs gradation conversion processing on image data on the basis of a predetermined gradation conversion characteristic, and a noise reduction processor performs noise reduction processing on the image data. Subsequently, a combining-ratio calculator calculates a combining ratio between the image data before the noise reduction processing performed by the noise reduction processor and the image data after the noise reduction processing on the basis of the gradation conversion characteristic, and a combiner combines the image data before the noise reduction processing performed by the noise reduction processor and the image data after the noise reduction processing on the basis of the combining ratio. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002540 | COLOR IMAGE ENHANCEMENT - A color image is enhanced in the following fashion. A saturation detector (SDT) detects a degree of color saturation (LC, CC) that occurs in an image area (SP). A filter arrangement (DE | 01-06-2011 |
20110007969 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING LENS SHADING - A lens shading correction method and apparatus are provided for removing vignetting occurring in digital images due to lens shading. A white image captured by an image pickup device and an image pickup unit is separated into reference white images corresponding to color channels. A vignetting center having a maximum light intensity is estimated in each of the reference white images. Multiple reference segments on each of the reference white images are defined. A lens shading correction value corresponding to each pixel constituting the reference segments are calculated using a corresponding light intensity. A lens shading correction function corresponding to each reference segment is derived using a corresponding lens shading correction value. Vignetting of a general image received in a general image processing mode is removed, using the derived multiple lens shading correction functions. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013832 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes a selecting unit, a boundary strength calculating unit and a color replacing unit. When M representative colors include first and second colors, and N intermediate color between the first and second colors, the selecting unit selects the first and second colors and the N intermediate color. M and N denote natural numbers, N≧1 and N01-20-2011 | |
20110013833 | Multimedia Color Management System - A color management system is described herein. Various embodiments of a method described herein can include receiving source color content that is associated with a source device, and transforming the source color content into destination color content for rendering on one or more destination devices. Various embodiments of an apparatus described herein can include a color infrastructure transformation engine that further includes a sequential transform component, which is adapted to receive source color content and to create a transform to facilitate mapping the source color content to destination color content. The color infrastructure transformation engine can also include a transform optimization component that is adapted to receive the transform and to create an optimized transform table based on the transform, and a transform execution component that is adapted to receive the optimized transform table and to generate the destination color content based thereon. | 01-20-2011 |
20110019913 | System and Method of Generating Color Correction Matrix for an Image Sensor - A system and method of generating a color correction matrix (CCM) for an image sensor are disclosed. Quantum efficiency (QE) spectra of pixels of the image sensor illuminated by a physical light source are measured. Subsequently, color values of the image sensor and color values in a predetermined color space are determined according to the QE spectra and predetermined reference data essential for deriving the color values. Finally, the CCM for the image sensor is generated by applying a fitting algorithm on the color values of the image sensor and the color values in the predetermined color space. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019914 | METHOD AND ILLUMINATION DEVICE FOR OPTICAL CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT - A method and an illumination device is provided for optical contrast enhancement of an object through a spatially and/or temporally modulated illumination of the object by way of at least one light projection unit, wherein the spatial and/or temporal modulation of the illumination of the object is determined using a set of image data associated with the object. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026821 | METHOD FOR MATCHING COLORS BETWEEN TWO SYSTEMS - A method for matching colors including comparing the appearance of a first white color associated with a first color imaging system and a second white color associated with a second color imaging system, wherein the tristimulus values of the first and second white color are similar; determining a fixed correction to the tristimulus values of the second white color to achieve a visual match to the first white color; measuring a first set of spectral values for a first color associated with the first color imaging system; determining a first set of tristimulus values from the first set of spectral values; measuring a second set of spectral values for a second color associated with the second color imaging system; determining a second set of tristimulus values from the second set of spectral values; applying a correction to the tristimulus values of the second color; determining a difference between the tristimulus value of the first color and the corrected tristimulus value of the second color; and adjusting the second color to reduce the difference. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026822 | STSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING BLACK BARS IN ELECTRONIC IMAGE - A testing method includes following steps. An electronic image is captured by an electronic device. A test device detect whether the image has any black bar. If the image has a black bar, pixel values in the black bar are extracted. If the pixel values in the black bar are all the same, a test result of imaging software error is presented. If the pixel values in the black bar are different from each other, a test result of mechanism error is presented. A test system associated with the testing method is also disclosed. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING BLEMISHES IN AN IMAGE CAPTURED BY AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method for detecting blemishes in a RGB image captured by an electronic device includes following steps. The image is read from the electronic device. A center point of the image is defined. Pixels of radials radiating from the center point of the image are detected for detecting blemishes in the image. Blemishes in the image are counted. A total blemish number is compared with a maximum tolerable blemish number. If the total blemish number in the image exceeds the maximum tolerable blemish number, displaying test failure; and if the total blemish number in the image does not exceeds the maximum tolerable number, displaying test pass. A blemish detection system associated with the method is also disclosed. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026824 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - Included are determining a position of a pixel serving as an extraction subject by using first image data photographed under a first light source; determining an extraction range corresponding to the determined position, by using a color value of the pixel at the determined position and a color value of a pixel at a peripheral position around the determined position in the first image data; calculating a first representative color value from the first image data and a second representative color value from second image data photographed under a second light source, on the basis of the position of the pixel serving as the extraction subject and the extraction range; and generating a color correction condition for converting a color value depending on the first light source into a color value depending on the second light source. | 02-03-2011 |
20110033108 | PERFORMING SPECTRAL GAMUT MAPPING FOR REPRODUCING AN IMAGE - Spectral gamut mapping is performed for reproducing an image comprising a plurality of pixels using a device. Sample data is generated to span a spectral gamut of the device, the sample data is divided into plural subdivisions based on colorimetry of the sample data, a local interim connection space (ICS) is constructed for each of the plural subdivisions, and a sub-gamut is constructed corresponding to each of the local ICS's. For each of the plurality of pixels, a sub-gamut which corresponds to the pixel is selected from the constructed sub-gamuts, and spectral gamut mapping is performed for the pixel using the selected sub-gamut in the local ICS. | 02-10-2011 |
20110033109 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD FOR DERIVING TEXT CHARACTERISTIC IMAGE FROM INPUT IMAGE AND RELATED APPARATUS - An image processing method for deriving text characteristic images from an input image includes: performing a plurality of edge detecting processes upon the input image to generate a plurality of edge images, respectively, and deriving a first text characteristic image according to the edge images. The image detecting processes include: performing a first edge detecting process upon the input image to derive a first edge image according to a first upper threshold and a first lower threshold, and performing a second edge detecting process upon the input image to derive a second edge image according to a second upper threshold and a second lower threshold. | 02-10-2011 |
20110044540 | METHOD FOR VISUALIZING AND COMPARING IMAGES OR VOLUMES OF DATA OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES - Method for visualizing and comparing two images or volumes of data of physical quantities or information referable to the same, recorded by means of suitable equipment, comprising the following steps: defining which of the two quantities will be represented as colour variations, and which as brightness variations; defining a chromatic representation system based on three colour coordinates, in which one coordinate represents the brightness and the other two coordinates represent appropriate colour attributes; applying a suitable transformation to the values of the physical quantities to be represented, so that the values of the physical quantities to be visualized are transformed from the original coordinates into the preselected chromatic coordinates; transforming the values of the quantities to be visualized from the system of pre-selected coordinates into the chromatic coordinates typical of the pre-selected visualization system; visualizing the image/volume containing the combination of the two quantities. | 02-24-2011 |
20110052053 | DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An image processing apparatus suitable for processing a digital image in YCrCb color space, the image having an initial luminance plane Y and two initial Cr, Cb chrominance planes, the processing apparatus including a first block that receives the initial luminance plane Y of the digital image and processes and modifies the initial luminance plane Y in order to provide a modified luminance plane Y in output; a color artifact correction block, operating in parallel with the first block, the correction block receiving the initial planes Y, Cr, Cb of the image and modifying the initial chrominance planes Cr and Cb through a pixel by pixel processing approach with a mobile working window, the correction block having a false colors correction sub-block and a purple fringing correction sub-block, or both, the sub-blocks structured to modify values of the initial Cr, Cb chrominance planes based on information contained in the initial Cr, Cb chrominance planes and also based on information contained in the initial luminance plane Y. | 03-03-2011 |
20110052054 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING EDGES OF PHOTOGRAPH - A method for positioning edges of a photograph, includes flowing steps. A photograph taken by a camera module of an electronic device is obtained. RGB values of the pixels of the photograph are processed to get corresponding RGB modification values of the pixels of the photograph. Positions of vertexes of the photograph are computed according to the RGB modification values. The vertexes are connected to form edges of the photograph. | 03-03-2011 |
20110052055 | COLOR CONVERSION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided is a color conversion system and method. The color conversion system which converts the color of a filmed image includes: an image separation unit configured to receive a reference image including a color reference table and an action image, and separate the reference and action images from each other; a color data extraction unit configured to output color values of the color reference table included in the reference image; a control unit configured to detect change values obtained by comparing color values included in the reference image with those included in the color reference table, and generate a look-up table for converting the colors of the color reference table included in the reference image into desired colors; and an image conversion unit configured to perform color correction by converting the color values of the action image into coordinates in pixels, using the look-up table outputted from the control unit. | 03-03-2011 |
20110052056 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - This invention provides an image processing apparatus including a unit which generates index image data, a unit which obtains a position of thumbnail image data in the index image data, a unit which divides the index image data so as to prevent overlap of the thumbnail image data, a unit which calculates a histogram of a luminance value of image data corresponding to each partial area including the thumbnail image data, a unit which determines image correction characteristics of each piece of image data based on the histogram and performing image correction, and a unit which reconfiguring the index image data using the corrected image data to output the reconfigured index image data. | 03-03-2011 |
20110052057 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND COLOR IMAGE GENERATING SYSTEM - When a monochrome image is converted into a color image, following criteria are applied. a) Black, white, and a color having lightness according to a pixel value are assigned to minimum and maximum pixel values, and a pixel value therebetween, respectively. b) For the pixel value near but excluding the minimum value, a color in a blue color region is assigned. c) For the pixel value near but excluding the maximum value, a color in a yellow color region is assigned. For the pixel value in a range above those near the minimum value but below near the maximum value, a color in a range of hue from the blue color region to the yellow color region by way of a red color region or a color in the range of hue from the blue color region to the yellow color region by way of a green color region is assigned. | 03-03-2011 |
20110052058 | ARTIFACTS MEASUREMENT ON VIDEO DECOMPOSABLE PROPERTIES BY DYNAMIC FUZZY REASONING - To determine if a pixel exhibits artifacts, statistics are generated for the pixel and its neighbors. These statistics are compared with thresholds. If the comparison of the statistics and the thresholds suggests that the pixel exhibits a pixel artifact, then recourse can be taken, either to adjust the pixel value in some way, or to reject the angle of interpolation used in computing the value for the target pixel. | 03-03-2011 |
20110064306 | Computer readable storage medium, image correction apparatus, and image correction method - An image correction apparatus includes a color temperature calculating unit that calculates a color temperature of a highlighted portion of image data captured with an image capturing unit, a distance determining unit that determines whether the color temperature calculated by the color temperature calculating unit is within a certain distance with respect to a value on a daylight locus, and an image correction unit that corrects the image data using color balance correction when the color temperature is determined to be within the certain distance with respect to the value on the daylight locus by the distance determining unit. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064307 | METHODS FOR RECOMMENDING PERSONAL CARE PRODUCT AND TOOLS THEREFOR - A tool including a frame that includes an aperture and a boundary marker disposed about the aperture. The boundary marker includes a first marker region disposed about the aperture and a second marker region disposed about the first marker region. The color of the first marker region is different from the color of the second marker region. The tool also includes a color correction scale disposed proximate to the aperture. The color correction scale has at least a first color correction region and a second color correction region. The color of the first and second color correction regions each have an LCh value of between L=73.5 C=15.3 h=55.6 and L=32.5 C=11.6 h=48.3. | 03-17-2011 |
20110075923 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus that separates image data in an N-dimensional first signal format (303-31-2011 | |
20110075924 | COLOR ADJUSTMENT - To adjust colors in an input image (II) to colors of a reference image (RI), matching reference points (RP) are provided in the input image (II) and the reference image (RI), dominant colors of the matching reference points (RP) are determined ( | 03-31-2011 |
20110081079 | Automatic Red-Eye Object Classification In Digital Images Using A Boosting-Based Framework - Automatic red-eye object classification in digital images using a boosting-based framework. In a first example embodiment, a method for classifying a candidate red-eye object in a digital photographic image includes several acts. First, a candidate red-eye object in a digital photographic image is selected. Next, a search scale set and a search region for the candidate red-eye object where an eye object may reside is determined. Then, the number of subwindows that satisfy an AdaBoost classifier is determined. This number is denoted as a vote. Next, the maximum size of the subwindows that satisfy the AdaBoost classifier is determined. Then, a normalized threshold is calculated by multiplying a predetermined constant threshold by the calculated maximum size. Next, the vote is compared with the normalized threshold. Finally, the candidate red-eye object is transformed into a true red-eye object if the vote is greater than the normalized threshold. | 04-07-2011 |
20110081080 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, DISPLAY DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An image processing device of at least one embodiment includes: an upscaling circuit for upscaling resolution of an image signal X (input image data) to high resolution; and a redistribution circuit that redistributes, among a plurality of separate pixels constituting one pixel of the image signal X, a tone value of each of the separate pixels upscaled by the upscaling circuit. With this arrangement, generation of a high-definition image and improvement of a viewing angle are realized by the image processing device that converts resolution of the input image data into high resolution. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085729 | DE-NOISING METHOD AND RELATED APPARATUS FOR IMAGE SENSOR - A de-noising method includes: comparing a pixel value of a target pixel with pixel values of a plurality of nearby pixels, wherein each of the target pixel and the nearby pixels corresponds to a specific color component; for each nearby pixel of the nearby pixels, checking if a difference between the pixel value of the target pixel and a pixel value of a nearby pixel of the nearby pixels is smaller than a specific noise threshold value, and when the difference between the pixel value of the target pixel and the pixel value of the nearby pixel is smaller than the specific noise threshold value, setting the nearby pixel as a similar nearby pixel; and updating the pixel value of the target pixel according to the pixel value of the target pixel and a pixel value of each similar nearby pixel. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085730 | METHOD FOR PIXEL COLOR CORRECTION AND PIXEL COLOR CORRECTING APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for pixel color correction includes the steps of determining a gray degree of a designated pixel; generating an adjusted color correction matrix according to the gray degree of the designated pixel; and applying the adjusted color correction matrix to the designated pixel to correct color errors of the designated pixel. The gray degree is generated according to a ratio of the chrominance information to the luminance information. A weighted sum of a reference color correction matrix and a unity matrix is calculated to generate the adjusted color correction matrix, and weighting factors of the reference color correction matrix and the unity matrix are determined by the gray degree, wherein the unity matrix is a fundamental matrix without color correction. | 04-14-2011 |
20110091101 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR APPLYING LENS SHADING CORRECTION DURING IMAGE PROCESSING - Various techniques for lens shading correction are provided. In one embodiment, the location of a current pixel is determined relative to a gain grid having a plurality of grid points distributed in horizontal and vertical directions. If the location of the current pixel corresponds to a grid point, a lens shading gain associated with that grid point is applied to the current pixel. If the location of the current pixel is between four grid points, bi-linear interpolation is applied to the four grid points to determine an interpolated lens shading gain. In another embodiment, a radial gain grid may be provided, and lens shading gains may be interpolated based upon grid points neighboring a current pixel in the radial and angular directions. In a further embodiment, a radial lens shading gain is determined by determining a radial distance from the center of the image to the current pixel and multiplying the radial distance by a global gain parameter based upon the color of the current pixel. The radial lens shading gain is then applied to the current pixel, along with the determined lens shading grid gain or lens shading interpolated gain. | 04-21-2011 |
20110091102 | Method for improving visualization of infrared images - A coding process applicable to an original infrared image, generated from any value matrix, to change the infrared image into negative or inverted black and white and grey with the addition of specific split colors, causing a substantial difference in the way the retina and the brain processes the resultant images. The result obtained is a much less exhaustive way to see, identify and interpret infrared images generated by any infrared camera that uses this conversion process. | 04-21-2011 |
20110091103 | CORRECTION OF COLOR BALANCE OF FACE IMAGES DEPENDING UPON WHETHER IMAGE IS COLOR OR MONOCHROME - On the basis of image data representing the area of a face image contained in an image represented by applied image data, a color correction value calculating circuit calculates a color correction value and a color image probability calculating circuit calculates the probability that the area of the face image is a color image. A color correction value adjusting circuit then adjusts the color correction value based upon the probability that the area of the face image is a color image. The adjusted color correction value is used in correction processing in an image correcting circuit. | 04-21-2011 |
20110091104 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, APPARATUS AND MEMORY MEDIUM THEREFOR - Correction for color fog is securely achieved with limited load of processing. The RGB image data are converted into the luminance and the chromaticity values C | 04-21-2011 |
20110096986 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus includes: a data processing section which processes input image data and obtains output image data; a face detecting section which detects a face image on the basis of the input image data and obtains information about a face image region in which the face image exists; and a processing controller which controls the process of the data processing section on the basis of the information about the face image region obtained in the face detecting section. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096987 | NOISE REDUCED COLOR IMAGE USING PANCHROMATIC IMAGE - A method for producing a noise-reduced digital color image, includes providing an image having panchromatic pixels and color pixels corresponding to at least two color photoresponses; providing from the image a panchromatic image and at least one color image; and using the panchromatic image and the color image to produce the noise-reduced digital color image by setting a plurality of color characteristics equal to the corresponding panchromatic characteristics at each color pixel location. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103685 | Image Adjustment Using Extended Range Curves - A digital image having associated tonal data, including tonal data in an extended range above a normalized value of 1.0, can be accessed. An extended range curve tool corresponding to the digital image can be instantiated, the extended range curve tool including a curve defining a relationship between input tonal values and output tonal values, wherein at least a portion of the input tonal values and output tonal values are associated with the extended range. An extended range histogram also can be generated based on the tonal data associated with the digital image, the extended range histogram including data corresponding to the extended range. Further, the extended range histogram can be presented in conjunction with the extended range curve tool. Additionally, user input specifying an adjustment to at least a portion of the curve can be received and a modified curve can be presented in response to the specified adjustment. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103686 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - This invention discloses an image processing apparatus that can obtain, from an image, the amount of correction for chromatic aberration of magnification, that can appropriately correct a color shift while suppressing a change in color on the edge portion of the image before and after the correction. In obtaining the amount of color shift between one color plane and another color plane, the color differences before and after the color shift is corrected are calculated for each pair of pixels included in regions of interest. It is determined whether the amount of change in color difference before and after correction falls within a predetermined range. The amount of color shift is obtained in the range in which it is determined that the amount of change in color difference before and after correction falls within a predetermined range. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110587 | Generating Harmonic Images - A computer implemented method of generating a harmonic image based on object data defining a plurality of objects to be located in the image, and location data defining a plurality of locations in the image, the method comprising the steps of: determining a plurality of harmonic object-location pairs from a plurality of possible object-location pairs; and, generating an image according to the determined harmonic object-location pairs. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110588 | COLOUR IMAGE ENHANCEMENT - A colour image enhancement method, for enhancing the colour of a colour image comprising a plurality of pixels. The method comprises: mapping a colour saturation value of each pixel to a normalised saturation value, wherein the range of values of normalised saturation is the same independent of the luminance value of the pixel; estimating a probability distribution of the normalised saturation values; defining a transfer function for modifying the normalised saturation values, based on the estimated probability distribution; and applying the transfer function to the normalised saturation values to generate modified values. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116713 | IMAGE CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - An image contrast enhancement apparatus and method thereof are provided. The image contrast enhancement apparatus includes an image analysis module, a histogram separation unit, and a histogram adjustment unit. The image analysis module statistically analyzes pixels of an original image to produce a plurality of histogram bins and combines the histogram bins into a sub-histogram. The histogram separation unit separates each sub-histogram in every separation level into two sub-histograms in the next separation level, increases or decreases a base width of each sub-histogram such that the respective group density of two sub-histograms corresponding to the same separation point are substantially identical. The histogram adjustment unit re-distributes histogram bins of each sub-histogram or merges a portion of histogram bins of each sub-histogram in every separation level. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116714 | Image interpolation method and apparatus using reference block based on direction - Provided is an image interpolation method and apparatus using a reference block depending on a direction. The image interpolation method may generate a horizontal reference block and a vertical reference block each with respect to an inputted image, and determine interpolation directivity with respect to the inputted image using the generated horizontal reference block and vertical reference block, thereby performing an interpolation on an image based on accurate interpolation directivity. In particular, the image interpolation method may determine whether to verify interpolation directivity depending on an edge intensity of an inputted image, thereby performing a color filter array (CFA) interpolation on an image based on an edge direction without determining the interpolation directivity, when the edge intensity is strong. | 05-19-2011 |
20110123111 | IMAGE PROCESSING TO ENHANCE IMAGE SHARPNESS - Blurred image data is sharpened by converting three channels of RGB data into a single channel of intensity data, processing the intensity data to generate integral image data, applying a variable size filter to the integral image data to generate box-filtered data, calculating a gain factor for each pixel position in dependence upon the box-filtered data, the intensity data and the size of the filter used for that pixel position, and multiplying the original RGB data of each pixel by the gain factor for that pixel to generate sharpened RGB data. The size of the filter is selected at each pixel position in dependence upon an estimate of the local amount of blur. In this way, as the amount of blur changes, the filter size changes appropriately. By processing the integral image data to generate box-filtered data, a constant number of processing operations are required for image sharpening irrespective of the size of filter that is used. | 05-26-2011 |
20110129146 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING A DIGITAL IMAGE, IN PARTICULAR FOR PROCESSING CONTOUR REGIONS, AND CORRESPONDING DEVICE - The invention concerns a device for processing a digital image comprising at least one contour region, including sharpness processing of the contour region. The sharpness processing includes converting data of the level of pixels of the contour zone into initial main data (step | 06-02-2011 |
20110129147 | LOCAL REGRESSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEMS - This disclosure provides methods, apparatus and systems for performing image processing regression for approximating multidimensional color transformation. According to an exemplary method, a shaping matrix is selected to minimize a cost function associated with a local linear regression representation of the color transformation. In addition, an alternating least squares algorithm is utilized to jointly optimize regression and shaping parameters. | 06-02-2011 |
20110129148 | IMAGE PROCESSING USING TARGET VALUES - Provided are, among other things, systems, methods and techniques for processing an image. In one representative implementation, input image values are obtained for an input image; values for image parameters are measured across the input image values; target values for the image parameters are input; a transformation is applied to the input image values to produce corresponding output image values, the transformation having been generated as a result of a plurality of individual image-value operations that have been constrained by the target values in order to control the image parameters across the output image values; and a processed output image is output based on the output image values. | 06-02-2011 |
20110135200 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING IF AN INPUT IMAGE IS A FOGGY IMAGE, METHOD FOR DETERMINING A FOGGY LEVEL OF AN INPUT IMAGE AND CLEANING METHOD FOR FOGGY IMAGES - Determining if an input image is a foggy image includes determining an average luminance gray level of the input image, performing Sobel image processing on the input image to generate a Sobel image of the input image when the average luminance gray level of the input image is between a first image average luminance and a second image average luminance, determining a first normalization value and a second normalization value of the input image, determining a mean value and a standard deviation of the Sobel image when the first normalization value and the second normalization value are less than a first threshold value, and determining the input image as a foggy image when a sum of the mean value and the standard deviation is less than a second threshold value. | 06-09-2011 |
20110135201 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - There is provided an image processing apparatus for applying an adjusting process to an image including multicolor image signals. An image area including a pixel to be processed is extracted, and one representative signal value is generated from signal values corresponding to a plurality of colors of pixels included in the image area (S | 06-09-2011 |
20110135202 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus for performing a white balance correction for RAW data obtained by an image capturing unit, includes a storage, operable to store a RAW file to which the RAW data and developed data obtained by performing a development processing to the RAW data are attached, and a corrector, operable to perform the white balance correction for the RAW data based on the developed data stored in the storage. | 06-09-2011 |
20110142340 | HALFTONE IMAGE GENERATION METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF - A halftone image generation method used in a system including an image input module and a halftoning processing module for generating a halftone image is disclosed. First, an original image is received by the image input module and a dot diffusion process is performed to the original image to generate the halftone image using a first class matrix with a first size and a corresponding first diffused weighting matrix with a first diffused area size, wherein the first class matrix indicates a processing order of the dot diffusion process and the first class matrix with the first size, the first diffused area size and the corresponding first diffused weighting matrix with the first diffused area size are optimized results determined in advance by the halftoning processing module according to class matrixes of different sizes and diffused areas of different sizes. | 06-16-2011 |
20110150331 | System and Method for Super-Resolution Imaging from a Sequence of Color Filter Array (CFA) Low-Resolution Images - A method and system for improving picture quality of color images by combing the content of a plurality of frames of the same subject; comprising: at least one processor; the at least one processor comprising a memory for storing a plurality of frames of a subject; the at least one processor operating to combine the content of plurality of frames of the subject into a combined color image by performing: a process in which at least two multicolored frames are converted to monochromatic predetermined color frames; a gross shift process in which the gross shift translation of one monochromatic predetermined color frame is determined relative to a reference monochromatic predetermined color frame; a subpixel shift process utilizing a correlation method to determine the translational and/or rotational differences of one monochromatic predetermined color frame to the reference monochromatic predetermined color frame to estimate sub-pixel shifts and/or rotations between the frames; and an error reduction process to determine whether the resolution of the resulting combined color image is of sufficient resolution; the error reduction process comprising applying at least one spatial frequency domain constraint and at least one spatial domain constraint to the combined color image to produce at least one high-resolution full color image. | 06-23-2011 |
20110150332 | IMAGE PROCESSING TO ENHANCE IMAGE SHARPNESS - Blurred image data is sharpened by converting three channels of RGB data into a single channel of intensity data, processing the intensity data to generate integral image data, applying a variable size filter to the integral image data to generate box-filtered data, calculating a gain factor for each pixel position in dependence upon the box-filtered data, the intensity data and the size of the filter used for that pixel position, and multiplying the original RGB data of each pixel by the gain factor for that pixel to generate sharpened RGB data. The size of the filter is selected at each pixel position in dependence upon an estimate of the local amount of blur. In this way, as the amount of blur changes, the filter size changes appropriately. By processing the integral image data to generate box-filtered data, a constant number of processing operations are required for image sharpening irrespective of the size of filter that is used. | 06-23-2011 |
20110150333 | IMAGE REPRODUCTION USING A PARTICULAR COLOR SPACE - If an image reproducing apparatus has a device-dependent color space conversion function that converts the color space of target image data to a device-dependent color space using a particular color space, reproduction image data is generated (i) by carrying out basic color space conversion to image data for which the color space specified by identification information is the standard color space, and (ii) by carrying out device-dependent color space conversion to image data for which the specified color space is the particular color space. If the apparatus does not have the device-dependent color conversion function, (i) reproduction image data is generated by carrying out basic color space conversion to image data for which the specified color space is the standard color space, but (ii) a notification indicating that the specified color space is not the standard color space is output where the specified color space is the particular color space. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158527 | Color Constancy Method And System - A color constancy method and system include dividing an image into a plurality of sub-images and applying a plurality of color constancy algorithms to each of the sub-images. The outputs of each of the color constancy algorithms are analyzed for each of the sub-images to determine which of the color constancy algorithms give inconsistent results across the sub-images. The influence of the outputs of the algorithms providing inconsistent results is adjusted to decrease their influence (e.g. effect or weight) with respect to the outputs of algorithms providing consistent results. The outputs from the plurality of color constancy algorithms are combined based upon the adjustment of the outputs. | 06-30-2011 |
20110164817 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLOR CORRECTION - A graphical user interface for performing color correction and methods for implementing the color correction are disclosed. The graphical user interface allows a user to adjust the colorspace of the pixels in the image. In one embodiment, a color adjustment pad allows the user to push the pixels from a particular luminance level a desired magnitude towards a desired hue. Pixels from other luminance levels are affected proportionally. The graphical user interface further allows a user to adjust the luminance of the pixels in the image. A luminance adjustment slider allows the user to adjust the luminance of pixels from a selected luminance level by a relative amount. Pixels from other luminance levels have their luminance are affected in a manner proportional to a difference between the selected luminance level value and the luminance value of the other pixel. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170773 | System and Method for Estimating Signal-Dependent Noise of an Image - A method for estimating signal-dependent noise includes defining a plurality of pixel groups from among the image pixels. The method further includes computing, for one or more signal levels of the image, a difference value between two pixel groups, whereby a respective one or more difference values are computed collectively. The method determines an estimated noise response of the image as a function of the one or more computed difference values. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170774 | IMAGE MANIPULATING SYSTEM AND METHOD - An image information acquiring system obtains a group of relative values to describe the image. A pixel value of each pixel in the image is acquired. Ratios between the pixel value of each pixel and a pixel value of each other pixel which is adjacent to the pixel are obtained for obtaining the group of relative values. The group of relative values is used for comparing two images or reproducing another image. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170775 | TONE CORRECTING APPARATUS PROVIDING IMPROVED TONE CORRECTION ON IMAGE - A tone correcting apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit that acquires first brightness information indicating brightness of each of a plurality of block regions that are set to cover an entire area of an image; a face detecting unit that detects a face portion where a human face is positioned in the image; a second acquiring unit that acquires second brightness information indicating brightness of the face portion detected by the face detecting unit; and a correction unit that corrects brightness of the image based on the first brightness information and the second brightness information. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170776 | IMAGE DISTORTION CORRECTING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus is provided which makes it possible to improve an access speed for accessing a storage device so as to improve an image processing velocity without increasing a capacity of the storage device. The apparatus includes an optical system; an imaging device having a plurality of pixels each corresponding to one of colors and an arithmetic calculating section to process image data. When a color of an original pixel is different from that of a distortion-corrected pixel, the arithmetic calculating section conducts an interpolation processing to calculate pixel data of the distortion-corrected pixel from other pixel data of plural pixels residing at peripheral positions surrounding the original pixel, stored in advance, and the arithmetic calculating section stores pixel data categorized in one of the colors as a continuous series of the pixel data into corresponding one of storing areas provided in the storage section. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176729 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING HIGH SENSITIVITY IMAGES IN DARK ENVIRONMENT - There is provided a method of and an apparatus for generating high sensitivity images in a low light level environment, the method including correcting an image acquired through short-time exposure in a low light level environment to an image corresponding to a reference exposure time defined for the low light level environment, the corrected image including a plurality of channels, detecting respective black levels for each of the channels, the detecting of the respective black levels being based on a black level intensity for the reference exposure time, adjusting the respective black levels for each of the channels of the corrected image to respective target black levels for each of the channels, and aligning a value of each of the channels using the respective target black levels. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176730 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, ENDOSCOPE SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device includes a demosaicing section that receives an image that includes a first color signal, a second color signal, and a third color signal, and performs an interpolation process that interpolates a missing color signal among the first color signal, the second color signal, and the third color signal on each pixel of the image, and an image output section that outputs an output image based on an image obtained by the interpolation process and output from the demosaicing section. The demosaicing section performs a space-variant interpolation process that implements a different interpolation process depending on a pixel position on a first image that has information within a first wavelength band. The demosaicing section performs a space-invariant interpolation process that implements an interpolation process independently of a pixel position on a second image that has information within a second wavelength band. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182510 | Methods and Systems for Image Noise Filtering - Methods and systems for image noise filtering are provided. One method of image noise filtering includes generating a plurality of sub-images of a digital image, applying a noise filter with small support to each sub-image, and generating a filtered digital image by merging the filtered sub-images. Another method of image noise filtering includes receiving a digital image including a plurality of color channels in the Bayer domain, applying a strong noise filter to each color channel to generate filtered color channels, computing a luminance image from the digital image, applying a weak noise filter to the luminance image to generate a filtered luminance image, computing a luminance recovery factor map using the luminance image and the filtered luminance image, and computing output color channels of the digital image using the filtered color channels and the luminance recovery factor map. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182511 | Automatically Selected Adjusters - Automatically selected adjusters are described, including selecting an area of an image, determining a characteristic of the area, and selecting an adjuster of a set of adjusters based on the characteristic of the area. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188748 | ITERATIVELY DENOISING COLOR FILTER ARRAY IMAGES - A method for reducing noise in a color image captured using a digital image sensor having pixels being arranged in a rectangular minimal repeating unit. The method comprises, for a first color channel, determining noise reduced-pixel values using a first noise reducing process that includes computing weighted pixel differences by combining the pixel differences with corresponding local edge-responsive weighting values. The method further comprises a second noise reducing process that includes computing weighted chroma differences by combining chroma differences with corresponding local edge-responsive weighting values. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188749 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD FOR BOUNDARY RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT - An image processing method for boundary resolution enhancement is disclosed. Firstly, an image is transferred into an image layer. Noise of the image layer is removed by a bilateral filter and crisp edges are retained at the same time. Moreover, the image layer is interpolated by an interpolation filter for resolution enhancement. The image processing method of the present invention can lower the image blur degree substantially, enhance the image resolution and be widely implemented in all sorts of image/video processing hardware devices. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188750 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND PROCESSING METHOD THEREFOR - In an image processing apparatus for dividing image data into blocks having a predetermined number of pixels and processing each of the divided blocks in sequence, color data of pixels in a block to be processed is compared to identify a pattern flag that corresponds to a placement pattern of the color data included in the block. The identified pattern flag and the color data for the number of colors included in the block are output and, assuming that output color data that corresponds to a pixel at a predefined position in the block is first color data, the pattern flag, the first color data, and other color data that are output for each of the divided blocks are collectively stored in respectively different memory areas. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194763 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM REMOVING NOISE OF COLOR IMAGE - Provided is an apparatus, method and computer-readable medium removing noise of an image. The apparatus may include a channel image correction unit to correct remaining channel images excluding a currently processed channel image, from among a plurality of channel images, using the currently processed channel image, a noise removal unit to remove noise of the currently processed channel image, using the corrected remaining channel images and the currently processed channel image, and a color image reconstruction unit to reconstruct a color image in which noise is removed, by combining the plurality of channel images in which noise is removed when the noise of the plurality of channel images is removed. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194764 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REMOVING DEFECTIVE PIXELS - A method for removing defective pixels using a signal processing scheme with a Bayer pattern, by determining an output value of the inter-channel according to whether or not a difference between a center pixel and an average of neighboring pixels, which have the same color as that of the center pixel, is greater than or equal to a threshold value; and using values of neighboring pixels nearest to a center pixel as an input, obtaining an output value of the cross-channel by finding a median value among a median value of vertical and horizontal lines including the center pixel, a median value of diagonal lines including the center pixel, and a value of the center pixel. Then, a defective pixel is removed, through the use of the output value of the inter-channel, the output value of the cross-channel, and the value of the center pixel. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194765 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus is provided which offers higher versatility than conventional image processing apparatuses. When an input signal to a spatial filtering block is a monochrome signal that contains Y component only, a selector selects its input terminal and a selector selects its input terminal. Then, a low-pass filter output signal of a programmable spatial filter is inputted to a spatial filter, and a low-pass filter output signal of the spatial filer is inputted to a spatial filter. That is, the programmable spatial filter and the spatial filters are connected in series (in cascade), and the cascade-connected three spatial filters perform filtering operation. In this example, low-pass filters with 5×5 taps are connected in cascade in three stages, which enables low-pass filtering with 13×13 taps. | 08-11-2011 |
20110206280 | IMAGE BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are an image brightness control device and an image brightness control method for improving the definition of brightness of the entire image and/or improving the definition of brightness of local areas using local brightness information. The image brightness controlling device includes: a preprocessing unit acquiring an offset table for controlling a dynamic range corresponding to an image range of an input image using brightness values of color data of the input image; and a tone mapping unit mapping the offset table onto the color data. It is possible to improve the definition of brightness so as to correspond to the characteristic of the input image, by automatically considering how to reflect a distribution characteristic of an image. | 08-25-2011 |
20110211758 | MULTI-IMAGE SHARPENING AND DENOISING USING LUCKY IMAGING - The multi-image sharpening and denoising technique described herein creates a clean (low-noise, high contrast), detailed image of a scene from a temporal series of images of the scene. The technique employs a process of image alignment to remove global and local camera motion plus a novel weighted image averaging procedure that avoids sacrificing sharpness to create a resultant high-detail, low-noise image from the temporal series. In addition, the multi-image sharpening and denoising technique can employ a dehazing procedure that uses a spatially varying airlight model to dehaze an input image. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216971 | Method for reconstructing color images - A method for reconstructing color images has steps of using a spectrum-acquiring device to acquire spectral data of a plurality of sample color blocks and calculating coefficients of a basis matrix of the sample color blocks; obtaining digital counts of the plurality of sample color blocks with a digital camera; obtaining a conversion matrix in accordance with the coefficients of the basis matrix and the digital counts; acquiring digital counts of an original image with the digital camera, and generating a reconstructed image in accordance with the digital counts of the original image and the conversion matrix; and varying the conversion matrix in accordance with a new light source, and computing to generate a reconstructed image corresponding to the new light source in accordance with the digital counts of the original image and the varied conversion matrix. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216972 | Methods and Apparatuses for Restoring Color and Enhancing Electronic Images - Methods and apparatuses for color image restoration and enhancement. In at least one embodiment, color signals for individual channels of an image (e.g., red, green, or blue) are adjusted based on a weighted set of averages (e.g., of the entire image, the center portion, the surrounding portion, or other portions). In one example, pixels with extreme values of color signals (e.g., pure black or white pixels) are ignored for the purposes of restoring color; and, the different averages are weighted according to the pixel location (e.g., the distance from the pixel to a center point). In one example, after color restoration for individual channels, the luminance of each pixel is adjusted back to their original levels; and the range of luminance of the image is further adjusted to provide improved brightness and contrast, where in determining the luminance the red, green and blue color channels are given an equal weight. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216973 | COLOR NAMING, COLOR CATEGORIZATION AND DESCRIBING COLOR COMPOSITION OF IMAGES - The invention provides methods, systems and apparatus for assigning color names to individual image pixels, and generating verbal description of color composition in images, suitable for a wide variety of information processing applications. For an isolated image pixel (individual color sample or color value) an illustrative embodiment of this invention uses a predetermined vocabulary of color names, and then generates a distance measure describing the best color match and corresponding color name for the given pixel. For the input image, an illustrative embodiment of this invention computes the simplified representation of the scene, consistent with human perception, and uses the predetermined vocabulary, syntax rules and metric to assign color names to all perceptually significant objects and regions and obtain the verbal description of the overall color composition. The invention is also applicable to other types of information signals, such as sequences of video frames, web pages, etc. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216974 | DISTORTION OF DIGITAL IMAGES USING SPATIAL OFFSETS FROM IMAGE REFERENCE POINTS - A method for distorting a digital image comprising receiving the coordinates of one or more than one image reference point defined by a user within the digital image, receiving one or more than one spatial offset assigned by the user and associated with the coordinates of the one or more than one defined image reference point, providing a mixing function algorithm embodied on a computer-readable medium for distorting the digital image, calculating an offset matrix by applying the mixing function algorithm based on the one or more than one spatial offset and the coordinates of the one or more than one defined image reference point; and distorting the digital image by application of the offset matrix. A graphic tag may be associated with each of the defined image reference points and displayed over the digital image, and the assignment of the spatial offset may be accomplished by movement of the graphic tag with the pointing device. Abstract image reference points may be used to limit distortion. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222764 | IMAGE RESTORATION DEVICE, IMAGE RESTORATION METHOD AND IMAGE RESTORATION SYSTEM - An image restoration device, an image restoration method, and an image restoration system are provided. The image restoration device includes a point spread function estimation unit, and an image restoration filter unit. The point spread function estimation unit receives an image signal and estimates a Point Spread Function (PSF) from the received image signal. The image restoration filter unit receives the image signal and the PSF, generates an image restoration filter coefficient from the PSF, and filters the image signal according to the image restoration filter coefficient to output the filtered image signal. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222765 | MODIFICATION OF MEMORY COLORS IN DIGITAL IMAGES - Modification of a digital image includes determining a likelihood of a pixel belonging to a memory color region ( | 09-15-2011 |
20110235907 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A color processing apparatus includes an obtaining unit that obtains a first color signal from outside, a converting unit that converts the first color signal obtained by the obtaining unit into a second color signal based on a viewing condition, and a generating unit that generates a third color signal on the basis of the first color signal obtained by the obtaining unit and the second color signal obtained through conversion performed by the converting unit, the third color signal being an input signal that is used for a color gamut mapping process of performing mapping to a color gamut of an output device. | 09-29-2011 |
20110243438 | GENERATION OF MULTI-RESOLUTION IMAGE PYRAMIDS - Embodiments are described for a system and method for generating a multi-resolution image pyramid. The method can include obtaining an image captured as a coarse image of a defined subject and a fine image of the defined subject. The fine image can be downsampled to create a temporary image. A further operation is applying a structure transfer operation to the temporary image to transfer color detail from the coarse image. The structure transfer takes place while retaining structural detail from the temporary image. A blending operation can be applied between the temporary image and the fine image to construct an intermediate image for at least one intermediate level in the multi-resolution image pyramid between the fine image and the coarse image. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243439 | Image Processing Method and Apparatus - A method of processing an image includes traversing pixels of an image in a single pass over the image. An inverting function is applied to the pixels. A recursive filter is applied to the inverted pixel values. The filter has parameters which are derived from previously traversed pixel values of the image. A pixel value is combined with a filter parameter for the pixel to provide a processed pixel value for a processed image. | 10-06-2011 |
20110249895 | COMPENSATING FOR FILL-IN ARTIFACT EFFECT VIA TONE-DEPENDENT DILATION OF PIXELS IN A DIGITAL COLOR IMAGE - What is disclosed is a novel system and method for calculating an amount of a total dilation for reverse objects in order to compensate for fill-in effects to improve quality of a digital image in a digital document reproduction system. In a manner more fully described herein, a tone-dependent compensation factor is determined which is a function of a gamma-corrected background density. The tone-dependent compensation factor is then used to scale the maximum base dilation to produce an amount of total dilation. The total dilation amount is applied to contone pixels along an edge of the reverse object to compensate for fill-in artifact effects. By adjusting pixels along the edges of reverse objects by the total dilation determined hereby, the sharpness (or crispness) of reverse fine features is improved on sweeps and for hue shifts at the edges of the reverse objects on backgrounds of more than one color separation. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249896 | RULE-BASED COLOR MANAGEMENT AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM - Color management converting source-side color images into destination-side color images. A module library includes module entries corresponding to function modules implementing color processing functionalities. Each module entry includes a module locator, and some include a profile interface definition. A profile library includes profile entries corresponding to sources of parameters. Profile entries include a profile locator and a profile interface definition. A rule library includes external and internal rules which characterize color transformation workflows. Each external rule is associated with function modules. An interface receives factual input including factual input derived from source-side color image data. A rule engine determines a sequence of function modules and sources of parameters by using the factual input and the plural and external rules in the rule library, and builds the color transformation workflow from the determined sequence of function modules and sources of parameters. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255779 | VECTOR-BASED COLOR DIFFERENCE METRIC FOR COLOR MAPPING - Color management using a vector-based color difference metric. A color difference map is comprised of color difference vectors for each of a plurality of pixels of an original image. The color difference vector for each pixel includes both a magnitude and a directionality representing a difference for color data in each pixel in the original image, relative to color data in a corresponding mapped pixel in a color mapped image. Pixels in the color difference map having large color differences in color movement relative to nearby pixels are identified in the color difference map, by applying an edge-detection algorithm to the color difference map. For each pixel that is identified in a smooth area in the original image and is identified as having a large color difference in the color difference map, a correction algorithm is applied, so as to provide a corrected color mapped image. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255780 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING COLOR INTERPOLATION ON A DOWN-SAMPLED BAYER IMAGE, AND ASSOCIATED DEVICE - A method for performing color interpolation on a down-sampled Bayer image includes: with regard to at least one pixel to be interpolated in the down-sampled Bayer image, performing at least one pixel prediction operation according to pixel values of a plurality of neighboring pixels kept by a down-sampling operation, in order to generate at least one simulation pixel value of at least one corresponding simulation pixel of at least one neighboring pixel discarded by the down-sampling operation; and performing at least one color interpolation operation according to at least one pixel value of at least one neighboring pixel kept by the down-sampling operation and the at least one simulation pixel value, in order to generate a pixel value of the at least one pixel to be interpolated. An associated device is also provided. | 10-20-2011 |
20110262038 | TWO STAGE DETECTION FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC EYE ARTIFACTS - The detection of red-eye defects is enhanced in digital images for embedded image acquisition and processing systems. A two-stage redeye filtering system includes a speed optimized filter that performs initial segmentation of candidate redeye regions and optionally applies a speed-optimized set of falsing/verification filters to determine a first set of confirmed redeye regions for correction. Some of the candidate regions which are rejected during the first stage are recorded and re-analyzed during a second stage by an alternative set of analysis-optimized filters to determine a second set of confirmed redeye regions. | 10-27-2011 |
20110262039 | IMAGE ENHANCEMENT METHOD, IMAGE ENHANCEMENT DEVICE, OBJECT DETECTION METHOD, AND OBJECT DETECTION DEVICE - Disclosed are an image enhancement method, an image enhancement device, an object detection method, and an object detection device. The image enhancement method comprises steps of (a) letting an input image be a waiting-for-enhancement image and detecting specific objects in the waiting-for-enhancement image; (b) determining, based on an image feature of an object area including the detected specific objects, an image enhancement parameter so that an after-enhancement image enhanced according to the image enhancement parameter points out the image feature; (c) enhancing the waiting-for-enhancement image; (d) detecting the specific objects in the after-enhancement image; and (e) determining whether a predetermined stopping condition is satisfied. If the predetermined stopping condition is satisfied, then the after-enhancement image having a best result of object detection up to now is output; otherwise the after-enhancement image serves as the waiting-for-enhancement image, and steps (b) to (e) are carried out repeatedly. | 10-27-2011 |
20110262040 | ARCHITECTURE FOR EXPORTING DIGITAL IMAGES - A method and apparatus for allowing applications to access edited image data from an image editing application are disclosed herein. When the user desires to export edited images, the user causes the image editing application to display a plug-in user interface (UI). The plug-in UI may allow the user to enter exporting parameters, although this is not required. After the user selects an “export” button in the plug-in UI, the image editing application confirms with the plug-in on an image-by-image basis which of the images should be exported. The image editing application then generates an export version of the image. If necessary, the image editing application applies image adjustments to the master image to generate the export version. The image editing application then makes the export version available to the plug-in. | 10-27-2011 |
20110268356 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Each pixel of an input image is subjected to first color conversion by means of colorimetric color reproduction and converted to a first color device value of a target color space. Further, a difference DI between a white luminance of an originating color space and a luminance of pixels of the originating color space is calculated. When generating an output image, pixels with a difference DI of 0 keeps the color device value of the originating color space. For the pixels with a difference DI greater than 0, a second color device value is calculated as a color device value of the output image, the second color device value being a sum of the abovementioned color device value and a value which is obtained by multiplying the difference between the first color device value and the abovementioned color device value by a coefficient that is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1. Due to this, when generating an output image of a target color space from an input image of an originating color space, the color image can be reproduced more brightly while achieving coincident color appearance. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268357 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - This invention more effectively suppresses color fringing in a color image by image processing. An image processing method includes estimating the degree of color fringing in a color image based on the color image that is generated by photo-electrically converting an object image and formed from a plurality of color planes. The method also includes removing from the color image the estimated degree of color fringing. | 11-03-2011 |
20110274350 | NOISE REDUCTION DEVICE, NOISE REDUCTION METHOD, NOISE REDUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Disclosed is a noise reduction device that includes a representative-value vector calculation unit that extracts from the neighboring region the pixels of a similarity region having a degree of similarity, greater than or equal to a threshold, to the notice pixel in a predetermined color space and calculates a representative-value vector of the pixels of the similarity region; a difference projection unit that projects a difference vector between a notice-pixel vector of the notice pixel and the representative-value vector in a specific direction of the color space; and a pixel-value correction unit that replaces an element of a vector obtained by adding the difference vector projected in the specific direction to the representative-value vector with the pixel value of the notice pixel. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274351 | COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - To provide a color image processing method and device to realize desired color reproduction of the object area of a specific object in a color image taken by a color imaging device and thereby to improve the texture. A color image processing device ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110280479 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An apparatus and a method for efficiently executing correction of false color, such as purple fringe, caused by chromatic aberration and for generating and outputting high-quality image data are provided. A white-saturated pixel is detected from image data, a false-color-pixel detection area is set around the detected white-saturated pixel, and pixels having color corresponding to false color such as purple fringe are detected from the set area. The detected pixels are determined as false-color pixels and correction processing based on the values of the surrounding pixels is performed on the determined false-color pixels. With this configuration, an area of false color such as purple fringe generated in the neighborhood of a white-saturated pixel can be efficiently detected, pixel values can be partially corrected, and high-quality image data can be generated and output without affecting the entire image. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286664 | PROVIDING A SYMBOL - In one aspect, a computer-implemented method of providing a symbol includes using a computer to receive a request to provide the symbol, retrieve an image based on the request, modify the image based on the request, convert the image to form the symbol and provide the symbol. In another aspect, an article includes a machine-readable medium that stores executable instructions to provide a symbol. The instructions cause a machine to receive a request to provide the symbol, retrieve an image based on the request, modify the image based on the request, convert the image to the symbol and provide the symbol. In a further aspect, an apparatus to provide a symbol includes circuitry to receive a request to provide the symbol, retrieve an image based on the request, modify the image based on the request, convert the image to the symbol and provide the symbol. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286665 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus which corrects color balance of an image in image data captured by an image capturing apparatus having a color balance correction function, the apparatus comprises a light source estimation unit configured to estimate a capturing light source of the image based on a color value of an object; a first color conversion unit configured to perform first color conversion of converting, based on the capturing light source and the color value, the image into an image in which color balance correction applied depending on the image capturing apparatus that has captured the image data containing the image is weakened; and a second color conversion unit configured to perform second color conversion for the image having undergone the first color conversion, by using an adaptation rate corresponding to a color value defined based on chromatic adaptation of a man under the capturing light source. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286666 | Image Sharpening - Provided is a method for sharpening an image, said image comprising a plurality of pixels, each pixel having at least a first value for a first color channel and a second value for a second color channel, the method comprising:
| 11-24-2011 |
20110286667 | Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and computer program product - An image processing apparatus includes a hue identifying unit that identifies to which hue region among three or more hue regions provided in a color space a hue of each pixel contained in input image data belongs; an output-color converting unit that converts a color of each pixel to a predetermined output color in accordance with the identified hue region; a luminance calculating unit that selects a luminance calculation coefficient corresponding to the identified hue region of each pixel from among luminance calculation coefficients determined for the respective hue regions, and calculates luminance to be applied to each pixel of image data converted to the output color, on the basis of the selected luminance calculation coefficient; and an image-data generating unit that applies the calculated luminance to each pixel in the converted image data to generate color-reduced image data containing a reduced number of colors than the input image data. | 11-24-2011 |
20110293177 | Efficient Image and Video Recoloring for Colorblindness - Colors of images and videos are modified to make differences in the colors more perceptible to colorblind users. An exemplary recoloring process utilizes a color space transformation, a local color rotation and a global color rotation to transform colors of visual objects from colors which may not be distinguishable by the colorblind user to colors which may be distinguishable by the colorblind user. | 12-01-2011 |
20110293178 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing device ( | 12-01-2011 |
20110293179 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ILLUMINATION CORRECTION OF AN IMAGE - An RGB color image and an infrared intensity image of a live video are received. The RGB color image is converted to a colorspace image comprising a channel corresponding to a brightness value. Each pixel of the converted colorspace image is evaluated to determine whether the brightness channel of the pixel exceeds a threshold value. If the brightness channel of the pixel exceeds the threshold value, the infrared intensity value of a corresponding pixel from the infrared intensity image is mixed into the pixel's channel value that corresponds to brightness. The converted colorspace image is converted back to an RGB color image. | 12-01-2011 |
20110299772 | IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING A DIGITAL IMAGE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD OF PROCESSING A DIGITAL IMAGE - A processing unit for an image processing apparatus enables the reduction of background noise or disturbances on a scanned image. The processing unit is arranged to apply an image enhancement method to the luminance image data of the scanned image only and merge the obtained modified luminance image data with additional luminance image data obtained from the chrominance image data so as to recover light shades on the background that may have been removed by the image enhancement method. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299773 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - The grayscale of an input signal is converted without amplifying noise components thereof. A grayscale conversion portion performs grayscale conversion on an input signal IS to create a converted signal TS, a noise reduction degree determining portion determines a noise reduction degree NR that expresses a strength of noise reduction processing to be applied to the converted signal based on the input signal IS and the converted signal TS, and a noise reducing portion executes noise reduction processing on the converted signal TS based on the noise reduction degree NR. By doing this, it is possible to convert the grayscale of the input signal without enhancing the noise. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305389 | HIERARCHICAL MULTIDIMENSIONAL LOOKUP TABLE GENERATION - What is disclosed is a novel system and method for generating a hierarchical LUT for implementing a color transformation within a color imaging system. In one embodiment, a coarse LUT is received which comprises a plurality of sub-cubes arrayed on a plurality of coarse levels on a structured coarse grid. Each of the sub-cubes encompasses at least one coarse LUT node. Sub-cubes in the coarse grid are identified that are bisected by a boundary surface of the gamut. Then, each of the identified coarse LUT sub-cubes are associated with fine LUT which comprises a plurality of fine LUT nodes arrayed on a plurality of fine levels on a structured fine grid. A hierarchical LUT is generated from the coarse LUT and the associated fine LUTs. Thereafter, the hierarchical LUT can be used for color transformation within a color imaging system. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305390 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING A DIGITAL IMAGE - A digital image including a plurality of pixels is processed. Each pixel has at least one colorimetric component. The processing of the image includes processing for each pixel of a group of pixels of the image and for each colorimetric component of the pixel. In this processing, a modification is made to the value of the colorimetric component so as to obtain a modified value situated inside or outside a colorimetric range. A comparison is made of the modified value to the upper and lower limits of the associated colorimetric range. If the corrected value is outside the associated colorimetric range, a corrected value equal to an additional value is assigned to the corresponding colorimetric component of the pixel. The additional value is chosen to be unique and included in the associated colorimetric range and different from the values of the limits of the associated colorimetric range. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305391 | Image Processing and Displaying Methods for Devices that Implement Color Appearance Models - Embodiments of the invention relate generally to image and display processing, and more particularly, to systems, apparatuses, integrated circuits, computer-readable media, and methods that facilitate the prediction of the appearance of color in images for different viewing environments, including high dynamic range images. In some embodiments a method can modify color associated with a source environment at a target environment. The method can include applying different non-linear functions to transform subsets of data representing a color of a sample at the source environment into transformed subsets of data, and generating data representing a chroma correlate as an appearance correlate independent of data representing a hue-related correlate. The chroma correlate can be configured to generate the color at a device at the target environment. | 12-15-2011 |
20110317914 | TECHNIQUES FOR ROBUST COLOR TRANSFER - Techniques and systems to transfer color robustly between images are described. In an embodiment, a technique for transferring color includes separating color information of a registered source image into a one dimensional luminosity channel and multi-dimensional chromatic channels. The technique further includes building a voting table, where each table cell is indexed by the chromatic coordinates from the source image and from the destination image. The table is built by adding to a count stored in a table cell indexed by the chromatic coordinates of the source pixel and the chromatic coordinates of its related destination pixel for each occurrence of such a pairing. The voting table values are used to identify a transfer color, and to adjust the colors of the source image to the colors of the destination image. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317915 | SWITCHING CONTROLLER SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING IMAGE GRAININESS DURING COLOR MANAGEMENT PROFILE CONSTRUCTION - A switching controller system and method for improving graininess in an image during a profile construction. A switching control strategy can be employed to construct an ICC destination profile by switching between a first controller (e.g., a 3-input 4-output controller) and a second controller (e.g., a 3-input 3-output controller) based on a color space region that requires a graininess minimization. The first controller dynamically modifies the CMYK values until reaching a subset of LAB values contained in the ICC profile. The second controller varies three colorants and holds a remaining colorant of the CMYK values until reaching the remaining LAB values in the ICC profile. Such an approach reduces the graininess and provides an improved smoothness with respect to the image during the ICC profile construction. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPATIAL-TEMPORAL DENOISING AND DEMOSAICKING FOR NOISY COLOR FILTER ARRAY VIDEOS - A method for spatial-temporal denoising and demosaicking for noisy color filter array (CFA) video, the method including applying spatial-temporal CFA video denoising ( | 12-29-2011 |
20110317917 | Skin-tone Filtering - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, are disclosed relating to skin-tone filtering for reducing the impact of lighting conditions, while providing a low-computation solution for effective face detection. In one aspect, methods include sampling a digital image frame from among a series of digital image frames. The methods further include analyzing pixels within the sampled digital image frame to determine whether pixels in the sampled digital image frame have a hue, independent of lightness, that is within a range of hues corresponding to human skin tone. Further, the methods include deciding whether the sampled digital image frame includes a depiction of human skin based on a result of the analyzing. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317918 | METHOD FOR CHANGING AN IMAGE DATA SIGNAL, DEVICE FOR CHANGING AN IMAGE DATA SIGNAL, DISPLAY DEVICE - In a method for color enhancement the color distance between spatially close colored pixel or pixel areas does not change more than a threshold, the threshold being a function of the initial color distance. The color difference between pixels that are close together and did not differ much in color will be restricted. This reduces the change on unnatural looking parts of an image and allows more pronounced color enhancement to be 5 used. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002874 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SHIFT INVARIANT DIFFERENTIAL (SID) IMAGE DATA INTERPOLATION IN FULLY POPULATED SHIFT INVARIANT MATRIX - An image processing system for interpolating image data is comprised of a shift invariant point determining device, an illumination averager, a second order differentiator, and color data calculator. The shift invariant point determining device ascertains shift invariant points within the mosaic color element array pattern. The illumination averager determines average illumination values of clusters of a plurality of pixels. The second order differentiator determines a second order derivative of the average illumination values of the clusters of the plurality of pixels. The color data calculator determines color data for each of the plurality of pixels from the image data and second order derivative. A second order derivative scaler multiplies the second order derivative by a scaling factor for selectively smoothing and sharpening the second order derivative. A color data averager averages color data values of adjacent pixels to a resolution of the image data. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008862 | Bi-Affinity Filter: A Bilateral Type Filter for Color Images - Application of an image filtering algorithm, which defines an algorithm window within which a center pixel is processed relative to the other pixels within the algorithm window, is improved by use of an extended window larger than and encompassing the algorithm window. This approached is applied with an edge preserving filter that works on the principle of matting affinity and allows a better representation of the range filter term in bilateral class filters. An approximate bi-affinity filter whose output is shown to be very similar to the traditional bilateral filter is defined. The present technique has the added advantage that no color space changes are required and hence an input image can be handled in its original color space. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008863 | IMAGING DEVICE, METHOD OF ADJUSTING COLOR SHIFT OF DISPLAY MONITOR AND COLOR SHIFT ADJUSTER OF DISPLAY MONITOR - An imaging device includes a camera unit having an imaging element in which subject light which has passed through a shooting optical system is formed to output an image signal, a main body unit from which the camera unit is detachable, the main body unit having a display monitor displaying a subject image on a screen by input image data in which the image signal is processed, and a communication unit which enables bidirectional communication of the camera unit and the main body unit in a state in which the camera unit is removed from the main body unit. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014598 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus for applying a color balance correction to input image data, comprises a detection unit which detects an object included in the image data; an object color calculation unit which calculates an object color as a color of the object; an acquisition unit which acquires a highlight color in the image data; a calculation unit which calculates a correction value for the object color and the highlight color based on a relative positional relationship between the object color and the highlight color on a color space; and a color balance correction unit which applies the color balance correction to the highlight color and the object color using the correction value. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014599 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - In an image processing apparatus, an edge extraction unit extracts edges from image data. A correction amount acquisition unit acquires a misregistration amount of one color plane relative to another color plane of the image data, and calculates a first correction amount corresponding to an image height based on image heights of respective edges and misregistration amounts of respective edges. The correction amount acquisition unit calculates a second correction amount specific to a lens based on lens design data. A correction amount calculation unit calculates a difference between the first correction amount and the second correction amount, adjusts the difference so that the difference falls within a predetermined range, and calculates a third correction amount based on the adjusted difference and the second correction amount. A correction unit corrects the image data based on the third correction amount. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014600 | Analyzing Partial Face Regions for Red-Eye Detection in Acquired Digital Images - A method for red-eye detection in an acquired digital image includes acquiring a first image, and analyzing one or more partial face regions within the first image. One or more characteristics of the first image are determined. One or more corrective processes are identified including red eye correction that can be beneficially applied to the first image according to the one or more characteristics. The one or more corrective processes are applied to the first image. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020556 | IMAGE PROCESSOR, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided an image processor for processing input image data having a luminance component and other components, which are defined in a prescribed color space. The image processor includes: a first emphasis processor configured to process first image data so as to emphasize the contrast of the first image data in accordance with a first emphasis amount, wherein the first image data correspond to the luminance component of the input image data; a second emphasis processor configured to process second image data so as to emphasize the chroma of the second image data in accordance with the first emphasis amount, wherein the second image data correspond to said other components of the input image data; and an image data generator configured to generate new image data by combining the contrast-emphasized first image data and the chroma-emphasized second image data. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020557 | CORRECTING AN ARTIFACT IN AN IMAGE - A method of correcting an artifact in a captured image includes generating a binary map that corresponds to the artifact in the captured image. The method also includes generating a luminance mask from the binary map, the luminance mask applying a level of correction near an edge of the artifact that is different from a level of correction applied at the center of the artifact and generating, a chrominance mask to correct a color of the artifact. The method further includes performing corrections to pixels according to the luminance and the chrominance masks. | 01-26-2012 |
20120033882 | Method of reducing the amount of black in an image - A method to reduce the amount of black in an image is disclosed. The method uses a computer to reduce or eliminate the amount of black in an original digital image. In the present invention, every three adjacent pixels are processed as a set, and the intensities of the RGB values are increased, respectively. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033883 | PET EYE CORRECTION - Correction of color defects in a pupil represented in a digital image is disclosed. For example, a location in the pupil within the digital image is identified, and a target color to be corrected is computed based at least upon an analysis of pixels within a first region in which the location resides. Defect pixels in a second region in which the location resides are identified, the defect pixels being identified as having a pixel color similar to the target color. The defect pixels are color-corrected. For pupils that appear all white, appropriately configured pupil images are inserted therein. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039531 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR OBJECT COLOR CORRECTION - A method, a system, and a computer program product for object color correction are provided. Two images of the same target provided by two image capturing devices are introduced into an image conversion model constructed by an image conversion algorithm, and a color coefficient and a luminance coefficient for color space conversion are found, so as to convert the two images to a target color space. Then, the two images in the target color space are introduced into an image color distribution space model constructed by the image conversion algorithm, so as to obtain two different image color distribution space principal axes. The two image color distribution space principal axes are compared and adjusted to be parallel, thereby adjusting a color difference between the two images. The two images that are adjusted are converted back to an original color space, so as to obtain the two corrected images. | 02-16-2012 |
20120045123 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DE-NOISE PROCESSING - A method for performing de-noise processing includes: with regard to each direction of a plurality of directions, summing up absolute values of differences between a plurality of sets of first pixel values around a target pixel of an image to generate a first detection value, and with regard to each direction of at least a portion of the directions, selectively averaging at least one set of second pixel values around the target pixel to generate a second detection value; sorting a plurality of pixel values around the target pixel and generating a third detection value accordingly; and with regard to a specific direction of the directions, performing de-noise processing on the target pixel according to at least the former two of the first detection value, the third detection value, and the second detection value. An associated apparatus is also provided. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045124 | COLOR CORRECTION COEFFICIENT GENERATING APPARATUS, COLOR CORRECTION COEFFICIENT GENERATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A color correction coefficient generating apparatus includes a first color information obtaining unit that obtains pieces of color information to be corrected in a color space made up of plural color components including a specific color component, a second color information obtaining unit that obtains pieces of color information used for correction corresponding to the pieces of color information to be corrected in the color space, a weighting coefficient obtaining unit that obtains weighting coefficients corresponding to the pieces of color information to be corrected, on the basis of a position relationship between colors represented by the pieces of color information to be corrected and a specified color region and weights that are based on densities of the colors represented by the pieces of color information to be corrected, and a generating unit that generates color correction coefficients for correcting specific density values. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045125 | METHOD FOR THE PREDICTION AND RESPECTIVELY DETERMINATION OF THE COLLECTION ON A STAMPING PART - A method for predicting and/or determining rollover for a part generated by virtual fine blanking, in which a digital image, in particular the cutting contour of the part, is generated, provided as an image file and subjected to image analysis in an image processing device is disclosed. | 02-23-2012 |
20120045126 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND MEDIUM FOR STORING PROGRAM - A hue bar, radio buttons, and slide bars are laid out on an adjustment field of a dropout color setting screen. Hue which is continuously changed is displayed on the hue bar in a band form. The radio buttons correspond to specified color numbers so as to switch specification of a plurality of target colors. Sensitivity and intensity are set on the slide bars. Further, when the radio buttons are switched, a slider corresponding to the switched radio button, that is, the specified color number is switched to be in an active display such that a hue range is capable of being set and sliders corresponding to other specified color numbers are switched to be in a non-active display so that setting of the hue range is accepted. Further, settings of the sensitivity and intensity are accepted so as to be subordinate to the accepted hue range. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057785 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MODIFY A COLOR LOOKUP TABLE - The present disclosure provides a computer-implemented method of generating a modified color lookup table (CLUT) based on an original image, a profile connection space (PCS) image, and an adjusted image. The method includes, for each PCS pixel of the PCS image, identifying a subset of CLUT nodes corresponding to the PCS pixel. The method also includes identifying a color shift between an original pixel of the original image and an adjusted pixel of the adjusted image, wherein the original pixel and the adjusted pixel are co-located with the PCS pixel. The identified the color shift is associated with each one of the subset of CLUT nodes. For each CLUT node, a combined color shift is determined based on the color shifts associated with the CLUT node. A modified CLUT can be generated based on the combined color shifts computed for each of the CLUT nodes. | 03-08-2012 |
20120063681 | MINIMAL ARTIFACT IMAGE SEQUENCE DEPTH ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - Motion picture scenes to be colorized/depth enhanced (2D->3D) are broken into separate elements, backgrounds/sets or motion/onscreen-action. Background and motion elements are combined into composite frame which becomes a visual reference database that includes data for all frame offsets used later for the computer controlled application of masks within a sequence of frames. Masks are applied to subsequent frames of motion objects based on various differentiating image processing methods, including automated mask fitting/reshaping. Colors and/or depths are automatically applied to masks throughout a scene from the composite background and to motion objects. Areas never exposed by motion or foreground objects in a series of images may be partially or fully realistically drawn or rendered and applied to the occluded areas of the background and then automatically applied throughout the images to generate of minimal artifact or artifact-free secondary viewpoints when translating foreground objects horizontally during 2D->3D conversion. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063682 | METHOD OF DEMOSAICING A DIGITAL RAW IMAGE, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM AND GRAPHICS OR IMAGER CIRCUIT - A method of demosaicing a digital raw image in the form of a matrix of pixels, each dedicated to a single color among several predetermined colors from color filters, includes obtaining a color digital image of the same resolution as the raw image and in which each pixel results from corresponding pixels in a luminance image and in chrominance images reconstructed from the raw image, transformation of the raw image by applying local convolution kernels to its pixels, taking into account neighboring pixels of different colors, to obtain an image of low frequency coefficients using a low frequency local kernel and images of high frequency coefficients using high frequency local kernels; reconstruction of the luminance image using at least the image of low frequency coefficients; reconstruction of the chrominance images using the images of high frequency coefficients. | 03-15-2012 |
20120070079 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING COLOR COMPONENT VALUES OF PIXEL - A method for processing a pixel having a plurality of color component values includes: utilizing a processing circuit to generate elements of a skin color correction matrix according to elements of a global color correction matrix and a predetermined value corresponding to the pixel; utilizing the processing circuit to generate elements of a current color correction matrix according to elements of the global color correction matrix, the skin color correction matrix and the color component values of the pixel; and adjusting the color component values of the pixel according to the elements of the current color correction matrix. | 03-22-2012 |
20120070080 | COLOR CORRECTION FOR DIGITAL IMAGES - Colors in a color image are transformed by a destination device. The color image comprises pixels with color information. A depth map corresponding to the color image is accessed. The depth map comprises depth information for the color image and indicates the relative position of objects in the color image from a reference point of view. A collection of plural different color transforms is accessed. In addition, a depth value for a target pixel in the color image is determined by using the depth map. There is a selection of a color transform for the target pixel from the collection of plural different color transforms, based on the depth value determined for the target pixel. The selected color transform is applied to the color information of the target pixel by the destination device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120070081 | CORRECTING DEFECTIVE PIXELS IN DIGITAL COLOR IMAGES - A method for replacing defective pixels in a digital color image includes determining whether each pixel has defective data in a selected color channel; for the pixel, determining whether a first reference color channel exists and, if so, correcting the defective data by defining a group of neighboring pixels; for each of m neighboring pixels having non-defective data in the selected color channel and the reference color channel, computing a sum of the differences between the non-defective data in the selected color channel and the non-defective data in the first reference color channel; adding the sum of the differences divided by m to the non-defective data value from the first reference color channel to obtain a result; dividing the result by two to obtain a substitution data value; and substituting the substitution data value for the defective data. | 03-22-2012 |
20120070082 | COLOR CORRECTION FOR DIGITAL IMAGES - Colors in a color image are transformed by a destination device. The color image comprises pixels with color information. A depth map corresponding to the color image is accessed. The depth map comprises depth information for the color image and indicates the relative position of objects in the color image from a reference point of view. A collection of plural different color transforms is accessed. In addition, a depth value for a target pixel in the color image is determined by using the depth map. There is a selection of a color transform for the target pixel from the collection of plural different color transforms, based on the depth value determined for the target pixel. The selected color transform is applied to the color information of the target pixel by the destination device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120070083 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device that converts a first image captured via an optical system in which at least one of a plurality of color components is missing in one pixel and MTF characteristics are different between a reference color component and at least one missing color component at an imaging plane, into a second image in which MTF characteristics are matched, includes: an image creation unit that acquires information concerning differences in MTF characteristics between the missing color component and the reference color component in a pixel having the missing color component of the first image and creates the second image by using the acquired information. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076403 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALL-IN-FOCUS IMAGING FROM MULTIPLE IMAGES ACQUIRED WITH HAND-HELD CAMERA - Methods and systems to create an image in which objects at different focal depths all appear to be in focus. In an embodiment, all objects in the scene may appear in focus. Non-stationary cameras may be accommodated, so that variations in the scene resulting from camera jitter or other camera motion may be tolerated. An image alignment process may be used, and the aligned images may be blended using a process that may be implemented using logic that has relatively limited performance capability. The blending process may take a set of aligned input images and convert each image into a simplified Laplacian pyramid (LP). The LP is a data structure that includes several processed versions of the image, each version being of a different size. The set of aligned images is therefore converted into a corresponding set of LPs. The LPs may be combined into a composite LP, which may then undergo Laplacian pyramid reconstruction (LPR). The output of the LPR process is the final blended image. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076404 | IMAGE COLOR ENHANCEMENT - Some embodiments of the invention provide a non-linear image-enhancement method to enhance an image that includes a number of picture elements. The non-linear enhancement method adjusts the brightness value of each pixel in the image and adjusts at least one chromatic value of each pixel in the image based on the adjustment to the brightness value of that pixel. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076405 | AUTOMATIC DETECTION OF CALIBRATION CHARTS IN IMAGES - Methods and apparatuses for locating an embedded color chart in an image are described. In one exemplary method, an image that includes an embedded color chart is located without the intervention of the user. The embedded color chart is verified and used to create a color profile of the image. Furthermore, the orientation angle of the color chart is determined and the image orientation is fixed based on this angle. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082379 | Image Adjustment Method and Device - An image adjustment method includes the steps of: a) configuring a weight-value generator to receive first image data and specified data and to generate an adaptive weight value according to the first image data and the specified data; and b) configuring an image blender to receive the first image data and second image data, and to generate adjusted image data by blending the first image data and the second image data with reference to the adaptive weight value. The adaptive weight value has a magnitude that corresponds to a difference between the first image data and the specified data. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082380 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM AND MEDIUM STORING THIS PROGRAM - Whether purple fringing (PF) has occurred is determined for every pixel of interest P(i,j) (step | 04-05-2012 |
20120087582 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RESIZING AN IMAGE - There is disclosed a method and system for resizing a digital image wherein a RGB image is converted into an YCbCr image (Y, Cb, Cr planes). Thereafter, a discrete cosine transform (DCT), followed by a specific inverse cosine transform (IDCT) is performed on each row/column of the Y, Cb, Cr planes. The mentioned specific operation corresponds to a type of homothetic matrix, which dimensions are defined by a scaling factor. In order to produce a scaled image, the scaled Y, Cb, Cr images are transformed to an RGB image for display. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093404 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus that suppresses occurrences of color conversions not intended by the user. Information on affected regions for individual color conversion processes applied to an image is stored in the information processing apparatus. The information processing apparatus determines whether or not the affected region of a color conversion process that the user is attempting to apply overlap an affected region of a color conversion process that has already been applied, and if so, informs the user by, for example, displaying the affected regions on a chromaticity diagram. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093405 | APPARATUS FOR COLOR INTERPOLATION USING ADJUSTABLE THRESHOLD - An apparatus for color interpolation using an adjustable threshold is disclosed. The color interpolation apparatus calculates the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the elements of the image data and determines the color interpolation method of the image data depending on the difference to perform the corresponding color interpolation. With the present invention, the improved image quality can be provided because the color interpolation can be performed as a user desires. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093406 | APPARATUS FOR COLOR INTERPOLATION USING ADJUSTABLE THRESHOLD - An apparatus for color interpolation using an adjustable threshold is disclosed. The color interpolation apparatus calculates the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the elements of the image data and determines the color interpolation method of the image data depending on the difference to perform the corresponding color interpolation. With the present invention, the improved image quality can be provided because the color interpolation can be performed as a user desires. | 04-19-2012 |
20120099788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A COLOR PALETTE - A method for selecting a color palette includes receiving a feature from an image of an object and a reference color chart, calculating a transform to correct a color in the imaged reference color chart, correcting a color in the feature using the transform, and selecting a color palette based on the corrected feature color. The reference color chart includes reference colors, and the transform corrects the color in the imaged reference color chart to substantially equal a corresponding reference color. An apparatus for selecting a color palette is also described. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099789 | Method and Device for Color Correction - The present invention discloses a method and a device for color correction for solving a problem of low color correction processing speed for images input into a computer in the prior art. A main technical solution includes: an input image is divided into no less than one image blocks; various color component values of all pixels in each image block are compared with each other, an image block with the same color component values of all pixels being regarded as a simple block, and an image block with different color component values being regarded as a complex block; and a process of color correction is performed on one pixel of the simple block, then the color correction processing result is copied to other pixels of the simple block. With the technical solution, an object of increasing processing speed can be achieved by performing simplified processing directly toward certain image parts with special features, and the color correction processing speed can be increased without general influence on the present color correction effect. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106840 | COMBINING IMAGES CAPTURED WITH DIFFERENT COLOR PATTERNS - A method for enhancing a digital image of a scene, includes acquiring a first digital image of the scene having pixel values corresponding to a first predetermined color pattern and a second digital image of the scene having pixel values corresponding to a second different predetermined color pattern, wherein the first and second digital images were captured at substantially the same time. The method further includes using a processor to align the first and second digital images; and using pixel values of the second image based on the alignment between the first and second images to operate on the first digital image to produce the enhanced digital image having corrected color values. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106841 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTI RESOLUTION PURPLE FRINGING DETECTION AND CORRECTION - A system, method, and computer program product for automatically detecting and correcting the “purple fringing” effect, typically due to axial chromatic aberration in imaging devices, are disclosed and claimed. A chromaticity score is computed, denoting the amount of false color related to a purple fringing artifact. A locality score is computed, denoting the similarity of the purple fringing region to a shape of a narrow ridge, which is typical for purple fringing artifacts. A saturation score is also computed, denoting the proximity of a pixel to saturated pixels. These scores are then combined into a detection score, denoting pixels having strong indications they share properties common to pixels of purple fringing artifacts. The detected pixels are then correspondingly corrected, e.g. by chroma suppression. The scoring and correction may be performed over combinations of image resolutions, e.g. an original version and potentially numerous downscaled versions. | 05-03-2012 |
20120114235 | INTEGRATING IMAGE FRAMES - The technology described herein includes integration of image frames. The integration of image frames includes determining a sharpness metric for each image frame in a plurality of image frames. The sharpness metric is indicative of at least one of edge content and an edge size of the image frame. The integration of image frames further includes determining a noise metric for each image frame in the plurality of image frames. The noise metric is indicative of a variation in brightness or color in the image frame. The integration of image frames further includes determining a jitter metric for each image frame in the plurality of image frames. The jitter metric is indicative of spatial shifts between the image frame and other image frames in the plurality of image frames. The integration of image frames further includes generating an integrated image frame from one or more of the plurality of image frames based on the sharpness metric, the noise metric, and the jitter metric. | 05-10-2012 |
20120114236 | Gamma Adjustment for Maximizing Information in Images - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on computer storage media, are described for transforming an image at least in part by using a gamma transformation that maximizes information in the transformed image. In one aspect, a digital image is received and brightness of the digital image is determined. The brightness of the digital image can include luminance or color. Maximum available detail in the digital image is brought out at least in part by applying to the brightness of the digital image a first gamma exponent that is equal to one divided by a negative of an average logarithm of the brightness of the digital image. | 05-10-2012 |
20120114237 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND CAMERA MODULE - According to one embodiment, an image processing apparatus includes a shading correction unit. The shading correction unit executes at least one of the use of shading correction parameters calculated in accordance with exposure information for capturing a subject image and the adjustment of a center position in a two-dimensional direction which is used as the basis of the shading correction in accordance with the exposure information. | 05-10-2012 |
20120121177 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OPERATIVE TO PROCESS COLOR IMAGE DATA - A method and system operative to process color image data are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method can comprise the steps of receiving color image data, determining the color ranges to be applied to the color image data, assigning each of the pixel positions in the image data a color range, assigning a different spatial binary pattern to each color range, and assigning each of the pixel positions a binary output pixel value that corresponds to the spatial binary pattern assigned to the color range assigned to that pixel position. The resulting binary image data can be written to a file for subsequent storage, transmission, processing, or retrieval and rendering. In other embodiments, a system can be made operative to accomplish the same. | 05-17-2012 |
20120121178 | Image Representation Method and Apparatus - A colour image comprises colour values in each of one or more colour channels for each of a plurality of points, or pixels, within the image. The image is represented by rank ordering the values in each colour channel. The image representation generated in this way is usable for automated-vision or computer-vision tasks, for example. | 05-17-2012 |
20120128243 | COMPONENT FILTERING FOR LOW-LIGHT NOISE REDUCTION - In general, in one embodiment, low-light noise is removed from an image by separately filtering luma and chroma components of the image, by adaptively filtering the image based at least in part on a Gaussian distribution of the image, and/or by dividing the image into separate regions and filtering each region separately. | 05-24-2012 |
20120128244 | DIVIDE-AND-CONQUER FILTER FOR LOW-LIGHT NOISE REDUCTION - In general, in one embodiment, low-light noise is removed from an image by separately filtering luma and chroma components of the image, by adaptively filtering the image based at least in part on a Gaussian distribution of the image, and/or by dividing the image into separate regions and filtering each region separately. | 05-24-2012 |
20120128245 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREDICTIVE SCALING OF COLOUR MAPPED IMAGES - A method for determining a scaled colour map of a scaled image is described using the transformation of the original colour map and the original image only, independently of the scaled image. A number of colours N in the original colour map is determined; and provided N>N | 05-24-2012 |
20120128246 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COLOR MANAGEMENT IN DISPLAY SYSTEMS - A method of processing an input image includes receiving an input signal associated with the input image. The input signal includes a plurality of components. The method also includes determining a minimum component of the plurality of components and determining a white signal level as a function of the minimum component. The method further includes multiplying the white signal level by a normalized value computed using a component of the plurality of components to provide a scaled white signal level. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134584 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE-PROCESSING METHOD FOR ADJUSTING WHITE BALANCE OF IMAGES - In an image processing apparatus, a white balance calculating unit is configured to calculate a first coordinate value that indicates a white balance of an image in a color space. A determining unit is configured to determine whether a first distance between the first coordinate value and a reference coordinate value is greater than a prescribed threshold distance. An adjustment amount setting unit is configured to set the adjustment amount to a first adjustment amount when the determining unit determines that the first distance is smaller than or equal to the prescribed threshold distance, the first adjustment amount corresponding to the first distance, the adjustment amount setting unit setting the adjustment amount to a second adjustment amount when the determining unit determines that the first distance is greater than the prescribed threshold distance, the second adjustment amount corresponding to a second distance smaller than the first distance. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134585 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A first generation unit generates a RAW image reduced in the horizontal direction from a RAW image including pixels each having single-color signal information, by limiting the band of spatial frequencies in the horizontal direction and decreasing the number of pixels in the horizontal direction. The RAW image reduced in the horizontal direction is stored in a line memory. A second generation unit generates a reduced RAW image by decreasing, at least in the vertical direction, the number of pixels of the RAW image reduced in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to generate a reduced RAW image using little memory capacity. | 05-31-2012 |
20120141026 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING TILE MAP SERVICE USING IMAGE FUSION - A system includes a server including a map data storage device storing original tile map data, grayscale image tile map data, and a plurality of multi-resolution color image tile map data having a resolution lower than that of the grayscale image tile map data, and a multi-resolution tile map data generation and transmission device generating the grayscale image tile map data and the multi-resolution color image tile map data and storing the generated data in the map data storage device, and a client including a multi-resolution tile map data reception and fusion device generating color tile map data by fusing the received grayscale image tile map data and color image tile map data and providing the color tile map data to a user, in which the resolution of the color image tile map data transmitted from the server is variably controlled according to the network environment. | 06-07-2012 |
20120141027 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND IMAGE PICKUP APPARATUS USING SAME - To provide an image processing apparatus capable of obtaining a high-quality image. | 06-07-2012 |
20120148154 | IMAGE ACCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A method for transferring image data by using an interface with at least two transfer pipes to transfer from an image accessing unit to a computer is disclosed. The method includes: obtaining image data in response to a control command from the computer; converting the image data to sampled structure data and transferring the sampled structure data to the computer through at least one of the data transfer pipes; and providing information to the computer to recover the received sampled structure data. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155758 | ELECTRONIC COMPONENT WITH THREE ASSOCIATED FUNCTIONS - Electronic component which modifies, by electronic re-equilibration, mechanical efficiencies, audio-visual effects, and food products. The electronic component eCRT is a regulator which, like entropy, regulates the exchanges of natural equilibrium of the information of electro-magnetic charges with electronic charges. This equilibrium is to naturally clean the air and the excess of magnetic charges around apparatus or in inert products that have accumulated non-useful electrons which are then absorbed, attracted captured by the trap of the metallic components. Nanotechnology makes it possible to see the migration of the magnetic fields converted into electric current whose piezo is fed in order to vibrate. These functions are all natural but, associated together, they create novel functions specific to this method. This vision of nano-technology makes it possible to solve, on a large scale, invisible solutions, through a vision of suitable scale. The application to sound in ambient space of the eCRT electronic component is the supreme demonstration of the audio magnetic loss captured by the piezo-electricity eCRT which captures the magnetic field instantaneously and transforms the magnetic information into electric current, according to the audio modulation. This audio electrical modulation by the thirst, the transience of the piezoelectricity is transformed into audible mechanical motion of the sound lost initially by the coil. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155759 | ESTABLISHING CLUSTERS OF USER PREFERENCES FOR IMAGE ENHANCEMENT - An image enhancement system may match images to a matrix having various enhancements of images for groups of users. The matrix may define image enhancement settings for the particular images and groups of users, and the matching may apply enhancements to a new image that closely matches a user's preferences. After the matrix is initially populated, new users and new images may be added to increase the matrix's accuracy. The image enhancement system may be deployed as a cloud service, where images may be enhanced as a standalone application or as part of a social network or image sharing website. In some embodiments, the image enhancement system may be deployed on a personal computer or as a component of an image capture device. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155760 | IMAGE CORRECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD - In an image correction method, an image of an object is captured, and a standard image of the object is obtain from a storage system of a computing device. A target area contains most image characteristics of the object is determined from the standard image of the object, and a standard pixel block having N×N pixels is extracted from the target area. The captured image is divided into M pixel blocks having N×N pixels. Each of the pixel blocks of the captured image are analyzed with the standard pixel block. A pixel value of each pixel of the captured image is corrected according the analysis, and the corrected image is output to a display device of a computing device for display. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155761 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus capable of performing chromatic aberration of magnification and noise reduction without decrease in processing performance and increase in the cost is provided. A format conversion circuit in the image processing apparatus converts first image data including an array of color components of red (R), green (G1 and G2), and blue (B) into second image data including the color components of R and B and a luminance component by performing false color suppression processing on the first image data separately using the color components of G1 and G2, and stores the data in an image buffer region. A circuit for correcting chromatic aberration of magnification reads the second data stored in the image buffer region and performs the correction of chromatic aberration of magnification. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155762 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - Provided is an image processing method wherein an edge is detected from an image to which a sharpening process is to be applied, and on the basis of a length of the edge which is present near a pixel to which the sharpening process is to be applied, the strength of the sharpening process to the pixel is determined. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155763 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WHITE BALANCE - A method and apparatus for white balancing. The method comprising estimating the color temperature of at least a portion of the image, wherein the color temperature estimation algorithm is based on computing histogram correlations of at least a portion of at least one reference image and at least a portion of at least one target image, and correcting the white balance of at least a portion of the image utilizing the estimated color temperature. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163715 | CONVEX CLUSTERING FOR CHROMATIC CONTENT MODELING - A system and method are provided for modeling a chromatic object, such as an image. For a set of colors of a chromatic object that are expressed as color values in a perceptual color space, the method includes optimizing a convex objective function which is a log likelihood function of a combination of weighted kernels centered on each color in the set over each of the other colors in the set. A number N | 06-28-2012 |
20120163716 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR COLOR PROCESSING - A color processing apparatus includes a generating unit that generates correction information to a second white point from luminance information of a first white point, which is a white point of color information of a given processing target, and luminance information of a target white point, and a color correcting unit that performs a color correcting process on the color information of the processing target using the correction information to the second white point generated by the generating unit. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163717 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MATCHING COLORS BETWEEN VARIOUS IMAGE DEVICES - An apparatus for matching colors between various image devices includes a characterization model generation unit configured to generate characterization models for color conversion using gamut information on the image shooting device and the output imaging device; a color conversion unit configured to convert all colors corresponding to a gamut of the image shooting device into colors corresponding to a gamut of the output imaging device using the characterization models; a lookup table generation unit configured to generate a lookup table between the image shooting device and the output imaging device based on color conversion information of the colors corresponding to the gamut of the image shooting device; and an image conversion unit configured to generate an output image of the output imaging device, of which the colors are matched with those of the image inputted from the image shooting device, using the lookup table. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170842 | TONE MAPPING OF VERY LARGE AERIAL IMAGE MOSAIC - A method for tone mapping a high dynamic range image of a large terrestrial area into a lower dynamic range image uses: globally aware, locally adaptive approach whereby local tonal balancing parameter values are derived from known tone mapping parameters for a local 3×3 matrix of image tiles and used in turn to derive a local sigmoid transfer function for pixels in the tile in the middle of the matrix. A global sigmoid transfer function is derived based on values of the tone mapping parameters applicable to the entire image. A lower dynamic range image pixel will have a local tone mapped value and a globally tone mapped value, which are combined by giving each a weighted value to provide a final low dynamitic range pixel value. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170843 | METHODS FOR PERFORMING LOCAL TONE MAPPING - Adaptive local tone mapping may be used to convert a high dynamic range image to a low dynamic range image. Tone mapping may be performed on an on a Bayer domain image. A high dynamic range image may be filtered to produce a luminance signal. An illumination component of the luminance signal may be compressed. A reflectance component of the luminance signal may be sharpened. After the luminance signal has been processed, it may be used in producing an output image in the Bayer domain that has a lower dynamic range than the input image. The output Bayer domain image may be demosaiced to produce an RGB image. Tone-mapping may be performed with a tone-mapping processor. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170844 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus including: a color mode selection receiving unit configured to receive a selection of a color mode used for printing or displaying; a color selection receiving unit configured to receive a selection of a color used for printing or displaying; a color conversion palette generation unit configured to generate a color conversion palette based on the selected color mode and the selected color, the color conversion palette being used for converting original data to be printed or displayed into colors used for printing or displaying; and a color conversion unit configured to convert the original data to be printed or displayed into output data using the color conversion palette when performing printing or displaying. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170845 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING IMAGE QUALITY BASED ON DEFINITION AND CHROMA - An apparatus and method for improving image quality based on definition and chroma are provided. The method includes analyzing an input image; calculating a quantified definition value and a quantified chroma value of the input image; determining a definition parameter corresponding to the quantified definition value and a chroma parameter corresponding to the quantified chroma value; and applying the determined definition parameter and the determined chroma parameter to a frame of the input image. | 07-05-2012 |
20120177289 | Methods and Apparatuses for Addressing Chromatic Abberations and Purple Fringing - Methods and systems for detecting and correcting chromatic aberration and purple fringing are disclosed. Chromatic aberration can be addressed by separating an image into color planes and then adjusting these to reduce chromatic aberration by using a specific calibration image (calibration chart) as an empirical method to calibrate the image acquisition device. Purple fringing can be corrected by initially addressing color aberration resulting from the lateral chromatic aberration (LCA). The LCA is first removed and then the correction is extended to purple fringing. A discovery is relied upon that the purple fringing is created in the direction of the chromatic aberration and is more pronounced in the direction of the chromatic aberration. | 07-12-2012 |
20120183217 | SYSTEM AND PROCESS FOR COLOR-BALANCING A SERIES OF OBLIQUE IMAGES - An image processing system, comprising a computer running image processing software and selecting a series of color-balanced images to use as reference images. On an oblique image by image basis, the computer performs the following steps: (a) locate a portion(s) of a reference image(s) that overlaps the oblique image; (b) create multiple color-balancing transformations that approximately match a color distribution of the oblique image to a color distribution of overlapping portion(s) of the reference image(s); (c) transform pixels in the oblique image according to more than one of the multiple color-balancing transformations created for the oblique image; and (d) store the transformed pixel value in at least one of the oblique image or a copy of the oblique image. | 07-19-2012 |
20120183218 | METHOD OF ADJUSTING OUTPUT LEVEL OF MEASUREMENT PIXEL, COLOR SENSOR AND VIRTUAL SLIDE APPARATUS - A method of adjusting an output level of a measurement pixel may include a first step of selecting a type of a target sample from a plurality of previously determined sample type candidates, a second step of measuring an output level of a reference pixel based on light from the target sample incident on the reference pixel, a third step of selecting a level adjustment parameter associated with the type of the target sample selected in the first step, the plurality of candidates being associated with the type of the target sample, a fourth step of calculating a level adjustment amount of the measurement pixel, and a fifth step of adjusting the output level using the level adjustment amount when measuring an output level corresponding to the light from the target sample. | 07-19-2012 |
20120189200 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND PIXEL INTERPOLATION METHOD - A color separating unit separates a color image into plural color components to generate images of respective colors. A periodicity determining unit determines, for each of the color images, whether an image region including a target pixel whose pixel value is to be interpolated is a periodic region in which pixel values vary periodically. A first generating unit generates pixel values of the respective colors of a pixel using a first interpolation method. A second generating unit generates pixel values of the respective colors of a pixel using a second interpolation method. A control unit determines which one of the first and second generating units is to be used for generating pixel values of the respective colors of the target pixel. A pixel value combining unit combines candidate pixel values which are the pixel values of the respective colors of the target pixel to calculate a combined pixel value. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195502 | DYNAMIC RANGE EXTENSION FOR CMOS IMAGE SENSORS FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS - A system for processing images may comprise a pixel configuration circuitry enabled to set for each pixel in a pixel array one of a plurality of integration times and one of a plurality of signal gains. A column analog-to-digital converter may be enabled to generate a corresponding digital data for a pixel in the pixel array, and digital processing circuitry may be enabled to interpolate output data from the corresponding digital data for pixels grouped into pixel groups, wherein the pixel group comprises a target pixel and neighboring pixels in a same color plane. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195503 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device includes a first image enhancer and a second image enhancer. The first image enhancer receives first image data and generates first image enhancement information by analyzing the first image data. The second image enhancer receives second image data and generates second image enhancement information by analyzing the second image data. The first image enhancer converts the first image data into first enhanced image data based on the first image enhancement information and the second image enhancement information. The second image enhancer converts the second image data into second enhanced image data based on the first image enhancement information and the second image enhancement information. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201453 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An image processing apparatus adapted to perform tone correction of luminance of an image, comprises: a image dividing unit configured to divide the image into a plurality of blocks; a calculation unit configured to calculate a plurality of feature amounts of each of the blocks including a luminance value and calculate a saturated feature amount based on the plurality of calculated feature amounts, wherein the saturated feature amount represents color deviation tendency when the tone correction is applied to the image using a reference tone correction characteristic; a changing unit configured to change the reference tone correction characteristic according to the calculated saturated feature amount; and a correction unit configured to perform the tone correction based on the changed reference tone correction, wherein the changing unit weakens a degree of the reference tone correction characteristic when the saturated feature amount indicates a stronger tendency toward color deviation. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201454 | SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE, SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGING APPARATUS, AND IMAGING PROCESSING METHOD - A signal processing device includes: an enhancement countermeasure unit in which when a linear matrix gain using a linear matrix coefficient is multiplied to a pixel value of an image signal output for each channel by a pixel of an imaging device, whereby an enhancement of color occurs in an image based on the image signal, the image signal in which a portion where the enhancement of color occurs is corrected for each channel is output based on a color-difference component separated from the result of multiplication of the linear matrix coefficient to the pixel value for each channel and a luminance calculated from the result. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201455 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC AND ADAPTIVE ENHANCEMENT OF COLORS IN DIGITAL VIDEO IMAGES USING VALUE BRIGHT-GAIN - System and method for dynamically and adaptively enhancing user chosen colors on a frame-by-frame basis of an incoming digital video signal using a saturation dependent value bright-gain is disclosed. In one embodiment, a value-saturation 2D-histogram for each of the user chosen colors is formed using a substantially current video frame. Further, a saturation dependent value bright-gain is dynamically computed for each of the user chosen colors using the corresponding value-saturation 2D-histogram of the substantially current video frame and corresponding value-saturation 2D-histogram information and a saturation dependent value bright-gain of a substantially previous video frame. Furthermore, which one of the dynamically computed saturation dependent value bright-gains associated with the user chosen colors to be applied on a per-pixel basis is determined. The determined saturation dependent value bright-gain is applied to value component on the per-pixel basis in the substantially current or next video frame. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201456 | TRANSFORMING A DIGITAL IMAGE FROM A LOW DYNAMIC RANGE (LDR) IMAGE TO A HIGH DYNAMIC RANGE (HDR) IMAGE - The invention provides a method for transforming an image from a Low Dynamic Range (LDR) image obtained with a given camera to a High Dynamic Range (HDR) image, the method comprising:
| 08-09-2012 |
20120213436 | Fast Image Enhancement and Three-Dimensional Depth Calculation - Embodiments of the present invention relate to processing of digital image data that has been generated by imaging a physical object through a medium. For example, the medium may be, the atmosphere and the atmosphere may have some inherent property, such as haze, fog, or smoke. Additionally, the medium may be media other than the atmosphere, such as, water or blood. There may be one or more media that obstructs the physical object and the medium resides at least in front of the physical object between the physical object and an imaging sensor. The physical object may be one or more physical objects that are part of a scene in a field of view (e.g. view of a mountain range, forest, cars in a parking lot etc.). An estimated transmission vector of the medium is determined based upon digital input image data. Once the transmission vector is determined, effects due to scattering can be removed from the digital input image producing a digital output image that enhances the digital input image so that further detail may be perceived. Additionally, the estimated transmission vector may be used to determine depth data for each addressable location within the image. The depth information may be used to create a three-dimensional image from a two dimensional image. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213437 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS, COLOR PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A color processing apparatus includes plural computation units and a combining unit. The plural computation units have different center color signals set therein. Each of the plural computation units is configured to calculate a weighted value in accordance with a distance between a given color signal and the set center color signal. The combining unit determines a composite output color signal in accordance with the weighted values calculated by the plural computation units. | 08-23-2012 |
20120219217 | AUTOMATIC COLOR ADJUSTMENT OF A TEMPLATE DESIGN - The present invention generates a color template design to format a presentation. According to one aspect, a plurality of template designs are provided on a visual display. A selection of one of the plurality of template designs is received from a user. A plurality of source images that are separate from the plurality of template designs are provided on the visual display. A selection of a color from one of the plurality of source images is received from the user. Colors of the selected template design are automatically adjusted to match the selected the color from the source image. The selected template design may include framing, mat, background, and foreground portions, at least one of which is adjusted. After automatically adjusting the colors, the selected template design may be displayed and/or stored for use as a template. | 08-30-2012 |
20120230584 | COLOR PROCESSING DEVICE, COLOR PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A color processing device includes a converter that converts a combination of values of N−1 colors obtained by eliminating a specific color included in N colors from an input color signal expressing a color by a combination of values of the N colors, into a corresponding combination of values of M−1 colors, N being 4 or larger, M being larger than N; and an output unit that, if a total value of the values of the M−1 colors after the conversion by the converter and a value of the specific color included in the input color signal exceeds a predetermined limit value, changes a value of at least one of M colors obtained by adding the specific color to the M−1 colors such that the total value becomes the limit value or smaller, and outputs values of the M colors as an output color signal. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230585 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR FILTERING NOISE IN AN IMAGE - A method for filtering noise in an image filters noise pixels in a discrepant block between a current image and a background image firstly, and further filter each small block whose area is less than a preset value from the discrepant block. The method further calculates a total area of each big block whose area is greater than or equal to the preset value from the discrepant block, and adds the current image to a background list of the current image if the total area is less than another preset value. | 09-13-2012 |
20120237124 | IMAGE CHROMA NOISE REDUCTION IN THE BAYER DOMAIN - An embodiment relates to a method and an image processor for reducing chroma noise in digital-image data. An embodiment performs noise reduction in the color-filter-array domain prior to demosaicing in order to prevent spreading of noise in subsequent stages of the image-processing pipeline. Peaks in the CFA data are attenuated in order to prevent any undesired color cast. Specifically, any correction to a certain pixel is made in accordance with the amplitude of digital gains applied, as well as with the local luminance and the contribution of the current color channel to the local luminance. In this manner, corrections are restricted to image areas that are subject to high digital amplification, that are comparatively dark, and that are not dominated by the current color channel. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243783 | Red-Eye Removal Using Multiple Recognition Channels - This disclosure pertains to apparatuses, methods, and computer readable media for red-eye removal techniques using multiple recognition channels. In the following examples, red, golden, and white recognition channels are used. A recognition channel is the monochrome extraction from a color photograph in a manner designed to make one kind of red-eye artifact glow with maximum contrast. Once the red-eye artifact has been characterized by, e.g., size and location, the techniques disclosed herein may then discern whether the red-eye artifact is, for example, a red-, golden-, or white-eye case by examining the configuration and characteristics of prominence bitmasks created for the various recognition channels. Once the type of red-eye case has been discerned, the techniques disclosed herein may then replace the artifact with a photographically reasonable result based on the type of red-eye case being repaired. Specular reflection may also be re-added to the photograph. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250992 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes: a holding section holding a pixel value input thereto; a basic pixel value calculating section calculating a basic pixel value from the pixel values of a plurality of pixels which are neighboring pixels located around a pixel of interest having the pixel value held by the holding section and which have the same color as the pixel of interest; a different color pixel difference calculating section calculating a different color pixel difference which is a difference between the pixel values of neighboring pixels having a color different from the color of the pixel of interest; a combining section combining the basic pixel value and the different color pixel difference to calculate an estimated pixel value of the pixel of interest; and a correcting section correcting the pixel value of the pixel of interest to the estimated value. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250993 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing device includes an image estimation unit that estimates an image prior to the jaggedness occurrence from a jaggedness-occurring image and generates an estimated image prior to the jaggedness occurrence, and a weighting/adding unit that selects a jaggedness-occurring area as a processing target area in the estimated image prior to the jaggedness occurrence, detects a similar area that is a pixel area and similar to the processing target area, and then computes a weight according to the degree of similarity of each detected similar area to the processing target area, and detects a corresponding area in the jaggedness-occurring image to the processing target area and the similar area, and then computes a corrected pixel value of the processing target area of the jaggedness-occurring image through a weighting/adding process to which the weight of a pixel value of the detected corresponding area is applied. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250994 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - Disclosed is an image processing device which is provided with a determination section which determines texture direction in a vicinity region based on the vicinity region which includes a target pixel in the image and a detection section which detects whether or not the target pixel is a defective pixel based on a plurality of pixels including the target pixel which are lined up in the texture direction in the image. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250995 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - The present technology relates to an image processing device including: a reducing section configured to generate a plurality of reduced images by reducing an input image at a plurality of reduction ratios; a noise removal processing section configured to generate noise-removed images by performing noise removal processing on each of the reduced images; an enlarging section configured to generate enlarged images equal to each other in size by enlarging each of the noise-removed images; and a mixing section configured to generate an output image by mixing two or more different enlarged images of the enlarged images with each other. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250996 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes an emphasis map creation module configured to create an emphasis map indicating an emphasis region of image data and an emphasis level of the emphasis region, and an image processor configured to perform a first conversion of a tone of image data of the emphasis region into a first tone and a second conversion of a tone of image data of another region into a second tone, in accordance with the emphasis map created by the emphasis map creation module. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250997 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus connectable to a terminal through a network, includes a receiver configured to receive original image data uploaded from the terminal, an image processor configured to change a tone of the original image data, a transmitter which transmits tone-changed image data output from the image processor to the terminal, and a face detector configured to detect a face region in the original image data received by the receiver, wherein the image processor is configured to perform a first tone-change for image data of the face region in the original image data, and perform a second tone-change for image data of another region in the original image data. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257825 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING A DEFECT PIXEL - A method for correcting a defect pixel includes extracting a pixel value of a central pixel, and pixel values of each of a plurality of neighboring pixels around the central pixel in an image sensor by using a color filter; calculating reference levels by multiplying each the pixel value of the plurality of neighboring pixels by a weight value; calculating a total number of cases where the pixel value of the central pixel is larger or smaller than the reference level as a first comparison value or second comparison value, respectively; determining the central pixel is a defect pixel where the first or second comparison value is larger than a first or second control register value, by comparing the comparison values with the control register values, respectively; and correcting the central pixel determined as the defect pixel. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257826 | COLOR CONVERSION APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A color conversion method includes determining a race by recognizing a skin region in an input image, selecting a preferred skin color to apply to the skin region based on a plurality of preferred skin color information preset per race, and correcting a color of the skin region using the selected preferred skin color. Additionally, a color conversation apparatus includes a control unit to determine a race by recognizing a skin region in an input image input, and to select a preferred skin color to apply to the skin region, based on the plurality of the preferred skin color information stored in a storage unit, and a compensation unit to correct a color of the skin region using the preferred skin color selected by the control unit. Hence, the skin color per race can be adequately converted to the color which can satisfy the user. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257827 | METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA AND DISPLAY APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - A method of processing data includes correcting received color data and generating corrected color data, generating color glitch correction data corresponding to the corrected color data using a glitch correction value preset based on the received color data, and converting the color glitch correction data into a color data voltage and providing the color data voltage to a display panel. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257828 | IMAGE PROCESSING CIRCUIT, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC APPLIANCE - An image processing circuit includes: a correction amount calculation section which calculates a correction amount from area-by-area correction amounts set respectively for two, corresponding to the hue of input image data, out of a plurality of areas into which the hue/saturation plane is divided; and a color correction processing section which generates output image data by subjecting the input image data to color correction processing according to the correction amount. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263379 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC COLOR CORRECTION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a system and method for dynamic color correction of an imaged object. According to one embodiment, an image containing an object and color chart is received. The color chart includes a range of color values, while at least one feature and an associated correctable color value is determined from the imaged object. Furthermore, a target color value substantially corresponding to the correctable color value is identified. Based on the identified target color value, the correctable color value associated with the feature is then corrected. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269430 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMBINING COLOR INFORMATION WITH SPATIAL INFORMATION IN MULTISPECTRAL IMAGES - An image processing system combines higher-resolution panchromatic images and lower resolution multispectral images using a hyperspherical color space pan-sharpening technique. By converting the multispectral images into a hyperspherical color space, the intensities of the multispectral images can be intensity matched to the intensities of the panchromatic image and then retransformed back to the original color space. The intensity matching can utilize a number of techniques, including, but not limited to, direct substitution of the intensities of the panchromatic image for the intensities of the multispectral images, modification of the intensities of the multispectral images based on predefined statistical models and modification of the intensities of the multispectral images based on dynamically generated statistical models and a selected sharpening parameter β. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269431 | METHODS AND APPARTUSES FOR RESTORING COLOR AND ENHANCING ELECTRONIC IMAGES - Methods and apparatuses for color image restoration and enhancement. In at least one embodiment, color signals for individual channels of an image (e.g., red, green, or blue) are adjusted based on a weighted set of averages (e.g., of the entire image, the center portion, the surrounding portion, or other portions). In one example, pixels with extreme values of color signals (e.g., pure black or white pixels) are ignored for the purposes of restoring color; and, the different averages are weighted according to the pixel location (e.g., the distance from the pixel to a center point). In one example, after color restoration for individual channels, the luminance of each pixel is adjusted back to their original levels; and the range of luminance of the image is further adjusted to provide improved brightness and contrast, where in determining the luminance the red, green and blue color channels are given an equal weight. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275698 | Method of Orthoimage Color Correction Using Multiple Aerial Images - A method for true-orthoimage color correction is provided. Aerial images and digital elevation models (DEMs) are used for balancing colors in orthoimages or true-orthoimages. Seam lines between images are also smoothed. Thus, color distinction between images is rectified and orthoimage quality is greatly enhanced. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281916 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING HUE - An apparatus and method for adjusting hue in an image processing device are provided. The method includes: setting a rotation angle of hue of each of regions of an image divided into a predetermined number about a central point; calculating coordinates of hue values Cr and Cb of an input pixel to determine in which of the regions the pixel is located; calculating an angle of the pixel in the determined region; calculating a movement angle using rotation angles set for the determined region and an adjacent region, and determining whether interpolation is to be performed to the angle of the pixel based on a difference between the movement angle and the angle of the pixel; and if it is determined that the interpolation is to be performed, calculating an interpolation angle using the movement angle and the angle of the pixel, and moving the pixel by the interpolation angle. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281917 | ARCHITECTURE FOR EXPORTING DIGITAL IMAGES - A method and apparatus for allowing applications to access edited image data from an image editing application are disclosed herein. When the user desires to export edited images, the user causes the image editing application to display a plug-in user interface (UI). The plug-in UI may allow the user to enter exporting parameters, although this is not required. After the user selects an “export” button in the plug-in UI, the image editing application confirms with the plug-in on an image-by-image basis which of the images should be exported. The image editing application then generates an export version of the image. If necessary, the image editing application applies image adjustments to the master image to generate the export version. The image editing application then makes the export version available to the plug-in. | 11-08-2012 |
20120288192 | COLOR HIGHLIGHT RECONSTRUCTION - Methods and apparatus may be applied to reconstruct pixel values in saturated regions of an image. Saturated regions are identified and hues for pixels in the saturated regions are estimated based on hues in boundaries of the saturated regions. Gradients for pixel values in saturated color channels within the saturated region may be estimated based on known gradients for non-saturated color channels. Reconstructed pixel values may be derived from the estimated gradients. The methods and apparatus may be applied in conjunction with dynamic range expansion. | 11-15-2012 |
20120288193 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD FOR IMAGE RESTORATION, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PICKUP APPARATUS - The image processing method includes a filter preparation step of preparing an image restoration filter to be commonly used for plural optical apparatuses having mutually different optical characteristics, and a correction information preparation step of preparing correction information varying by the optical characteristic of each of the plural optical apparatuses. The method further includes a processing step of performing an image restoration process, on an input image produced by image capturing through a specific optical apparatus of the plural optical apparatuses, using the image restoration filter and the correction information for the specific optical apparatus. | 11-15-2012 |
20120288194 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Provided is an image processing device capable of performing appropriate noise reduction without causing blurring of edges and details of the image. The image processing device: specifies, on a normal distribution representing a noise model of the image, a reference range having a value of a target pixel as a median; computes, with respect to a local region that is an image region containing the target pixel, the number of pixels having a value falling within a first sub-range of the reference range and the number of pixels having a value falling within a second sub-range of the reference range, the first sub-range corresponding to larger values than the median and the second sub-range corresponding to smaller values than the median; corrects one of the first sub-range and the second sub-range so that one of the sub-ranges in which a fewer number of pixels are distributed than in the other sub-range is narrower relative to the other sub-range; determines a selection range that is composed of the one of the first sub-range and the second sub-range as corrected and the other one of the first sub-range and the second sub-range as is; and performs noise reduction on an image region subjected to noise reduction and at least containing the local region by using values falling within the selection range from among the values of the respective pixels contained in the target region. | 11-15-2012 |
20120288195 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING COLOUR FROM AN IMAGE - Embodiments of the invention relate to the determination of the colour of a colour sample from an image of the colour sample. In one embodiment a colour sample capture card is provided having printed thereon colour samples of known colour (for example, XYZ tri-stimulus values). An image of the test colour sample is then captured using domestically available equipment, such as a consumer digital camera or camera-equipped mobile telephone, the image also containing the colour sample capture card. In one embodiment the image is then transmitted to a remote colour determination service for colour sample colour determination. Regression analysis is then performed using the RGB colour samples in the image and known XYZ colours thereof to characterise the colour capture response of the image capture device, taking into account spatial brightness variations across the image. Having characterised the image capture device the XYZ colour of the unknown colour sample can be determined from the RGB colour thereof in the image. | 11-15-2012 |
20120288196 | REMOVAL OF IMAGE ARTIFACTS FROM SENSOR DUST - Removal of the effects of dust or other impurities on image data is described. In one example, a model of artifact formation from sensor dust is determined. From the model of artifact formation, contextual information in the image and a color consistency constraint may be applied on the dust to remove the dust artifacts. Artifacts may also be removed from multiple images from the same or different cameras or camera settings. | 11-15-2012 |
20120288197 | PICTURE QUALITY CONTROLLING DEVICE, PICTURE QUALITY CONTROLLING METHOD, AND PICTURE QUALITY CONTROLLING PROGRAM - A picture quality controlling device ( | 11-15-2012 |
20120294525 | METHODS FOR SUPPRESSING STRUCTURED NOISE IN A DIGITAL IMAGE - A method for suppressing structured noise in a digital image includes creating a smoothed version of the original image. Monotonic and slowly-varying image regions are detected by analyzing a residual image which is the function of the original image and its smoothed version. A local window is defined in each pixel location identified in the thresholding process as the location with structured noise and samples inside the window are randomly permuted to randomize the noise structures. A noise-filtered version of the original residual image is generated. The noise-filtered residual and the smoothed version of the original image are combined to produce a final image. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294526 | METHODS FOR REDUCING ROW AND COLUMN PATTERNS IN A DIGITAL IMAGE - A method for performing column/row pattern suppression in a digital input image includes creating a smoothed version of the input image by averaging a set of columns/rows neighboring around the column/row being corrected. A difference image is constructed by subtracting the smoothed image from the input image. New column/row intensities are computed from the difference image. An output image is constructed with suppressed column/row patterns by subtracting the new column/row intensities from the input image. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294527 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING HIGHLIGHTS AND SATURATED REGIONS IN A DIGITAL IMAGE - A method for performing highlight restoration on a digital image includes comparing the pixels in the image with a saturation level value to identify saturated pixels. A saturation map of saturated pixels is generated. Each selected saturated pixel is identified as a restorable pixel only if at least one color channel of the pixel is unsaturated. For each restorable pixel, a group of the closest unsaturated pixels above, below, to the left, and to the right of the select saturated pixel is identified. A replacement pixel value is generated for each saturated color channel of the restorable pixel, using a combination of the pixel values of the unsaturated color channels of the restorable pixel and the pixel values of the corresponding color channels of the nearby unsaturated pixels. | 11-22-2012 |
20120301023 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EDITING COLOR CHARACTERISTICS OF ELECTRONIC IMAGE - A method of editing color characteristics of an electronic image includes: a) receiving an original electronic image at a color editing subsystem; b) analyzing the original electronic image to identify original color characteristics and to identify a recommended set of color editing options, the recommended set of color editing options being less than a complete set of color editing options provided by the color editing subsystem; c) presenting the recommended set to a user via a user interface device; d) receiving a color editing instruction from the user interface device in response to the user selecting a corresponding color editing option from the recommended set; and e) adjusting the original color characteristics to form an adjusted electronic image having adjusted color characteristics based at least in part on the color editing instruction. An apparatus for editing color characteristics of an electronic image is also provided. | 11-29-2012 |
20120301024 | DUAL-PHASE RED EYE CORRECTION - A dual-phase approach to red eye correction may prevent overly aggressive or overly conservative red eye reduction. The dual-phase approach may include detecting an eye portion in a digital image. Once the eye portion is detected, the dual-phase approach may include the performance of a strong red eye correction for the eye portion when the eye portion includes a strong red eye. Otherwise, the dual-phase approach may include the performance of a weak red eye correction for the eye portion when the eye portion includes a weak red eye. The weak red eye may be distinguished from the strong red eye based a redness threshold that shows the weak red eye as having less redness hue than the strong red eye. | 11-29-2012 |
20120301025 | METHOD FOR GENERATING ALL-IN-FOCUS IMAGE - A method for generating an all-in-focus image is provided. In the method, a plurality of frames including one source frame and several reference frames captured at different focus lengths are obtained. After performing a motion compensation procedure on the frames, for each pixel position belonging to an edge, a characteristic similarity between the source frame and each reference frame is calculated respectively to accordingly select a plurality of qualified reference frames among the reference frames. The method further includes determining a first type color space component of the pixel position within an all-in-focus image by an edge sharpness corresponding to the pixel position within each of the source frame and the qualified reference frames, and determining a second type color space component of the pixel position within the all-in-focus image by an color brightness corresponding to the pixel position within each of the source frame and the qualified reference frames. | 11-29-2012 |
20120301026 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes the following elements. A receiving device receives an image. An estimating device estimates, for each of pixels within the image received by the receiving device, on the basis of the received image, an amount of fog, which is a difference between a luminance value of the pixel and an original luminance value of the pixel. A measuring device measures, for each of the pixels within the received image, a chroma value of the pixel. A determining device determines a correction target value for luminance values of pixels of a background portion within the received image. A correcting device corrects the chroma value of the pixel measured by the measuring device on the basis of the amount of fog estimated by the estimating device, the correction target value determined by the determining device, and a distance from the chroma value to an achromatic color. | 11-29-2012 |
20120301027 | IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus and a method thereof are provided. A plurality of target blur radii are obtained by calculating blur radiuses corresponding to the out of focus transform function between a deblurred datum color channel image and the other color channel images. A plurality of deblurred color channel images are obtained by respectively performing deblurring operations on the original channel images according to the target blur radii that are corresponding to the original channel images. The deblurred datum color channel image and the deblurred color channel images are combined to obtain a blur calibrated image. Accordingly, the image out of focus problem induced by dispersion can be solved. | 11-29-2012 |
20120308130 | Method and Apparatus for Image Signal Processing - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises generating at least one modified image representation of a subject image representation using at least one color shading adjustment, calculating at least one frequency of color ratio values for each of the at least one modified image representation, and determining one of said at least one modified image representation and the subject image based at least in part on the at least one frequency. | 12-06-2012 |
20120308131 | Image Content-Based Color Balancing - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for applying color balancing to at least a portion of a digital image based on the digital image content. The color balancing process preferably operates in a gamma modified color space, transformed into an opponent color space with separate luminance and chromatic channels. The method also includes identifying a difference of at least one of the chromatic channels between an average color, determined for a region of interest in the digital image, and an ideal reference color for the feature the user desires to correct, as a basis for the color balancing process. | 12-06-2012 |
20120308132 | Automatic Red-Eye Repair Using Multiple Recognition Channels - This disclosure pertains to apparatuses, methods, and computer readable media for automatic red-eye repair using multiple recognition channels. While it is possible to manually specify all of the eyes in an image to be repaired, it is desirable for repair to happen automatically. Since red-eye repair algorithms are dependent upon knowing the image position and size of each artifact to be repaired, in an automatic repair mode, the algorithm must be directed as to where the repair should be applied. Face detection is one way to determine eye positions and the interocular distance (IOD) with some degree of certainty. In some embodiments, red, golden, and white recognition channels may be used to locate and determine the type of the artifacts. Once an artifact has been characterized by, e.g., type, size, and location, the techniques disclosed herein may then repair the artifact, replacing it with a photographically reasonable result. | 12-06-2012 |
20120308133 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING CHROMA OF INPUT IMAGE - A method and apparatus for enhancing chroma of an input image by performing chroma conversion on a chroma value of a chroma component of the input image and compensating for a variation in a brightness value of the input image, based on the chroma value on which the chroma conversion is performed. | 12-06-2012 |
20120308134 | REDUCING CHROMATIC ABERRATION - At least one implementation reduces chromatic aberration by aligning pixel in a color channel according to displacement from corresponding pixels in another color channel. In one particular implementation, a feature is calculated for a first block of pixels in a first color channel of an image. The feature is calculated for a second block of pixels in a second color channel of the image. Displacement is estimated between the first color channel and the second color channel by comparing the feature for the first block and the feature for the second block. At least a portion of the first color channel is aligned with at least a portion of the second color channel based on the estimated displacement. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314945 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMAGE PROCESSING - Apparatus and method for correcting a tone of a panoramic image. An image processing apparatus may acquire, from an overlapping region of a left image and a right image, ghost information based on an optimal threshold and a cost map in which a similarity between the left image and the right image is reflected, may generate a tone correction map based on a global tone correction function generated using the ghost information in the overlapping region, and based on a local tone correction level generated using local information of an optimal seam, and may correct the left image and the right image using a final tone correction map generated by applying, to the tone correction map, a weighting based on the left image and a weighting based on the right image. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314946 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is an image processing apparatus including an infinite impulse response (IIR) mean value calculation section for calculating a mean value of signal values of reference pixels around a correction target pixel according to an IIR filter application process, an IIR variance value calculation section for calculating a variance value of the signal values of the reference pixels around the correction target pixel according to the IIR filter application process, an edge-preserving smoothing processing section for receiving the mean and variance values of the reference pixels and executing an edge-preserving smoothing process to which the mean and variance values are applied, and an IIR filter coefficient calculation section for updating an IIR filter coefficient to be applied to the IIR mean value calculation section and the IIR variance value calculation section according to a signal value of a pixel constituting an image. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314947 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus is configured to perform processing for reducing color fringing in a color image. The image processing apparatus includes an estimator configured to estimate, for each area, a correction amount used to reduce the color fringing, a smoother configured to smooth a plurality of correction amounts for a plurality of areas estimated by the estimator, and a reducer configured to reduce the color fringing utilizing the correction amounts smoothed by the smoother. | 12-13-2012 |
20120321184 | VIDEO ACQUISITION WITH PROCESSING BASED ON ANCILLARY DATA - Systems and techniques for processing sequences of video images involve receiving, on a computer, data corresponding to a sequence of video images detected by an image sensor. The received data is processed using a graphics processor to adjust one or more visual characteristics of the video images corresponding to the received data. The received data can include video data defining pixel values and ancillary data relating to settings on the image sensor. The video data can be processed in accordance with ancillary data to adjust the visual characteristics, which can include filtering the images, blending images, and/or other processing operations. | 12-20-2012 |
20120321185 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND PROGRAM - The disclosed image processing method uses a plurality of images as input images, and on the basis of a degree of similarity to an input image group and an evaluation of the quantity of edges of an overall image, a new image is generated; and is an image processing method for estimating a specified color characteristic degree indicating a degree of similarity between a pixel color of a generated image predicted from the input image group and a specified color that has been specified beforehand, and for, on the basis of the specified color characteristic degree, modifying a weight corresponding to the edge quantity of each pixel within the generated image, and generating an image wherein the manner of reproduction of edges of areas of the specified color differs from other regions. | 12-20-2012 |
20120328193 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING IMAGE EDGE - Disclosed is a method for enhancing an image edge. An edge filter is applied to a photographed image, and the determination is performed with respect to whether pixels having edge possibility are noise or form an edge. The determination for the noise and the edge is performed once more with respect to pixels having vagueness for the noise and the edge by using a 3×3 mask. An edge enhancement process is performed through a simple algorithm. | 12-27-2012 |
20130004070 | Skin Color Detection And Adjustment In An Image - A preferred skin tone region is determined within a luminance-chrominance color space for each of a plurality of luminance values. Additional preferred skin tone regions are determined by interpolation in view of the initially determined preferred skin tone regions. An ellipsoid skin-color model is generated in the luminance-chrominance color space based on the preferred skin tone regions. The ellipsoid skin-color is used to detect a skin color pixel in an image and adjust one or more color values for the skin color pixel. | 01-03-2013 |
20130004071 | IMAGE SIGNAL PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE OPTIMIZED FOR LOW-POWER, PROCESSING FLEXIBILITY, AND USER EXPERIENCE - Methods and apparatus relating to an image signal processor architecture that may be optimized for low-power consumption, processing flexibility, and/or user experience are described. In an embodiment, an image signal processor may be partitioned into a plurality of partitions. Each partition may be capable of entering a lower power consumption state. Also, processing by each partition may be done in various modes to optimize for low-power consumption, processing flexibility, and/or user experience. Other embodiments are also disclosed and claimed. | 01-03-2013 |
20130011060 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REMOVING RED-EYE IN A TWO-DIMENSIONAL (2D) IMAGE - An apparatus and method for removing red-eye in a 2D image, which can remove red-eye more naturally and apply a gain for a real-time correction on input pixels by differently performing a correction degree according to positions of pixels included in red-eye. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016904 | WHITE ADJUSTING DEVICE, WHITE ADJUSTING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUMAANM OKUTSU; MasaruAACI KanagawaAACO JPAAGP OKUTSU; Masaru Kanagawa JPAANM SAKAMOTO; MasaomiAACI KanagawaAACO JPAAGP SAKAMOTO; Masaomi Kanagawa JPAANM SASAKI; MakotoAACI KanagawaAACO JPAAGP SASAKI; Makoto Kanagawa JPAANM HAMA; DaigoAACI KanagawaAACO JPAAGP HAMA; Daigo Kanagawa JP - Provided is a white adjusting device including an estimation unit that estimates a color temperature from an image to be processed, an acquisition unit that acquires a representative color value from a region close to white which is a region in which a color in a color range predetermined from a preset white color value of the image exists, a calculation unit that calculates a correction representative color value from a color value corresponding to the color temperature estimated in the estimation unit and the representative color value acquired in the acquisition unit, and a conversion unit that converts a color of the image so that the correction representative color value is set to the white color value. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016905 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING COLOR DISTORTIONAANM PARK; Byung-kwanAACI SeoulAACO KRAAGP PARK; Byung-kwan Seoul KRAANM Choe; Won-heeAACI SeoulAACO KRAAGP Choe; Won-hee Seoul KRAANM Lee; Seong-deokAACI Seongnam-siAACO KRAAGP Lee; Seong-deok Seongnam-si KR - A method and apparatus for correcting color distortion are provided. The method includes detecting a color image of an object. The method further includes correcting color distortion of the detected color image to generate a corrected color image. The method further includes synthesizing color information of the corrected color image and detail information of the detected color image to generate a synthesized color image. | 01-17-2013 |
20130022266 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing method adapted to calculate image data of a pixel array is provided. The pixel array includes a plurality of pixels, and each of the pixels has predetermined elementary color data. The image processing method includes following steps. First, a target pixel of the pixel array is selected. Next, a plurality of first elementary color differences of a plurality of first pixels adjacent to the target pixel are calculated. A part of the first pixels are arranged along a first direction, and another part of the first pixels are arranged along a second direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction. Then, first recovered elementary color data of the target pixel is calculated according to the elementary color differences of the first pixels and the predetermined elementary color data of the target pixel. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028514 | NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM CONTAINING HTML FILE, FILE CONVERSION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM CONTAINING FILE CONVERSION PROGRAM - An HTML file for making a browser adapted to a canvas element in HTML5 perform a process of color conversion of a specified image with specified characteristics and display the converted image at high speed. In the process of carrying out color conversion of the specified image with specified characteristics and displaying the converted image, an algorithm is employed such that data manipulation on a pixel-by-pixel basis is not instructed from the HTML file to the browser, but instead a plurality of instructions are given to overwrite an entire area of a bitmap image as original image data, and data derived therefrom are expanded onto a canvas uniformly with color of an appropriate brightness value and transparency. | 01-31-2013 |
20130039574 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SEGMENTING WATER, LAND AND COASTLINE FROM REMOTE IMAGERY - System and method for detecting a smooth/rough boundary from an aerial image to solve the problem of isolating image features without access to the subject of the image. The system and method convert the image to gray scale, edge pad the converted image, calculate an image entropy based on a distribution of local entropy across the padded, converted image, threshold the image entropy to binarize the padded, converted image, clean noise, and close defects and voids by mathematical morphologically opening and closing the binarized image, and detect the smooth/rough boundary of the opened/closed binarized image as a gradient across the pixels of the opened/closed binarized image resulting in a single pixel width edge. The single pixel width edge can be, for example, provided to numerical prediction models and computer games. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039575 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF IMAGE PROCESSING PERCEPTUAL VISIBILITY OF IMAGERY - An image processing system and method corrects the perceptual quality of an image by adjusting the image colors. “Color” in this sense is to be understood as encompassing three-dimensional parameterizations of color, incorporating both intensity and hue. These measurements are made using creative computations developed and adapted from the RETINEX™ theory (Land, 1977), where the RETINEX implementation adjusts any pixel in any direction in color space and further to automatically determine the best direction for it to be adjusted to increase the perceptual visibility of the algorithm with a minimal amount of change to the original image values. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044949 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device includes a pattern kind determining unit that determines a hatch pattern representing a hatch shape corresponding to a color of a color image by a monochromatic concentration, a pattern concentration determining unit that determines a background concentration that is applied to a hatch-shaped background area, and a monochromatic image data generating unit that generates monochromatic image data in which the hatch pattern having the background concentration is applied to the background area. The pattern concentration determining unit changes the background concentration of the hatch pattern according to the color of the color image. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044950 | METHOD TO RESTORE EDGES IN RASTERIZED IMAGES - Restoration of edges in rasterized, continuous tone images includes selection of a pair of neighbouring pixels that exchange a restoration value to make a steeper transition from a low value on one side of a boundary between the two pixels to a high value at the other side thereof. Although any pair of neighbouring pixels is selected, this operation is only performed when four pixels in a direction perpendicular to the boundary, of which the selected pair form the two center pixels, have a monotonely increasing value. The restoration value is based on a difference value of nearest neighbouring pixels on the same side of the boundary. This avoids overshooting around edges in an image. The method is advantageous when resealing an image to a higher resolution which occurs when a low resolution image is embedded in a page that is to be printed with a high addressability printer system. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051665 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is an image processing apparatus including an image signal correction section that performs an image correction process. The image signal correction section performs a direction determination process of detecting a direction having a minimum pixel value gradient as a pixel value gradient direction in a pixel area including a target pixel; a defect detection process of calculating a Laplacian based on a pixel value of a reference pixel in a minimum gradient direction detected in the direction determination process with respect to the target pixel, and determining presence or absence of a defect of the target pixel; and a defect correction process of performing calculation of a corrected pixel value, which is obtained by applying the pixel value of the reference pixel in the direction detected in the direction determination process, with respect to a target pixel from which a defect has been detected in the defect detection process. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051666 | Method and System for Color-Grading Multi-View Content - Methods and apparatus for color grading stereoscopic and autostereoscopic (multi-view) view video content are provided. Video content for one view is adjusted so that a histogram of the adjusted video data is more similar to a target histogram than the original, unadjusted video content for the one view. The adjusted video content is automatically color graded based on a color grading of video content for another view. The target histogram may be calculated for the video content for the other view. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058572 | IMAGE RESOLUTION ENHANCING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISPLAY PANEL - An image resolution enhancing device and method for a display panel are provided. The image resolution enhancing method includes the following steps. Enlarge the image resolution of a first image to obtain a second image. Shrink the image resolution of the second image to obtain a third image. Implement a subtraction operation on the first image and the third image, so as to obtain a difference image. Enlarge the image resolution of the difference image to obtain an enhancing image. Implement an addition operation on the enhancing image and the second image, so as to obtain a fourth image with high image resolution. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058573 | SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS AND STILL IMAGE GENERATION METHOD - A signal processing apparatus includes a first image memory that stores input moving images, a noise reduction section that outputs noise-free images, an image switching section that selects and outputs one image of the input moving image and the output of the first image memory, and a freeze control section that reads, images corresponding to two or more screens including the screen with the smallest amount of blur of each screen of the input moving image based on a separated luminance signal and necessary to remove noise from the first image memory, causes the image switching section to output the images, and causes noise-free images using the images corresponding to the two or more screens including the screen with the smallest amount of blur to be consecutively outputted. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064448 | IMAGE CHROMA NOISE REDUCTION - An embodiment of a method for reducing chroma noise in digital image data and of a corresponding image processor. Chrominance components are subjected to low-pass filtering. The strength of the low-pass filtering is modulated in accordance with the dynamic range of the luminance signal and the dynamic range of each of the two chrominance signals in order to avoid color bleeding at image-object edges. Moreover, the low-pass filtering is selectively applied to pixels with similar luminance and chrominance values only. A combination of down-sampling and up-sampling units is employed so that comparatively small filter kernels may be used for removing chroma noise with low spatial frequency. | 03-14-2013 |
20130071023 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS, COLOR PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE NON-TRANSITORY TANGIBLE MEDIUM - A color processing apparatus for decomposing a color signal into an output color signal including a basic-color component, a black component, and an extra-color component is provided. The color processing apparatus includes an extra-color-component upper-limit-value determination unit that determines an extra-color-component upper limit value, a black-component upper-limit-value determination unit that determines a black-component upper limit value, a black-component-value determination unit that determines a value of the black component corresponding to the color signal, an extra-color-component-value determination unit that determines a value of the extra-color component corresponding to the color signal, and a basic-color-component-value determination unit that determines a value of the basic-color component corresponding to the color signal on the basis of the value of the black component and the value of the extra-color component. | 03-21-2013 |
20130071024 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing method and image processing apparatus for removing noise from an image. The image processing method includes: dividing an input image into a high frequency component and a low frequency component; removing noise from the high frequency component; and combining the low frequency component and the high frequency component from which noise is removed to form an output image. Accordingly, an image in which edge components are well preserved and a degree of color noise is reduced may be generated not only in a general environment but also in a low light level and highly sensitive environment having strong noise. | 03-21-2013 |
20130071025 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing method and an image processing apparatus for removing noise from an image are disclosed. A provided image processing method includes: dividing an input image into a luminance signal and a chrominance signal; removing noise from the luminance signal; restoring luminance signal present in the noise removed from the luminance signal; removing noise from the chrominance signal; and combining the luminance signal and the chrominance signal from which the noises are removed. Accordingly, an image of which an edge component is well preserved and a degree of color noise is low is generated not only in a general environment but also in a low light level and high sensitivity environment having a large amount of noise. | 03-21-2013 |
20130071026 | IMAGE PROCESSING CIRCUITRY - A method for performing a modification of the color saturation of at least one pixel of an image involving: determining, based on pixel values of a first pixel, at least one of a color saturation value, luminance value and hue value corresponding to said first pixel; determining, based on said at least one value, a saturation factor; and modifying the color saturation level of said first pixel based on said saturation factor. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077862 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides an apparatus and a method to perform an interpolation process of a color mosaic image generated through an imaging process by a single-plate color imaging element. The color mosaic image generated through the imaging process by the single-plate color imaging element is input, estimation is performed for a pixel value low frequency component and a noise high frequency component corresponding to a pixel interpolation position, and calculation for a pixel value at the pixel interpolation position is performed by applying an addition result thereof. An edge-adaptive interpolation processing unit calculates a pixel value at the pixel interpolation position by using a pixel value of a reference pixel located in an edge direction. A blend processing unit calculates a final interpolation pixel value by blending the edge-adaptive interpolation pixel value and the addition result of the pixel value low frequency component and the noise high frequency component corresponding to the pixel interpolation position in accordance with flatness at the pixel interpolation position. | 03-28-2013 |
20130084004 | IMAGE PROCESSING OF DATA FROM SCANNED DISPLAY - A method for image processing a two-dimensional (2D) code, including: obtaining an image by scanning a screen displaying the 2D code using a plurality of pixels, where the image includes multiple hard edges corresponding multiple spaces on the screen between the multiple pixels; identifying a pixel pitch of the screen; reducing the multiple hard edges by applying a filter based on the pixel pitch to the image; and generating, after reducing the multiple hard edges, a binary image including the 2D code by applying a threshold function to the image. | 04-04-2013 |
20130089256 | COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND COLOR IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An object area detection means detects an object area which is an area to be subjected to image processing from an input image. A reflection component reconstruction means calculates color information of the object area and a perfect diffusion component, which is a low-frequency component of the object area, and reconstructs a surface reflection component based on the color information and the low-frequency component. An albedo calculation means calculates an albedo, which is color information obtained by removing shading information, which is information that represents luminance of the perfect diffusion component, from the perfect diffusion component. An albedo correction processing means reconstructs a surface reflectance of the object area based on the albedo and the color information in the object area, and then calculates the corrected albedo, which is color information obtained by correcting the albedo based on the surface reflectance. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094758 | Color Saturation-Modulated Blending of Exposure-Bracketed Images - Systems and methods are presented for generating a new digital output image by blending a plurality of digital input images capturing the same scene at different levels of exposure. Each new pixel for the new digital output image is derived from a group of corresponding aligned pixels from the digital input images. For each group of corresponding pixels from the digital input images, an average color value in a first color space is derived by taking a separate average across each color channel of the first color space. The resulting average color value in the first color space is modified in order to raise its corresponding color saturation value in a second color space. The new pixel's color value in the first color space is set to the modified average color value. | 04-18-2013 |
20130101212 | Automatic Sharpening of Images - Various embodiments describe image sharpening techniques that automatically estimate a sharpening amount for an unsharp mask filter for image enhancement based upon a statistical correlation between detail coefficients at a first resolution and at a second resolution. In various embodiments, statistical deviation of absolute values of detail coefficients for both the image at full resolution and the image downsampled by a pre-determined factor, e.g. a factor of two (half resolution), are retrieved. In various embodiments, the statistical deviation is retrieved for a histogram of the image at the first resolution and a histogram of the image at the second resolution. The linear model between the statistical deviation of detail coefficients at the first resolution and the second resolution is used to calculate the sharpening amount and the unsharp mask filter is applied to the image to produce a sharpened image. | 04-25-2013 |
20130101213 | METHOD FOR MATCHING COLORS BETWEEN TWO SYSTEMS - A method for matching colors including comparing the appearance of a first white color associated with a first color imaging system and a second white color associated with a second color imaging system, wherein the tristimulus values of the first and second white color are similar; determining a fixed correction to the tristimulus values of the second white color to achieve a visual match to the first white color; measuring a first set of spectral values for a first color associated with the first color imaging system; determining a first set of tristimulus values from the first set of spectral values; measuring a second set of spectral values for a second color associated with the second color imaging system; determining a second set of tristimulus values from the second set of spectral values; applying a correction to the tristimulus values of the second color; determining a difference between the tristimulus value of the first color and the corrected tristimulus value of the second color; and adjusting the second color to reduce the difference. | 04-25-2013 |
20130108156 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM | 05-02-2013 |
20130114894 | Blending of Exposure-Bracketed Images Using Weight Distribution Functions - Systems and methods are presented for generating a new digital output image by blending a plurality of digital input images capturing the same scene at different levels of exposure. Each new pixel for the new digital output image is derived from a group of corresponding aligned pixels from the digital input images. In order to determine a weight for each pixel in each group of mutually-aligned source-image pixels, a weight distribution function is applied to values of an image characteristic for the pixels in the group of corresponding aligned pixels, and a net weight is subsequently assigned to each of the pixels in the group. Pixel values of pixels in each group of mutually-aligned source-image pixels are modified based on the net weights assigned to the pixels in order to obtain a new pixel value for a corresponding new pixel in the new digital output image. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114895 | Joint Color Channel Image Noise Filtering and Edge Enhancement in the Bayer Domain - A method for image noise filtering is provided that includes receiving a Bayer domain image with four color channels, generating a hierarchical representation of the four color channels comprising a set of coefficient arrays at each level of the hierarchical representation, modifying the coefficient arrays of the color channels jointly to remove noise, and generating a noise filtered and edge enhanced Bayer domain image based on the jointly modified coefficient arrays. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114896 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes: a color discrimination section configured to discriminate a color of each pixel of an input image; a boundary region setting section configured to set a boundary region of a predetermined color based on a result of the color discrimination in the color discrimination section; and a noise removing section configured to control a noise removing characteristic based on a result of the boundary region setting in the boundary region setting section to remove noise from the input image. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121575 | IMAGE ANALYSIS APPARATUS USING MAIN COLOR AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method of controlling an image analysis apparatus is provided. The method includes receiving a query image; determining at least one main color distributed in the query image and a specific main color from among the at least one main color by using color information contained in the query image; dividing the query image into at least one block having a predetermined number of pixels; and determining whether each of the at least one block includes more than a predetermined percentage of a main color for comparison among the at least main color, and creating a binary spatial distribution map by digitizing the at least one block. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121576 | AUTOMATIC TONE MAPPING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - A tone-mapping method for adjusting a contrast of an image includes generating a luminance histogram of the image according to a luminance and a sharpness of the image; performing histogram equalization on the luminance histogram, to generate a luminance mapping function corresponding to the image; performing a weighted operation on the luminance mapping function and a linear function, to generate a weighted luminance mapping function corresponding to the image; generating a tone-mapping look-up table corresponding to the image according to the weighted luminance mapping function; and adjusting the luminance of the image according to the tone-mapping look-up table, so as to adjust the contrast of the image. | 05-16-2013 |
20130129213 | Non-Rigid Dense Correspondence - Non-rigid dense correspondence (NRDC) for image enhancement may be performed. In one embodiment, a correspondence may be computed for each one of a plurality of regions of a source image to one of a plurality of regions of a reference image. Computing the correspondences may include searching within a search range for each of a plurality of image characteristics. One or more of the correspondences may be aggregated into matched regions. A global color transform and/or deblurring may be applied to the source image. In one embodiment, the global color transform and/or deblurring may be based on the matched regions. At least one of the search ranges may optionally be adjusted. In some embodiments, computing, aggregating, applying and/or deblurring, and adjusting may be iteratively performed. | 05-23-2013 |
20130129214 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - The present invention is an image processing device which has tone mapping curve generation means for local tone correction, which generates a tone mapping curve for local tone correction using the luminance of peripheral areas for each pixel of interest within an input image; prediction means which predicts the overall luminance and/or the contrast of the image after the local tone correction on the basis of the average luminance of partial areas into which the input image has been partitioned; tone mapping curve generation means for global tone correction, which generates a tone mapping curve for global tone correction on the basis of the prediction; and correction means which integrates the tone mapping curve for local tone correction and the tone mapping curve for global tone correction so as to simultaneously execute the local tone correction and the global tone correction. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136355 | Automatic Estimation and Correction of Vignetting - Various embodiments pertain to image correction techniques that automatically estimate and correct vignetting based upon a single image. In various embodiments, a local gradient is estimated and the radial component of the gradient is ascertained. Radial components of gradients are correlated with a radius of the pixel from the optical center of the image, and can be utilized to estimate an attenuation due to vignetting. In some embodiments, a tangential component of a difference of gradients is also ascertained and correlated with the radius for use in estimating the attenuation. Attenuation due to vignetting can be calculated through the application of a polynomial regression to a plot of the radial components versus radius. In various embodiments, the image can be corrected by inverting the attenuation in the image. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136356 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COLOR PROFILES DURING COLOR DEVICE CALIBRATION - A method and system for managing the application of a color profile to a color device in connection with a calibration event associated with the color device. A color management module is configured to detect a request to inhibit application of color profile received from a calibration module. The color management module facilitates the removal of a current profile applied to the color device. The color management module monitors a connection used to communication with the calibration module to identify a termination event associated with the calibration module and/or calibration event. In response to identifying the termination event, the color management module facilitates the application of a color profile to the color device. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142429 | COLOR PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A color processing apparatus includes the following elements. A point group generator generates a point group existing in a color gamut of an output apparatus. A design point group extracting unit extracts, from the point group, a design point group that satisfies predetermined design conditions. A corresponding point group setting unit sets, on the basis of the design point group, a corresponding point group indicating a boundary of a color gamut represented by the design point group, such that points of the corresponding point group are associated with individual points of a boundary point group existing on a boundary of the color gamut of the output apparatus. A design color gamut boundary generator generates a boundary of a design color gamut that satisfies the predetermined design conditions, by using a set of the boundary point group and the corresponding point group. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148890 | DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A digital image processing apparatus and method are provided. The digital image processing apparatus includes: a Y component processing unit receiving a Y component and performing edge enhancement processing and first noise reduction processing on the Y component by using a memory allocated to the Y component; and a CbCr processing unit receiving a Cb component and a Cr component, and performing false color suppression processing and second noise reduction processing on the Cb component and the Cr component by using a memory allocated to the Cb component and the Cr component, where the Y component, the Cb component and the Cr component are variables of the YCbCr color space. | 06-13-2013 |
20130156312 | Image Processing Device and Image Processing Method - An image processing device performs image processing on image data obtained by receiving light emitted from a light source and then reflected from an object to be read with a light receiving element. The image processing device includes a determination unit configured to determine whether or not a color of each pixel in the image data belongs to a predetermined correction target color range and a correction unit configured to perform correction to reduce the density of a pixel of the color belonging to the correction target color range. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163866 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING WHITE BALANCING OF AN IMAGE - An apparatus, and an associated method, facilitates selection of white balancing to adjust the color cast of a captured image. A quantum dot element is positioned to receive incident light associated with a scene forming an image that is to be captured. Incident light upon the quantum dot element causes photonic emissions that are detected and converted into electrical form. The electrical representations of the photonic images are used to measure or determine a color ratio. The value of the color ratio is utilized to select white balancing of a captured image, captured either prior to, concurrent with, or subsequent to, the color-ratio determination. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163867 | SYSTEMS, PROCESSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR CREATING GEO-LOCATION-BASED VISUAL DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS ORIGINATING FROM GEO-LOCATION-BASED IMAGERY - Systems, processes, and computer program products for creating visual designs and arrangements that originate from an image or images are provided. In particular, the present subject matter relates to systems, processes, and computer program products for taking captured images of an intended operating environment and creating visual designs that create visual confusion that can be utilized to disguise a recognizable form of a person or an object by breaking up its outline using portions, magnifications and distortions of a single captured image, portions, magnifications and distortions of multiple captured images, and/or disruptive patterns that can projected on an image screen or can be printed on a material. | 06-27-2013 |
20130177242 | SUPER-RESOLUTION IMAGE USING SELECTED EDGE PIXELS - A method of providing a super-resolution image is disclosed. The method uses a processor to perform the following steps of acquiring a captured low-resolution image of a scene and resizing the low-resolution image to provide a high-resolution image. The method further includes computing local edge parameters including local edge orientations and local edge centers of gravity from the high-resolution image, selecting edge pixels in the high-resolution image responsive to the local edge parameters, and modifying the high-resolution image in response to the selected edge pixels to provide a super-resolution image. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182950 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING A DIGITIZED DOCUMENT - A method for enhancing a digitized image of a document containing text or graphics. The digitized image is decomposed into a low-frequency pedestal image and a high-frequency residual image. A first gain factor image is determined by applying a first tonescale function to the residual image, and a second gain factor image is determined by applying a second tonescale function to the residual image pixel values, wherein parameters defining the tonescale functions are determined by analyzing the pedestal and residual images. An enhanced document image is formed by combining a scaled pedestal image determined by multiplying the pedestal image by the first gain factor image, and a scaled residual image determined by multiplying the residual image by the second gain factor image. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182951 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MOBILE IMAGE CAPTURE AND PROCESSING - In various embodiments, methods, systems, and computer program products for processing digital images captured by a mobile device are disclosed. Myriad features enable and/or facilitate processing of such digital images using a mobile device that would otherwise be technically impossible or impractical, and furthermore address unique challenges presented by images captured using a camera rather than a traditional flat-bed scanner, paper-feed scanner or multifunction peripheral. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182952 | METHOD OF CLASSIFYING A CHROMA DOWNSAMPLING ERROR - There is provided an apparatus and a method of evaluating an effect of chroma downsampling in a compression process of an input image. According to examples of the presently disclosed subject matter the method can include: computing an error for a target chroma downsampling (“CDS”) block based on characteristics of DCT coefficients in the U and/or V planes of a respective CDS candidates group in the input image, and further based on a diversity of the DCT coefficients in the U and/or V planes of the respective CDS candidates group in the input image; and computing an estimated perceptual effect of CDS over the input image based on a plurality of target CDS blocks error values. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188868 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device included in the invention comprises: a first storage unit configured to store predetermined values as values at lattice points on a plurality of unit cubes to which a color space made up of the plurality of color components is segmentalized; a calculating unit configured to calculate a second lattice-point value that is a difference between a first lattice-point value stored in the first storage unit and a color component value mapped to color coordinates of the first lattice point for each of the lattice points; a second storage unit configured to store the calculated second lattice-point values on a lattice-point-by-lattice-point basis; and an interpolation calculating unit configured to calculate a second image data by reading out the second lattice-point values designated by a first image data from the second storage unit and performing interpolation calculation using the read-out second lattice-point values. | 07-25-2013 |
20130195353 | Digital Image Color Correction - Systems, methods, and computer readable media for performing color correction operations to address memory color artifacts in a manner suited for real-time operations. In general, techniques are disclosed for correcting memory color rendering artifacts in an image without performing color space conversions. In one implementations, hue-saturation-value (HSV) image correction values may be expressed solely in terms of an image's base red-green-blue (RGB) color space values. Once expressed in this manner, color correction may be applied to the image directly—without the need to convert the image's color space into and out of a working color space (e.g., an HSV color space). As no color space conversions are necessary, the disclosed techniques are well-suited to real-time operations. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195354 | Saturation Varying Color Space - A first color component of a pixel or scene entity is modified using a color correction curve defined at least partly by a second color component of this pixel or entity. Each pixel or entity has its own separate color correction curve, independent of the color correction curves of other pixels or entities. The saturation value of a pixel or scene entity may be modified based on its luminance value. The luminance value determines a saturation gamma function curve, mapping the original saturation value of a pixel or entity to a new saturation value. The unilluminated color of a pixel or of an illuminated entity in a scene being rendered may also be taken into account. This output color may be stored in the appropriate pixel of an image or combined with colors from other portions of the scene being rendered. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195355 | Image Processing Apparatus, Recording Medium Storing Image Processing Program, And Method Of Image Processing - An image processing apparatus including a dispersion calculation portion, an ε deriving portion, and a filtering portion, and eliminates mosquito noise from a digitally compressed image having a plurality of color components. The dispersion calculation portion is configured to calculate, for each of the color components of each pixel contained in the digitally compressed image, a dispersion of pixel values of a plurality of pixels contained in a first region in which that pixel serves as a representative pixel. The ε deriving portion is configured to derive, for each pixel contained in the digitally compressed image, a greatest value of the plurality of dispersions that respectively correspond to the plurality of color components of that pixel, or a corrected value of the greatest value, as an ε value of an ε filter for that pixel. The filtering portion is configured to apply the ε filter to the digitally compressed image. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195356 | Blemish Removal - A method of removing blemishes from an image. The method receives a selection of an area of an image, divides the area into at least two interior sub-areas, and replaces the colors of each sub-area independently from each other sub-area. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195357 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - Included are determining a position of a pixel serving as an extraction subject by using first image data photographed under a first light source; determining an extraction range corresponding to the determined position, by using a color value of the pixel at the determined position and a color value of a pixel at a peripheral position around the determined position in the first image data; calculating a first representative color value from the first image data and a second representative color value from second image data photographed under a second light source, on the basis of the position of the pixel serving as the extraction subject and the extraction range; and generating a color correction condition for converting a color value depending on the first light source into a color value depending on the second light source. | 08-01-2013 |
20130202203 | COLOR SELECTION TOOL FOR SELECTING A CUSTOM COLOR COMPONENT - A non-transitory machine readable medium that has a computer program for execution by at least one processing unit is described. The computer program receives a selection of a location on an image that includes several pixels. Each pixel has several color values. The computer program identifies a set of color values of a pixel that corresponds to the selected location on the image. Based on the identified set of color values, the computer program defines a custom color component that is defined by a fractional contribution from each of the plurality of primary color components of the color space. The computer program generates a response curve along the custom color component. The response curve corresponds a set of input color values of the custom color component to a set of output color values of the custom color component. | 08-08-2013 |
20130202204 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Disclosed is an image processing apparatus for converting an original image. Processing of blurring an input original image is performed to generate a blurred image. A difference image that is the difference between the original image and an adjusted image obtained by adjusting the density of the blurred image is generated. The difference image and the original image are composited based on the density of the difference image and the density of the original image. This allows to easily obtain a painting-like effect even in, for example, a low-contrast portion of an image. | 08-08-2013 |
20130223733 | PIXEL NORMALIZATION - Methods and apparatuses for performing lossless normalization of input pixel component values. The apparatus includes a normalization unit for converting pixel values from a range of 0 to (2 | 08-29-2013 |
20130223734 | Upscaling Natural Images - A natural input image is upscaled, first by interpolation. Second, edges in the interpolated image are sharpened by a lion-parametric patch transform. The result is decomposed into an edge layer and a detail layer. Only pixels in the detail layer enhanced, and the enhanced detail layer is merged with the edge layer to produce a high resolution version of the input image. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223735 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ELIMINATING CHROMATIC ABERRATION - A method and an apparatus for eliminating chromatic aberration are provided. The method includes: calculating out a position weight of a pixel according to the position of the pixel in an image, calculating out an edge response of the pixel and converting a chrominance of the image pixel into a hue; using the edge response of the pixel to calculate out a hue range; and finally correcting the hue of the image pixel by using the position weight, the edge response and/or the hue range. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223736 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device may create corrected image data by correcting object image data by utilizing base image data. The image processing device may determine a first polar coordinate value which represents first pixels in the object image data, calculate a first orthogonal coordinate by executing an orthogonal transformation on the first polar coordinate value, determine a second polar coordinate value which represents second pixels in the base image data, calculate a second orthogonal coordinate value by executing an orthogonal transformation on the second polar coordinate value, and create the corrected image data by correcting the object image data such that a coordinate value of each particular pixel in the object image data approaches the second orthogonal coordinate value. The each particular pixel may be included in a surrounding area of the first orthogonal coordinate value. | 08-29-2013 |
20130230243 | Methods and Apparatus for Applying a Bokeh Effect to Images - Methods and apparatus for creating bokeh effects in digital images. A bokeh technique is described that may provide double threshold image bokeh boosting. The bokeh effect may be controlled by a boost amount, an upper threshold value, and a lower threshold value. Colorfulness may be added to the bokeh effect applied to specular highlights according to a variable colorfulness value. A soft threshold may be implemented that results in most but not all energy of the boosting of the intensity falling between the upper and lower threshold values. The bokeh technique may achieve creative bokeh effects in digital images by simulating bokeh in the resultant blurred image. The bokeh technique may, for example, be used in combination with any of various blur patterns, and also may be used with combinations of two or more blur patterns. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230244 | Continuously Adjustable Bleed for Selected Region Blurring - Methods and apparatus for controlling bleeding at the edges of a blur region or selection. A technique for aesthetically controlling the bleeding of blur introduced by blurring selections, referred to herein as a selection bleed technique, may enable continuous adjustment of the amount of bleeding of image blurs between a selected image region and its complement (the unselected region, e.g. the background). The selection bleed technique may allow selections to go from no-bleed to full-bleed and in between via a percentage indicated by one or more user interface elements, for example a slider. | 09-05-2013 |
20130236093 | OVERLAID USER INTERFACE TOOLS FOR APPLYING EFFECTS TO IMAGE - Some embodiments provide several on-image tools of image editing application for applying effects to an image. Some on-image tools are visible to the user and are overlaid on the image. Some on-image tools are not visible. The tools are for receiving a selection of a location of the image and for applying effects to at least an area of the image that does not include the location of the image. | 09-12-2013 |
20130236094 | Image Processing Method and Apparatus - A method and apparatus for providing image processing. For one embodiment of the invention, an image processing apparatus is arranged to process a first relatively underexposed and sharp image of a scene, and a second relatively well exposed and blurred image, nominally of the same scene, the first and second images being derived from respective image sources. The apparatus provides a portion of the relatively first underexposed image as an input signal to an adaptive filter; and a corresponding portion of the second relatively well exposed image as a desired signal to the adaptive filter. The adaptive filter produces an output signal from the input signal and the desired signal; and an image generator constructs a first filtered image from the output signal, relatively less blurred than the second image. | 09-12-2013 |
20130236095 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided an image processing device including: an image analysis unit and a pixel value correction unit, wherein the image analysis unit sets a plurality of bins having different bin widths which are set by a luminance range varying in size depending on a luminance value, and generates frequency distribution data obtained by setting the number of pixels contained in a luminance range corresponding to each bin as frequency data, and wherein the pixel value correction unit selects a bin corresponding to a pixel to be corrected which is a bin including the pixel value of the pixel to be subjected to noise reduction and a predetermined number of neighboring bins, and calculates a corrected pixel value of the pixel to be subjected to noise reduction by an arithmetic operation process to which a pixel value of a reference pixel contained in the selected bin is applied. | 09-12-2013 |
20130236096 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE REPAIR OF ANOMALIES IN IMAGES - The present invention concerns a method and associated apparatus for improving the quality of digital imagery by detecting and correcting erroneous pixel values from image sensors, such as those produced by stuck or dead pixels in a CCD or CMOS sensor. Anomalous pixel values are detected through comparisons with values of adjacent pixels and corrected selectively per channel through interpolation of adjacent pixel values. | 09-12-2013 |
20130243317 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREDICTIVE SCALING OF COLOR MAPPED IMAGES - A method for determining a scaled colour map of a scaled image is described using the transformation of the original colour map and the original image only, independently of the scaled image. A number of colours N in the original colour map is determined; and provided N>N | 09-19-2013 |
20130243318 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus comprises means for generating, from first-resolution image data including signals according to a plurality of color filters, second-resolution image data including signals according to the plurality of color filters at a resolution lower than the first-resolution image data; means for generating luminance signals from the signals according to the plurality of color filters of the second-resolution image data; means for storing image data including the luminance signals generated from the second-resolution image data; means for generating image data, which includes signals according to the plurality of color filters as many as the number of pixels of the first-resolution image data, from the stored image data and includes the luminance signals; and means for combining the signals according to the plurality of color filters of the first-resolution image data and signals according to the plurality of color filters of the image data output from the conversion means. | 09-19-2013 |
20130251258 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus for applying a color balance correction to input image data, comprises a first highlight color calculation unit which estimates a light source at the time of shooting from pixel values of the image data, converts color values of the image data based on a condition of the estimated light source at the time of shooting, and calculates a first highlight color; a second highlight color calculation unit which calculates a second highlight color from the image data; a third highlight color calculation unit which calculates a third highlight color based on a positional relationship between the first highlight color and the second highlight color on a color space; and a correction unit which attains the color balance correction by converting the pixel values of the image data using the third highlight color. | 09-26-2013 |
20130251259 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus for applying a color balance correction to input image data, comprises a holding unit which holds information indicating a locus of a change in highlight color when a color temperature for image data is changed on a color space; a highlight color calculation unit which calculates a highlight color from the image data; a distance calculation unit which calculates a distance between the highlight color and the highlight color locus held in the holding unit on the color space; a reliability calculation unit which calculates a reliability for a value of the highlight color calculated by the highlight color calculation unit in accordance with the distance calculated by the distance calculation unit; and a color balance correction unit which applies the color balance correction to the image data using the highlight color and the reliability. | 09-26-2013 |
20130259368 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - According to one embodiment, an image processing apparatus includes: a reduction module configured to reduce image data that is input to output reduced data; an extraction module configured to extract a diffuse reflection component from the reduced data; an enlargement module configured to enlarge the diffuse reflection component to a size before reduction of the input image data to output enlarged data; a high-frequency acquisition module configured to acquire a high-frequency component removed by reduction from difference between the input image data and the reduced data; a high-frequency addition module configured to output first data obtained by adding the high-frequency component acquired to the enlarged data; and a gloss component acquisition module configured to acquire a gloss component from difference between the input image data and the first data. | 10-03-2013 |
20130266219 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided an image processing apparatus including a representative pixel calculation unit configured to select some pixels in an input image as representative pixels, a representative pixel update unit configured to update pixel values of the representative pixels, and a corrected image generation unit configured to set pixel values for pixels other than the representative pixels by applying the updated pixel values of the representative pixels. The representative pixel update unit is configured to, based on pixels around a position of the representative pixels in a smoothed image generated based on the input image as reference pixels, execute pixel value correction of the representative pixels by applying the pixel values of the reference pixels. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266220 | COLOR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUIT, COLOR SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD, COLOR REPRODUCTION EVALUATING METHOD, IMAGING APPARATUS, ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND TESTING DEVICE - A color signal processing circuit performs a correction process on an input color signal so as to cause a color component to belong to a color reproduction determination range, which is set in a chromaticity diagram to define an allowable range of color discrepancy, using the color reproduction determination range. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272605 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is an image processing device including a data conversion processing unit that receives an input of an RGBW array image and generates an RGB array image as an output image. The data conversion processing unit includes a pixel interpolation unit that calculates interpolated pixel values corresponding to an array of the RGB array image by performing a pixel interpolation process on the RGBW array image, a purple fringe detection unit that detects whether each pixel is a purple fringe pixel by analyzing the RGBW array image, a corrected value calculation unit that calculates corrected pixel values by correcting pixel values of the purple fringe pixels, and a blend processing unit that calculates constituent pixel values RGB of the output image by performing a blend process of blending the interpolated pixel values calculated by the pixel interpolation unit with the corrected pixel values calculated by the corrected value calculation unit. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272606 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM - An image processing apparatus includes a first image output device and a second image output device outputting first and second output data from original image data, a color space fixing device for determining a color space for color tone conversion, a color space conversion device, a color component mapping device for generating color component mapping data containing correspondences between pixels in the image data, a color tone conversion parameter fixing device for generating color tone conversion parameters from corresponding pixels in the image data, and a color tone conversion device for converting the image data using the conversion parameters. | 10-17-2013 |
20130287296 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR IMAGE PROCESSING - Embodiments provide a method for processing a first image based on a second image, wherein each pixel in the first image has a plurality of color components and has a corresponding pixel in the second image, and wherein each value of a color component in the first image corresponds to a value of a color component in the second image. The method may include deciding, for each color component of a pixel in the first image, whether to modify the value of the color component dependent on a predetermined criterion. The method may further include determining a similarity index between the pixel in the first image and the corresponding pixel in the second image based on, for each color component of the pixel, the value of the color component of the pixel, or if it is decided that the value of the color component of the pixel is to be modified, the corresponding value of the color component in the second image. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287297 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus capable of performing chromatic aberration of magnification and noise reduction without decrease in processing performance and increase in the cost is provided. A format conversion circuit in the image processing apparatus converts first image data including an array of color components of red (R), green (G1 and G2), and blue (B) into second image data including the color components of R and B and a luminance component by performing false color suppression processing on the first image data separately using the color components of G1 and G2, and stores the data in an image buffer region. A circuit for correcting chromatic aberration of magnification reads the second data stored in the image buffer region and performs the correction of chromatic aberration of magnification. | 10-31-2013 |
20130308859 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing device having a brightness adjustment unit having a unit processing the brightness of each pixel and a frame buffer unfolding each brightness before and after processing, and a color adjustment unit having a unit processing the color of each pixel and a frame buffer unfolding each pixel color before and after processing. The ratio (f) of the brightness of each pixel before and after adjusting is input. When the ratio (f) is equal or larger than a color emphasis parameter (ColorRate), calculates anti-numerical value that subtract the ColorRate from the ratio (f), adds the ColorRate to this anti-numerical value, and multiplies a coordinate value of the color space by the added value. When the ratio (f) is smaller than the ColorRate, multiplies the ColorRate by the coordinate value of the color space, and outputs the color of each pixel to the frame buffer. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315482 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus includes an image input unit for inputting color image data, a first color conversion unit for converting the inputted color image data into first image data of the L*a*b color space having independently brightness component and chromaticity component, a background detection unit for detecting a background color component from the converted first image data of the L*a*b color space, a background removing unit for converting, based on a white value conversion parameter derived based on a ratio of the background color corresponding to the background component to a prescribed reference white color in the L*a*b color space, the first image data into second image data having the background color in white, a second color conversion unit for converting the second image data of the L*a*b color space into third image data of a prescribed color space, and an output unit for outputting the converted third image data of the prescribed color space. | 11-28-2013 |
20130322751 | Band Dependent Linearization for Multiband Remotely Sensed and Aerial Imagery - A system for processing a multiband image, including digital computer memory for storing a multiband image having multiple bands of image data; and processing circuitry for processing the multiband image, wherein the processing circuitry (a) determines pixel locations in the bands of the multiband image having values above the band-specific white value threshold for each of the bands of the multiband image, (b) determines a band-specific correction factor for each of plural bands of the multiband image based on the determined pixel locations, and (c) applies the corresponding band-specific correction factor to the respective plural bands of the multiband image to produce a corrected image. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322752 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CHROMA NOISE REDUCTION - Systems and methods for reducing chrominance (chroma) noise in image data are provided. In one example of such a method, image data in YCC format may be received into logic of an image signal processor. Using the logic, noise may be filtered from a first chrominance component or a second chrominance component, or both, of the image data, using a sparse filter and a noise threshold. The noise threshold may be determined based at least in part on two of the components of the YCC image data. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322753 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOCAL TONE MAPPING - Systems and methods for local tone mapping are provided. In one example, an electronic device includes an electronic display, an imaging device, and an image signal processor. The electronic display may display images of a first bit depth, and the imaging device may include an image sensor that obtains image data of a higher bit depth than the first bit depth. The image signal processor may process the image data, and may include local tone mapping logic that may apply a spatially varying local tone curve to a pixel of the image data to preserve local contrast when displayed on the display. The local tone mapping logic may smooth the local tone curve applied to the intensity difference between the pixel and another nearby pixel exceeds a threshold. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329993 | AUTOMATED COLOR BALANCE TOOLS FOR EDITING IMAGES - Some embodiments provide a method of automatically color balancing an image. The method receives a selection of a user interface (UI) item to automatically color balance the image using a color balance tool that includes several color balance modes. In response to the selection, the method analyzes the image based on a set of criteria. Based on the analysis, the method automatically selects a color balance mode from the several color balance modes of the color balance tool. Upon selecting the color balance mode, the method uses the color balance mode to automatically apply a set of color balance operations to the image. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329994 | COLOR BALANCE TOOLS FOR EDITING IMAGES - Some embodiments provide a method for color balancing an image. The method receives a first selection of a first mode of a color balance tool that includes several different color balance modes. Each color balance mode is for applying color balance operations to the image. The method uses the first mode of the color balance tool to apply a first set of color balance operations to the image. The method receives a second selection to switch from the first mode to a second mode of the color balance tool. The method uses the second mode of the color balance tool to apply a second set of color balance operations to the image. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329995 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-STAGE AUTO-ENHANCEMENT OF PHOTOGRAPHS - Some embodiments of the image editing and organizing application described herein provide a multi-stage automatic enhancement process. The process takes an input image and feeds it through multiple different enhancement operations. The multiple enhancement operations of some embodiments are carried out in a particular order. In some embodiments, the particular order starts with exposure adjustment, then a white balance adjustment, then a vibrancy adjustment, then a tonal response curve adjustment, then a shadow lift adjustment. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329996 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTO-ENHANCING PHOTOGRAPHS WITH TONAL RESPONSE CURVES - Some embodiments of the image editing and organizing application described herein provide a method of adjusting an image that includes a tonal response curve adjustment stage. In the tonal response curve adjustment stage, the method sets a black point and a white point for a tonal response curve and tempers the settings. The method sets a median point and mid-tone contrast points, ensures that the mid-tone contrast points can increase, but not decrease the mid-tone contrast, and then temper the mid-tone contrast points. The method then adjusts the image according to the tonal response curve generated from the points. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329997 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTO-ENHANCING PHOTOGRAPHS WITH SHADOW LIFT ADJUSTMENTS - Some embodiments of the image editing and organizing application described herein provide an automatic enhancement process that includes a shadow lift adjustment. The process takes an input image and enhances the contrast of darker parts of the image. The process uses a structure histogram to determine an amount of shadow lift adjustment to apply to the image. The process tempers this adjustment based on an International Organization for Standardization (ISO) value of the image. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329998 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTO-ENHANCING PHOTOGRAPHS WITH SATURATION ADJUSTMENTS - Some embodiments of the image editing and organizing application described herein provide an automatic enhancement process that includes vibrancy adjustment. The vibrancy adjustment increases the saturation of multiple pixels. The saturation of each pixel is determined by subtracting the lowest component value from the highest component value. The process determines an overall saturation of the image using a histogram. The histogram is generated using doubled saturation values for pixels with blue and green as the highest component value. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329999 | IMAGE PROCESSOR, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND CHIP CIRCUIT - An image processor includes: a first calculator configured to calculate similarity between a first region including a target pixel and a second region including a reference pixel and calculate a multiplication coefficient which increases as the similarity increases; a second calculator configured to calculate a random number; a sum-of-products arithmetic unit configured to multiply a pixel value of each reference pixel by the multiplication coefficient and the random number and compute a sum of the products; a coefficient summation unit configured to multiply the multiplication coefficient by the random number and compute a sum of the products; and a division unit configured to divide the result of the sum-of-products arithmetic unit by the result of the coefficient summation unit. | 12-12-2013 |
20130330000 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - According to an aspect of the invention, an image processing apparatus includes a generating unit, a calculating unit, a receiving unit, and a changing unit. The generating unit generates a plurality of histograms of images with respect to each color based on an input image. The calculating unit calculates a plurality of first image densities of the images from the histograms. The receiving unit receives a content of image quality adjustment performed on the input image. The changing unit changes one of the histograms based on the content of the image quality adjustment. The one of the histogram corresponds to one of the images on which the image quality adjustment is performed. The calculating unit calculates a second image density corresponding to the one the images based on the one of the histogram changed by the changing unit. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336585 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BILATERAL IMAGE FILTERING - A method includes generating a first principle bilateral filtered image component from a source image. The first principle bilateral filtered image component corresponds to a second pixel value of a set, the second pixel value greater than or equal to a first pixel value. The method includes selectively updating a result pixel of a result image based on the first principle bilateral filtered image component and deallocating the first principle bilateral filtered image component. After deallocating the first principle bilateral filtered image component, a second principle bilateral filtered image component is generated from the source image. The second principle bilateral filtered image component corresponds to a third pixel value. The third pixel value is greater than the second pixel value. The third pixel value is less than or equal to a fourth pixel value. The result pixel is selectively updated based on the second principle bilateral filtered image component. | 12-19-2013 |
20140003715 | DYNAMIC RANGE COMPRESSION METHOD FOR IMAGE AND IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140010447 | Color Enhancement for Graphic Images - A color enhancement system may enhance color components in an image. In one embodiment, the color enhancement system suppresses banding by combining an input color value with an enhanced colored value. In another embodiment, local variation in saturation values around a pixel may be used to determine a modification of an input saturation value for color enhancement. As still another embodiment, flickering between frames may be suppressed by combining a histogram that counts the number of times a given pixel value occurs in a particular image with a historical histogram that keeps track of an average of how often given values have occurred in previous frames. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016866 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IMAGE - A method and apparatus for processing an image for enhancing an image quality captured in a low illumination environment is disclosed. The method for processing the image may include estimating motion information based on a base frame among input frames captured using a short exposure time and high ISO sensitivity conditions, removing noise of the base frame using the motion information, and enhancing an image quality of the base frame from which the noise has been removed using a reference frame captured under a long exposure condition. | 01-16-2014 |
20140023268 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - Edge enhancement processing is performed for the luminance of each pixel of an image, and the correction value of the pixel after the edge enhancement processing is decided according to the saturation of each pixel of the image. The value of the pixel after the edge enhancement processing is corrected using the decided correction value. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029847 | IMAGE ELEMENT BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT - One or more techniques and/or systems are disclosed for adjusting a brightness level of an image element representing an image of a body-part relief print. A first weighting factor can be determined for a first image element that may be comprised in an initial image captured by a body-part relief print image capture device. A body-part relief print weighting value can be determined, which can be based at least upon a combination of the first weighting factor and a second image element brightness value for a second image element that may be comprised in a body-part relief print image, which may be captured by a same body-part relief print image capture device as the initial image. An adjusted brightness level can be determined for the second image element, based at least upon a combination of the body-part relief print weighting value and the second image element brightness value. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029848 | RE-COLORING A COLOR IMAGE - Technology for re-coloring a region of a color image including determining an original base color in a region of a color image; establishing at least one shading parameter in the region of the color image; and combining a new base color with the at least one shading parameter in the region of the color image thereby producing a re-colored region of the color image. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029849 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR RANDOM PARAMETER FILTERING - The invention produces a higher quality image from a rendering system based on a relationship between the output of a rendering system and the parameters used to compute them. Specifically, noise is removed in rendering by estimating the functional dependency between sample features and the random inputs to the system. Mutual information is applied to a local neighborhood of samples in each part of the image. This dependency is then used to reduce the importance of certain scene features in a cross-bilateral filter, which preserves scene detail. The results produced by the invention are computed in a few minutes thereby making it reasonably robust for use in production environments. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029850 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMAGE IMPROVED IMAGE ENHANCEMENT - System and method for image improvement comprising providing a series of frames; summing pixel values to obtain frame intensity; computing average frame intensity; determining frame intensity deviation for each frame by subtracting average frame intensity from frame intensity; determining an array of average pixel values (AAPV) and subtracting AAPV from the pixel value arrays to determine positive or negative pixel deviation values; grouping frames in first or second groups depending positive or negative frame intensity deviation; selecting all pixel values having a positive or negative deviation value and creating subgroups of positive or negative pixel deviation value frames, multiplying the pixel deviation value frames in each subgroup by frame intensity deviation to create first product arrays, which are summed together and divided by total number of frames to obtain second product arrays for each subgroup; selecting one or more of second product arrays to generate an image. | 01-30-2014 |
20140037207 | SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF ADAPTIVELY SUPPRESSING FALSE-COLOR ARTIFACTS - A system and a method of adaptively suppressing false-color artifacts are disclosed. A luma spatial frequency unit detects edges or an area with a substantially high luma spatial frequency within an active window, and a chroma spatial frequency unit detects substantial fluctuations in colors within the active window. A false-color detector determines occurrence of false-color artifacts according to results of the luma spatial frequency unit and the chroma spatial frequency unit. A compensator performs compensation on chroma components if the false-color detector decides that the false-color artifacts occur. | 02-06-2014 |
20140037208 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROGRAM-RECORDED STORAGE MEDIUM - A gradation-correcting curve to correct a gradation of an input image is generated. Gradation correction based on the gradation-correcting curve is made to a boundary pixel of a color-reproduction space at the same saturation as that of a target lattice point and at a hue of the target lattice point. An equal-saturation line is set by using the boundary pixel of the color-reproduction space after the gradation correction. A saturation-correction amount of the target lattice point is decided based on the gradation-correcting curve and the equal-saturation line. | 02-06-2014 |
20140044352 | Joint Enhancement of Lightness, Color and Contrast of Images and Video - In some embodiments, color and contrast enhancement video processing may be done in one shot instead of adjusting one of color and contrast enhancement, then the other, and then going back to the first one to readjust because of the second adjustment. In some embodiments, global lightness adjustment, local contrast enhancement, and saturation enhancement may be done at the same time and in parallel. Lightness adjustment improves visibility of details for generally dark or generally light images without changing intended lighting conditions in the original shot, and is used to enhance the range of color/saturation enhancement. Local contrast enhancement done in parallel improves visual definition of objects and textures and thus local contrast and perceived sharpness. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044353 | Methods and Systems for Estimation of Document Skew in an Image - Aspects of the present invention are related to systems and methods for determining a skew angle associated with a document image. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a rotation vector may be estimated for at least one layer in a vertical-edge buffer and a horizontal-edge buffer. According to a second aspect of the present invention, a rotation vector may be estimated directly from the vertical-edge buffer and the horizontal-edge buffer using a fixed-sized, progressively constrained histogram. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044354 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - In an image processing apparatus for carrying out a plurality of correction processes on an input image, a multi-dimensional histogram of the input image is calculated, and a feature amount of the input image for which a specific correction process has been carried out is analyzed based on the multi-dimensional histogram. Then, based on the result of the analysis, correction parameters to be used for another correction process are calculated. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050398 | USING SURFACES WITH PRINTED PATTERNS FOR IMAGE AND DATA PROCESSING - Adjusting data for photographed images includes detecting a reference image in the data, where the reference image contains a detectable uniformity and adjusting the data according to the reference image. The reference image may be a uniform grid pattern of dots preprinted on paper. A paper type may be determined prior to adjusting the data according to the reference image. The paper type may be determined according to spacing and/or patterns of the dots, and/or layout of page areas covered with dots. Adjusting the data may include removing effects corresponding to a folded corner, a removed corner, an obstructed corner, lens flare spots, and/or a shadow. Positional coordinates of the data may be adjusted by normalizing the grid through a non-linear transformation that eliminates curvature of the grid and/or distortions based on perspective. | 02-20-2014 |
20140064613 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING LOCAL BRIGHTNESS GAIN TO ENHANCE IMAGE QUALITY - An image processing apparatus is provided. The image processing apparatus includes a local brightness adjustment circuit and an image enhancement circuit. The local brightness adjustment circuit is arranged to obtain a local brightness gain relation between an input image before a local brightness adjustment and the input image after the local brightness adjustment. The image enhancement circuit is coupled to the local brightness adjustment circuit, and is arranged to perform at least one of a noise reduction and an edge enhancement upon an image to be processed according to the local brightness gain relation to generate an output image. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064614 | Systems and Methods for Multi-Resolution Inpainting - Various embodiments are disclosed for performing inpainting. One embodiment is a method for editing a digital image in an image editing device. The method comprises obtaining an inpainting region in the digital image, determining a target resolution for scaling a resolution of the digital image based on an original resolution of the digital image, and determining an intermediate resolution level for scaling a resolution of the digital image based on the target resolution. The method further comprises scaling the resolution of the digital image to the intermediate resolution level, performing partial inpainting of the inpainting region at the intermediate resolution, and performing inpainting on a remainder portion in the inpainting region at a final target resolution. | 03-06-2014 |
20140072216 | Image De-Hazing by Solving Transmission Value - An image processing server performs haze-removal from images. Global atmospheric light is estimated and an initial transmission value is estimated. In one embodiment, a solver is applied to an objective function to recover a scene radiance value based on the estimated atmospheric light and estimated transmission value. The scene radiance value is used to construct an image without haze. In a simplified method that avoids using a solver, bilateral filtering is performed on the transmission image in order to construct an image without haze. | 03-13-2014 |
20140079319 | METHODS FOR ENHANCING IMAGES AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - An embodiment of an image enhancement method is introduced. An object is detected from a received image according to a object feature. An intensity distribution of the object is computed. A plurality of color values of pixels of the object is mapped to a plurality of new color values of the pixels according to the intensity distribution. Finally, a new image comprising the new color values of the pixels is provided to a user. | 03-20-2014 |
20140093167 | RECOLORING IMAGES OF A WEB PAGE ACCORDING TO A REPRESENTATIVE COLOR - A system for recoloring a set of images of a web page according to a determined representative color. The system receives at least one image that is to be recolored from a first color scheme to a second color scheme, wherein the first color scheme comprises a plurality of first colors, the second color scheme comprises a plurality of second colors, and each of the plurality of first colors is associated to one of the plurality of second colors. The system assigns a representative color to each of the pixels of the image, wherein the representative colors are chosen from the plurality of first colors. The system recolors pixels of the image to correspond to the plurality of second colors, wherein each recolored pixel is recolored according to a second color that is associated with the representative color that was assigned to the recolored pixel. | 04-03-2014 |
20140093168 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes: an adjusting unit that adjusts a color characteristic in relation to a color image; a conversion unit that converts the color image of which color characteristic is adjusted with the adjusting unit into a luminance-chromaticity image; a band image generating unit that generates a band image that represents a predetermined band from a luminance image of the luminance-chromaticity image; an emphasizing unit that obtains a band emphasized image that emphasizes a band using the luminance image and the band image; and a setting unit that sets an emphasized degree of the band performed by using the emphasizing unit and an adjusted degree of the color characteristic performed by using the adjusting unit. | 04-03-2014 |
20140099026 | Color Correction Based on Multiple Images - In some implementations, a method provides color corrections based on multiple images. In some implementations, a method includes determining one or more characteristics of each of a plurality of source images and determining one or more similarities between the one or more characteristics of different source images. The source images are grouped into one or more groups of one or more target images based on the determined similarities. The method determines and applies one or more color corrections to the one or more target images in at least one of the groups. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099027 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING AN IMAGE - According to one embodiment, an image processing apparatus includes a chroma calculation unit, a lightness calculation unit, a glossiness calculation unit, and a correction unit. The chroma calculation unit is configured to calculate a chroma of each pixel of an image to be processed. The lightness calculation unit is configured to calculate a lightness of each pixel of the image. The glossiness calculation unit is configured to estimate a glossiness of each pixel of the image, based on the chroma and the lightness. The correction unit is configured to correct each pixel of the image so that a correction amount of a pixel is larger when the glossiness of the pixel is higher. | 04-10-2014 |
20140112581 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING PURPLE DISTORTION IN DIGITAL IMAGES AND A COMPUTING DEVICE EMPLOYING SAME - A computing device and a method for correcting color distortion are provided, in particular for correcting purple flare. A digital image has an array of pixels each represented by a green (G), a red (R) and a blue (B) primary color, and for each pixel, the computing device establishes a minimum value between the R and B intensity values, and compares the minimum value and the G intensity value. The original R, G and B intensity values are maintained if the G intensity value is equal or greater than the minimum value. The R and B intensity values are attenuated by an adjustment value if the G intensity value is less than the minimum value. The adjustment value is calculated as the difference of the minimum value and the G intensity value. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119649 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IMAGE - A method and apparatus for processing an image that performs an online brightness change is disclosed, the method including dividing a luminance channel in a reference image and a target image based on a size of a chroma channel, enhancing an image quality of the target image in which the luminance channel is divided, using the reference image in which the luminance channel is divided, enhancing the image quality of an image of the luminance channel divided in the target image, using the enhanced target image of which, and combining the luminance channel of the enhanced target image and the luminance channel of which the image quality is enhanced. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119650 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing device includes: a detecting section configured to detect, from a frame image, a local-maximum region that is configured of pixels each having a color-difference signal value larger than color-difference signal values of surrounding pixels; a determining section configured to determine an overlapping region where the local-maximum region overlaps with a first neighboring region of a pixel of interest that belongs to the local-maximum region, and to determine a minimum of color-difference signal values of pixels that belong to the overlapping region; and a correcting section configured to correct a color-difference signal of the pixel of interest, based on both a color-difference signal value of the pixel of interest and the minimum of the color-difference signal values of pixels that belong to the overlapping region. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119651 | SYSTEM AND PROCESSOR IMPLEMENTED METHOD FOR IMPROVED IMAGE QUALITY AND ENHANCEMENT - System and method for image improvement comprising providing a plurality of frames; determining the value of each pixel within each frame to form a first array of pixel values; selecting pixel locations within a frame; summing the intensity values of those pixels; multiplying the pixels in the first array by the summation of intensity values for selected pixel locations to produce a first product array for each frame; summing the first product arrays; determining the average of first product arrays; determining the average value of each pixel for the plurality of frames to form an a second array of averaged pixel values; determining the average of the summation of intensity values for the selected pixel locations; multiplying the array of average pixel values and the average of the summation of intensity values to form a second product array; subtracting the second product array from the average of first product arrays. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126815 | COLOR BALANCING APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE IMAGE SYNTHESIS AND METHOD THEREFOR - A color balancing apparatus for multiple image synthesis and a method therefore, in which an automatic white balance unit, with respect to each of a plurality of input images that are obtained by sequentially capturing adjacent scenes, is configured to compare a neutral color representing the input image with chromaticity of standard sources that are predefined, determine a standard source which is closest to the neutral color among the standard sources as a standard illuminant, and perform a white balance on the input image based on the standard illuminant, so that a natural wide-area synthesis image is generated by use of a light source estimation scheme considering multiple light sources, without complex computation of the conventional wide-area image synthesis, are provided. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126816 | SYSTEM AND PROCESS FOR COLOR-BALANCING A SERIES OF OBLIQUE IMAGES - Image processing systems and methods are disclosed, including an image processing system comprising a computer running image processing software causing the computer to divide a captured oblique image into a plurality of oblique image sections, the oblique image sections determined at least in part on a path length distance between the location of a point in the scene in the captured oblique image and the location of the camera when the oblique image was captured; and apply a varying amount of color correction to the sections based in part on the determined path length, thereby reducing variation in the captured oblique image caused by specular reflection and atmosphere depicted in the sections prior to color balancing. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133748 | BLENDING WITH MULTIPLE BLEND MODES FOR IMAGE MANIPULATION - In various example embodiments, a system and method are provided for blending a group of layers with multiple blend modes such that additional style layers are applied to the layer group's combined shape, and clipped as if the style layers were applied to a single layer with the combined transparency of the group's layers. In example embodiments, for each of a plurality of layers: a group background is blended behind a group buffer, one of the plurality of layers is blended on top of the group buffer while ignoring a transparency of the group buffer, and the background is factored out from the group buffer. When the blending is complete, a style or effect is applied to the blended layers, and the background is blended behind the group result such that the group result transparency such that the style is clipped to the group result. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133749 | Systems And Methods For Statistics Collection Using Pixel Mask - Systems and methods are provided for collecting image statistics using a pixel mask. In one example, statistics collection logic of an image signal processor may include a pixel weighting mask and accumulation logic. The pixel weighting mask may receive a first representation of a pixel that includes a luma and chroma representation of the pixel. The pixel weighting mask may output a pixel weighting using first and second chroma components of the luma and chroma representation of the pixel. The accumulation logic may receive the first or a second representation of the pixel and the pixel weighting value. Using these, the accumulation logic may weight the second representation of the pixel or the first representation of the pixel using the pixel weighting value to obtain a weighted pixel value, adding the weighted pixel value to a statistics count. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133750 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING IMAGES CAPTURED UNDERWATER - A method for image processing, the method executed at least in part by a computer system, acquires a digital image as a collection of image pixels and calculates from a plurality of the image pixels, at least one statistical measurement. The at least one calculated statistical measurement is associated with a predetermined modification function setting according to a best-fit function that has been calculated from a database of sample images. A processed image is formed by adjusting the acquired collection of image pixels according to the associated predetermined modification function setting and the processed image is displayed. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133751 | METHOD FOR SUPERPIXEL LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT - A method and an apparatus for life cycle management for superpixels associated to frames of a sequence of frames are described. An area occupied by a superpixel in a frame of the sequence of frames is monitored. In case the area of the superpixel becomes smaller than a specified first value, the superpixel is terminated in the later frame. In case the area of the superpixel becomes larger than a specified second value, the superpixel is split in the later frame. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140615 | Global Approximation to Spatially Varying Tone Mapping Operators - Techniques to generate global tone-mapping operators (G-TMOs) that, when applied to high dynamic range images, visually approximate the use of spatially varying tone-mapping operators (SV-TMOs) are described. The disclosed G-TMOs provide substantially the same visual benefits as SV-TMOs but do not suffer from spatial artifacts such as halos and are, in addition, computationally efficient compared to SV-TMOs. In general, G-TMOs may be identified based on application of a SV-TMO to a down-sampled version of a full-resolution input image (e.g., a thumbnail). An optimized mapping between the SV-TMO's input and output constitutes the G-TMO. It has been unexpectedly discovered that when optimized (e.g., to minimize the error between the SV-TMO's input and output), G-TMOs so generated provide an excellent visual approximation to the SV-TMO (as applied to the full-resolution image). | 05-22-2014 |
20140140616 | DEVICE FOR CONVERTING COLOR GAMUT AND METHOD THEREOF - A color gamut conversion device includes: a target color coordinate converter configured to convert each RGB value of red (R), green (G), blue (B), cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and white (W) of a target color coordinate into a tristimulus value XYZ; a reference conversion matrix generator configured to generate a first reference conversion matrix for converting each tristimulus value XYZ into an R′G′B′ value according to a color gamut of a reference display; a low power corrected value calculator configured to calculate a low power corrected value for correcting the R′G′B′ value; a lookup table (LUT) generator configured to generate an LUT including an R″G″B″ value corresponding to each RGB value by using a second reference conversion matrix that the low power corrected value is applied to the first reference conversion matrix; and a color gamut converter configured to convert image data of the RGB values into image data of the R″G″B″ values using the LUT. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140617 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - A first interpolating image generating unit interpolates a first image acquired from a first pixel group including first pixels to generate a first interpolating image. A second interpolating image generating unit interpolates a second image acquired from a second pixel group including second pixels at the same exposure as that of the first image, using a signal of the second image, to generate a second interpolating image. A sensitivity characteristic converting unit converts the generated first interpolating image and second interpolating image into images having the same sensitivity characteristics. An image synthesizing unit synthesizes the first interpolating image and second interpolating image, having been converted to have the same sensitivity characteristics, to generate a synthesized image. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140618 | ARTIFACT REMOVAL METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTOURED IMAGES AND VIDEO - A system and method reduce or eliminate the step-contouring are provided because many types of compression algorithms introduce a step-contoured artifact for images and video with slow gradients. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140619 | Method and System for Removal of Fog, Mist, or Haze from Images and Videos - A method of removing fog from the images/videos independent of the density or amount of the fog and free of user intervention and a system for carrying out such method of fog removal from images/videos are disclosed. The removal of fog from images and video involve airlight estimation and airlight map refinement based restoration of foggy images and videos. Advantageously, removal of fog from images and videos of this invention would require less execution time and yet achieve high perceptual image quality with reduced noise and enhanced contrast. The proposed method is adapted for RGB Colour model and advantageously also for HSI colour model involving reduced computational requirements and be user friendly and supposed to have wide application and use. | 05-22-2014 |
20140147041 | IMAGE COLOR CORRECTION - Color-correcting a digital image comprising P pixels (P≧4) is presented. Each of the P pixels has a respective color. Color strengths of the P pixels are determined based at least on respective intensities, respective saturations, or both respective intensities and respective saturations of the P pixels. A subset of the P pixels less than all of the P pixels is determined. The pixels in the subset have respective color strengths in a range of respective color strength. All other pixels of the P pixels have respective color strengths outside of the range of respective color strengths. Color correction is determined for the P pixels based in part on the colors of the respective pixels in the subset which are the only pixels of the P pixels used for determining the color correction. The colors of the P pixels are corrected based on the color correction. | 05-29-2014 |
20140147042 | Device for uniformly enhancing images - A device for uniformly enhancing images includes a control unit, a lined cache controller, a lined storage array, an average grayscale computing unit, a scaling coefficient computing unit and an enhancement computing unit. For a color image, the color image is firstly transformed in to YUV space from RGB space and a grayscale image of Y component thereof is divided into identical-sized image blocks; then each image block is uniformly processed with a grayscale enhancement. A method for uniformly enhancing images includes firstly designating a reference grayscale value gray_value for grayscale images, comparing the reference grayscale value to an average grayscale value mean_value of a current image block to obtain a scaling coefficient, and multiplying all pixels or specific pixels within the image block by the scaling coefficient. The grayscale enhancement of an image sequence uses an identical grayscale value for reference, so as to accomplish a uniform enhancement of different images. | 05-29-2014 |
20140147043 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROCESSING OF IMAGE FRAMES - In accordance with an example embodiment a method, apparatus and computer program product are provided. The method comprises receiving colour image frames and panchromatic image frames associated with a scene. The colour image frames correspond to the panchromatic image frames. The method further comprises computing registration information based on a panchromatic image frame and one or more panchromatic image frames from among the panchromatic image frames. A colour image frame corresponding to the panchromatic image frame is modified based on the registration information. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153823 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING IMAGE - An image processing apparatus includes an adaptive interpolation device which converts a MFA pattern image into a quincuncial pattern image based on difference values, and interpolates color channels and an NIR channel, based on difference values of the converted quincuncial pattern image in vertical and horizontal pixel directions; a frequency compensation device which obtains a high-resolution MFA image using high-frequency and medium-frequency components of a high-resolution base image, based on linear regression analysis and compared energy levels of MFA channel images to an energy level of a base image; and a channel interference suppression device which removes color distortion generated between each channel of the high-resolution MFA image, and another channel of the high-resolution MFA image and a base channel using a weighted average of pixel value differences between each channel of the high-resolution MFA image, and the other channel of the high-resolution MFA image and the base channel. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153824 | Image Processing Apparatus That Performs Color Conversion and Image Processing Method - An image processing apparatus in the present disclosure includes a color conversion processing unit, a modulation candidate creating unit, a color value modulating unit, and an output unit. The color conversion processing unit performs color conversion from an input color value of a target image to a corresponding output color value to obtain a tentative output color value. The modulation candidate creating unit creates, as modulation candidates, combinations of integer values obtained by rounding up or down the decimal fraction of each color component of a tentative output color value. The color value modulating unit selects a modulation candidate at random and performs modulation by replacing the tentative output color value with the selected modulation candidate. The output unit outputs the target image according to the color value obtained after the modulation. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153825 | TECHNIQUE FOR ENABLING COLOR BLIND PERSONS TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN VARIOUS COLORS - Systems and methods for processing data representative of a full color image. Such systems may comprise the steps of assisting a color blind person to indicate portions of an image which to their color-deficient vision are indistinguishable, and altering the image to cause those portions to become distinguishable and identifiable. | 06-05-2014 |
20140161350 | COLOR TRANSLATION METHOD AND COLOR TRANSLATION APPARATUS - A color translation method and a color translation apparatus adapted to map a data point from a first color space to a second color space are provided. At least four color axes coordinating with a plurality of first reference points and a plurality of second reference points corresponding to the first reference points are used to divide the first color space and second color space into a plurality of first sub-spaces and a plurality of second sub-spaces. A target first sub-space where the data point is located is found, and then a corresponding target second sub-space is also found. According to a positional relationship between the data point and the first reference points which define the target first sub-space, an interpolation operation is applied to the second reference points which define the target second sub-space so as to obtain a mapped point in the second color space. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169671 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COLOR RESTORATION - Provided is a method and apparatus for restoring color of an input image. The method includes: separating multiple band information of a near infrared (NIR) channel from information of the input image by using a correlation between a color channel and the NIR channel in the input image; obtaining estimated invisible light band information of the NIR channel from the multiple band information of the NIR channel and estimated multiple band information of the NIR channel which is estimated from the color channel; estimating invisible light band information of the color channel based on the estimated invisible light band information of the NIR channel; and restoring a visible light band image of the color channel by removing the estimated invisible light band information of the color channel from multiple band information of the color channel included in the information of the input image. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177960 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PROCESSING IMAGE - An image processing apparatus and method for restoring an image which is expected to be when there is no fog from a foggy image, the image processing method including: generating a pixel depth image of the foggy image by estimating a plurality of pixel depths of a plurality of pixels, respectively, included in the foggy image based on a channel difference between at least two of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) channels of the foggy image; processing the pixel depth image; obtaining an optical model parameter with respect to the foggy image; and restoring an image, which is expected to be when the foggy image does not include the fog, by using the processed pixel depth image and the optical model parameter. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185931 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing device for performing image processing on a facial image including a mouth of a person is provided, comprising a first organ likelihood identification unit configured to identify, based on a difference between a color of a location and a first representative color which is a representative color of an organ to be processed, a likelihood of the location being the organ as a first organ likelihood for each location of a first region including at least a part of the mouth; a first weight determination unit configured to determine a first weight which becomes smaller the greater a distance from a first location of the first region for each location; a correction degree determination unit configured to determine a correction degree of the location which becomes greater the greater the first organ likelihood and the first weight; and an image correction unit configured to correct an image. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185932 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus and a method thereof for correcting image data in accordance with a feature of the image data, calculates a brightness component of image data and a color difference component of image data, determines whether the image data is a nightscape image or an underexposed image using the calculated brightness component and color difference component, and corrects the image data which has been determined as a nightscape image or an underexposed image. | 07-03-2014 |
20140198984 | Method for Establishing an Evaluation Standard Parameter and Method for Evaluating the Quality of a Display Image - The present invention discloses a method for establishing an evaluation standard parameter and method for evaluating the quality of a display image, wherein, the method comprises: taking pictures to a group of test images having different color shift severity degrees to obtain a sample picture group; selecting a standard picture by human eye; applying the Fourier transform for the brightness of the pictures of the sample picture group; applying convolution to the frequency distribution function and a contrast sensitivity function of human eye in the frequency domain; normalizing to the convolution function to obtain an evaluation parameter; selecting the evaluation parameter of the standard picture from the evaluation parameters of all the pictures of the sample picture group as an evaluation standard parameter. The present invention can obtain more objective and systemic evaluation standard parameter. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198985 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COLOR INTERPOLATION UPON CAPTURED IMAGES AND RELATED METHOD THEREOF - An image processing method includes: receiving image data from a frame buffer, wherein each pixel of the image data has only one color information; estimating four second color information corresponding to up, down, left, and right sides of the target pixel respectively according to a first color information of the target pixel per se and color information of the neighboring pixels for a target pixel of the image data; calculating four color difference gradients corresponding to up, down, left, and right sides of the target pixel respectively according to the four second color information of the target pixel; determining an edge texture characteristic of the target pixel according to the four color difference gradients of the target pixel; and determining whether to modify the bit value of the first color information of the target pixel stored in a frame buffer according to an edge texture characteristic of the target pixel. | 07-17-2014 |
20140205192 | IMAGE DEFOGGING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Image defogging method and system. The method includes: acquiring minimum intensity values corresponding to pixels in a foggy image, and selecting the largest values of intensity values of R, G, and B channels of pixels in an area, covered by a brightest area of a predetermined size in a local minimum intensity image, in the foggy image as component values of R, G, and B channels of an atmosphere light value; acquiring a transformation image of the foggy image with atmosphere light value of the foggy image; acquiring a transmission map of the foggy image by edge-preserving filtering the transformation image; and acquiring intensity values of R, G, and B channels of pixels in a defogged image using transmission map and atmosphere light value of the foggy image and intensity values of R, G, and B channels of pixels in the foggy image. | 07-24-2014 |
20140212035 | Color space color value determination from digital image - A device captures a digital image of a color of interest and a physical color calibration chart. A corrected color value of the color of interest is determined based on the physical color calibration chart and the color of interest as captured within the digital image. A selected color value for the corrected color value is determined, as a closest color value within a predetermined color space or as a spot color value within the predetermined color space. | 07-31-2014 |
20140212036 | Pyramid collapse color interpolation - One exemplary embodiment involves receiving an image with a set of undefined pixels and a set of defined pixels and recursively modifying the image to generate a seamless composition comprising only defined pixels. Disclosed are embodiments for recursively modifying the image by recursively down sampling the image by a factor to generate a plurality of down sampled images until the down sampled image generated at each recursive down sampling lacks undefined pixels and then recursively up sampling each one of the down sampled images by the factor to generate an up sampled image from the respective down sampled image. Additionally, at each recursive up sampling instance, pasting the next recursively occurring down sampled image on the up sampled image to generate the next recursively occurring image for up sampling. | 07-31-2014 |
20140212037 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An image processing apparatus includes a separating unit, an analyzing unit, a determining unit, and an image correcting unit. The separating unit separates a color image into a foreground image and a background image. The analyzing unit analyzes the foreground image and the background image to acquire a foreground attribute value and a background attribute value. The determining unit determines an image processing coefficient, based on the foreground attribute value and the background attribute value. The image correcting unit corrects the color image, in accordance with the image processing coefficient. | 07-31-2014 |
20140247984 | METHODS FOR COLOR CORRECTING DIGITAL IMAGES AND DEVICES THEREOF - A method, non-transitory medium and color correction computing device that identifies an area of interest in a digital image comprising a plurality of pixels. A white point in the identified area of interest is determined. One or more corrected colorimetric data points are determined for each of the plurality of pixels in the identified area of interest based on the determined white point. One or more output colors in the digital image are corrected using the determined one or more corrected colorimetric data points. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254930 | Systems and Methods for Performing Edge Enhancement in Digital Images - A system for editing a digital image comprises a low pass filter for receiving a source image and for filtering high spatial frequency components of the source image to generate a smoothed image. An arithmetic operator unit subtracts color values of the smoothed image from color values of the source image to produce a first image value on pixel-by-pixel basis. A gradient reversal analyzer compares gradient values of the smoothed image to gradient values of the source image and generates a control signal. A boost controller generates a new value for each pixel of a boost parameter map according to the control signal. The boost controller applies the boost parameter map to modify the first image value to generate a second image value. The arithmetic operator unit is further configured to generate an edge enhanced image according to color values of the source image and the second image value. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254931 | Image Recovery Method - An image recovery method is disclosed for eliminating an effect of an environmental medium. The image recovery method includes receiving a captured image affected by the environmental medium, defining a respective local window with each pixel located at a center of the respective local window, and under an assumption that original radiance of all pixels within the respective local window in the captured image are identical, performing a minimization calculation for each local window, to obtain a corresponding transmission of each pixel in the captured image. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254932 | CONTENT ADAPTIVE EDGE AND DETAIL ENHANCEMENT FOR IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING - A content-adaptive edge and detail enhancement apparatus is described for image/video processing. Both 2D peaking and LTI/CTI are used in sharpening pictures. Image analysis is performed to generate a blending factor to control the use of the two peaking techniques. The strength or likelihood of edges or transitions is measured and such a strength or likelihood measurement will be transformed into the blending factor controlling the blending of the LTI/CTI and peaking outputs. | 09-11-2014 |
20140270514 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing method is adapted for color enhancement of an original image pixel. The original image pixel is composed of a plurality of pixel components each having a component value. The image processing method includes: determining a hue region to which the original image pixel belongs based directly on the component values of the pixel components thereof; selecting a color enhancement parameter corresponding to the determined hue region; and obtaining a color enhanced pixel according to the selected color enhancement parameter and the component values of the pixel components of the original image pixel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270515 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing method is adapted for hue adjustment of an original image pixel. The original image pixel is composed of a plurality of pixel components each having a component value. The image processing method includes: determining a hue zone to which the original image pixel belongs based directly on the component values of the pixel components thereof; obtaining a shifted hue zone according to a predefined hue shift amount, the determined hue zone, and the component values of the pixel components of the original image pixel; and obtaining a hue shifted pixel according to the obtained shifted hue zone, and the component values of the pixel components of the original image pixel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270516 | IMAGE ENHANCEMENT METHOD FOR IMPROVING COLOR PERCEPTION OF COLORBLIND VIEWERS - An image enhancement method for improving color perception of colorblind viewers has an image input step, an image difference area analyzing step, an image color distribution adjusting step, and an image output step. In such method, a normal image and a colorblindness-simulative image are input and calculated to produce a colorblindness-optimized image. Color vision obtained by a colorblind person from the colorblindness-optimized image is substantially identical to that obtained by a person with normal color perception from the normal image. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270517 | FRAME OF COLOR SPACE ENCODED IMAGE FOR DISTORTION CORRECTION - Embodiments of the present disclosure can include devices for storing and exchanging color space encoded images. The encoded images can store input data into high capacity multi-colored composite two-dimensional pictures having different symbols organized in specific order using sets in a color space. The encoding can include performing two-level error correction and generating frames based on the color space for formatting and calibrating the encoded images during decoding. The decoding can use the frames to perform color restoration and distortion correction. The decoding can be based on a pseudo-Euclidean distance between a distorted color and a color in a color calibration cells. In some embodiments, an encoded image can be further divided into sub-images during encoding for simplified distortion correction. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270518 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - Among a plurality of CFA images obtained by shooting the same subject, one image is a standard image, and another image is a reference image, and the displacement amount calculation portion calculates the displacement amount of the reference image with respect to the standard image. A synthesis processing portion performs a synthesis processing based on the displacement amount calculated by the displacement amount calculation portion, according to the pixel values of a standard image pixel and a reference image pixel that are corresponding pixels between the standard image and the reference image, so as to generate a combination CFA image. Here, when colors of the corresponding pixels differ between the standard image pixel and the reference image pixel, the synthesis processing portion generates, from the reference image, the pixel value of the same color as the color of the standard image pixel by interpolation processing, and performs the synthesis processing according to the pixel value generated by the interpolation processing and the pixel value of the standard image pixel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270519 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PROVIDING HIGH SENSITIVE COLOR IMAGES - An image processing apparatus and method for generating high-sensitive, high-brightness color images are disclosed. A second image having a wider band and higher-sensitivity than those of a first image which includes color information may be acquired, wherein the first and second images are images captured from a scene. A first transformed image having high brightness may be generated by performing binning on the first image, and edge information being a high-frequency component may be extracted from the second image. A high-brightness, high-sensitive color image may be generated using the first transformed image and the edge information. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270520 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - This image processing apparatus performs image processing on an image including image data with a negative value, and is provided with: a transformation unit that performs a nonlinear transformation processing on the image including image data with a negative value to transform the image into an image that does not include image data with a negative value; an image processing unit that performs predetermined image processing on the image that does not include image data with a negative value; and an inverse transformation unit that performs an inverse transformation processing of the nonlinear transformation processing on the image, having been subjected to the image processing, which does not include image data with a negative value so as to inversely transform the image into an image, having been subjected to the image processing, which includes image data with a negative value. | 09-18-2014 |
20140270521 | Color Enhancement for Graphic Images - A color enhancement system may enhance color components in an image. In one embodiment, the color enhancement system suppresses banding by combining an input color value with an enhanced colored value. In another embodiment, local variation in saturation values around a pixel may be used to determine a modification of an input saturation value for color enhancement. As still another embodiment, flickering between frames may be suppressed by combining a histogram that counts the number of times a given pixel value occurs in a particular image with a historical histogram that keeps track of an average of how often given values have occurred in previous frames. | 09-18-2014 |
20140294298 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INVERSE HALFTONING UTILIZING INVERSE PROJECTION OF PREDICTED ERRORS - A method and system generates a reconstructed gray scale image of pixels from a binary image of pixels by reverse propagating an error, in a diffused manner, to the pixels of the binary image to create pixels representing a reconstructed gray scale image. The reverse propagation of the error determines if a current pixel has a first predetermined value; sets an error value to a first error value if the current pixel has the first predetermined value; sets the error value to a second error value if the current pixel does not have the first predetermined value; and propagates a diffused error value to a pixel neighboring the current pixel to create an error diffused pixel, the diffused error value being a product of the set error value and a weighting coefficient associated with the pixel neighboring the current pixel. A Gaussian filter may be utilized to filter the pixels representing a gray scale image to create a filtered reconstructed gray scale image of pixels. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294299 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - An apparatus and method for out-focusing a color image based on a depth image, the method including receiving an input of a depth region of interest (ROI) desired to be in focus for performing out-focusing in the depth image, and applying different blur models to pixels corresponding to the depth ROI, and pixels corresponding to a region, other than the depth ROI, in the color image, thereby performing out-focusing on the depth ROI. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301642 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR GENERATING IMAGES OF SCENES HAVING HIGH DYNAMIC RANGE - In an example embodiment a method, apparatus and computer program product are provided. The method includes facilitating receipt of two or more images of a scene, where the two or more images are associated with different capture parameters. The method includes determining intensity gains at corresponding pixel locations of at least one image pair of the two or more images. The method further includes generating a blended image by blending pixels of images of the at least one image pair based at least on the intensity gains. A pixel associated with a pixel location of the blended image is generated by blending pixels associated with the pixel location of the images of the at least one image pair. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301643 | Blemish Removal - A method of removing blemishes from an image. The method receives a selection of an area of an image, divides the area into at least two interior sub-areas, and replaces the colors of each sub-area independently from each other sub-area. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307963 | Defringing RAW Images - This disclosure pertains to novel devices, methods, and computer readable media for performing color defringing on image data. In photography, particularly RAW images, different artifacts can affect the quality of the edges of objects in the image. This effect is generally more noticeable when the edge has high contrast. One motivation for the described techniques is the understanding that, typically, not all pixels of an image exhibit color fringing. Usually, fringing only occurs in high-contrast edges. Mere masking of the effects of the whole-image operations can improve the result, but further improvements are still possible. This disclosure also pertains to novel devices and computer readable media for performing red-blue color reconstruction on data from a variety of color filter arrays (CFAs). | 10-16-2014 |
20140307964 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS OF INPUT IMAGE - A method of adjusting a brightness of an input image includes performing brightness conversion on a brightness component value of the input image, and compensating a chroma value of the input image based on input image information and a brightness value obtained from the brightness conversion, wherein the input image information includes a chroma component value and the brightness component value of the input image. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307965 | BAND DEPENDENT LINEARIZATION FOR MULTIBAND REMOTELY SENSED AND AERIAL IMAGERY - A system for processing a multiband image, including digital computer memory for storing a multiband image having multiple bands of image data; and processing circuitry for processing the multiband image, wherein the processing circuitry (a) determines pixel locations in the bands of the multiband image having values above the band-specific white value threshold for each of the bands of the multiband image, (b) determines a band-specific correction factor for each of plural bands of the multiband image based on the determined pixel locations, and (c) applies the corresponding band-specific correction factor to the respective plural bands of the multiband image to produce a corrected image. | 10-16-2014 |
20140314317 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING GRAY LEVEL OF COLOR IMAGE - A method and apparatus for converting a gray level of a color image are provided. The method of converting the gray level includes determining an intermediate RGB value which corresponds to an input RGB value of the color image, based on color mapping information in which target RGB values, mapped to the gray levels of the color image, are preset; determining whether the input RGB value is included in a gray region or a color region, based on a gray variation of the input RGB value; and, if the input RGB value is determined to be included in the gray region, converting the input RGB value by using the intermediate RGB value. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321741 | METHODS OF PROCESSING MOSAICKED IMAGES - An embodiment of the invention provides a method of processing a mosaicked image. First, the mosaicked image is up-sampled along a first direction to generate a first intermediate image. Then, the first intermediate image is resized along the first direction to generate a second intermediate image. Next, the second intermediate image is up-sampled along a second direction to generate a third intermediate image. Afterward, the third intermediate image is resized along the second direction to generate a resized and partly demosaicked image. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321742 | Method for Processing Highlights and Saturated Regions in a Digital Image - A method for performing highlight restoration on a digital image includes comparing the pixels in the image with a saturation level value to identify saturated pixels. A saturation map of saturated pixels is generated. Each selected saturated pixel is identified as a restorable pixel only if at least one color channel of the pixel is unsaturated. For each restorable pixel, a group of the closest unsaturated pixels above, below, to the left, and to the right of the select saturated pixel is identified. A replacement pixel value is generated for each saturated color channel of the restorable pixel, using a combination of the pixel values of the unsaturated color channels of the restorable pixel and the pixel values of the corresponding color channels of the nearby unsaturated pixels. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321743 | Method for Processing Highlights and Saturated Regions in a Digital Image - A method for performing highlight restoration on a digital image includes comparing the pixels in the image with a saturation level value to identify saturated pixels. A saturation map of saturated pixels is generated. Each selected saturated pixel is identified as a restorable pixel only if at least one color channel of the pixel is unsaturated. For each restorable pixel, a group of the closest unsaturated pixels above, below, to the left, and to the right of the select saturated pixel is identified. A replacement pixel value is generated for each saturated color channel of the restorable pixel, using a combination of the pixel values of the unsaturated color channels of the restorable pixel and the pixel values of the corresponding color channels of the nearby unsaturated pixels. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321744 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING IMAGE NOISE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for reducing image noise. The method includes decomposing an original image into a luminance channel image and at least one chrominance channel image, and calculating a weighted average value of each pixel of the luminance channel image and the chrominance channel image by using luminance information, to correct each pixel of the luminance channel image and the chrominance channel image. By virtue of the embodiments of the present invention, it is possible to effectively avoid color dispersion at edges of images, to achieve easy implementation, and to effect low cost. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321745 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS HAVING A PLURALITY OF IMAGE PROCESSING BLOCKS THAT ARE CAPABLE OF REAL-TIME PROCESSING OF AN IMAGE SIGNAL - An image processing apparatus is provided which offers higher versatility than conventional image processing apparatuses. When an input signal to a spatial filtering block is a monochrome signal that contains Y component only, a selector selects its input terminal and a selector selects its input terminal. Then, a low-pass filter output signal of a programmable spatial filter is inputted to a spatial filter, and a low-pass filter output signal of the spatial filer is inputted to a spatial filter. That is, the programmable spatial filter and the spatial filters are connected in series (in cascade), and the cascade-connected three spatial filters perform filtering operation. In this example, low-pass filters with 5H5 taps are connected in cascade in three stages, which enables low-pass filtering with 13H13 taps. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328538 | IMAGE SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM USING THE SAME - An image signal processing device is disclosed, including a sensitivity improvement unit, a Bayer RGB conversion unit, and a color correction unit. The sensitivity improvement unit interpolates input white, red, green, and blue (WRGB) data, mixes a luminance signal of first color space data for the interpolated WRGB data with a first type pixel signal of the interpolated WRGB data to convert the first color space data into second color space data, and converts the second color space data into converted RGB data. The Bayer RGB conversion unit converts color spaces of a second type pixel signal, a third type pixel signal, and a fourth type pixel signal of the interpolated WRGB data to generate the first color space data, and separates the luminance signal and color difference signals from the first color space data. The color correction unit corrects the converted RGB data into output RGB data. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328539 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING COLOR - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for enhancing color, and relate to the image processing field, so as to solve a case of over enhancement on a region having high luminance in an original image which is caused after enhancement processing is performed. A specific solution is: obtaining a luminance component of a currently processed image; performing Gaussian filtering processing on the luminance component to obtain an illumination component; obtaining a first reflection component of the currently processed image according to the luminance component and the illumination component; performing enhancement adjustment on the first reflection component to obtain a second reflection component; obtaining a luminance gain according to the luminance component and the second reflection component; and performing enhancement processing on the currently processed image, to obtain a first enhanced image. The present invention is applicable to a process of color enhancement. | 11-06-2014 |
20140334725 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONSTRUCTING INDEXED COLOR SPACES - A computer implemented method and apparatus for reconstructing indexed color spaces. The method comprises accessing a plurality of indexed color spaces, wherein each indexed color space comprises a bit depth; and creating one or more unions of two or more indexed color spaces from the plurality of indexed color spaces, wherein the bit depth of the union of the two or more indexed color does not exceed the bit depth of any of the two or more indexed color spaces. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334726 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING NOISE LEVEL - A method for determining noise levels in a subband of an image. The method comprises receiving the subband of the image, defining block regions in at least two space domains of the subband, for each defined block region, identifying first wavelet coefficients associated with coordinate values in the at least two space domains in the defined block region, computing a correlation matrix between identified wavelet coefficients to determine the correlation between first wavelet coefficients according to the at least one color domain, computing second wavelet coefficients, the computation of second wavelet coefficients being based on the correlation matrix and the first wavelet coefficients, computing at least one noise level, the noise level computation being based on at least one second wavelet coefficient and providing the at least one noise level. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334727 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DESCRIBING IMAGE - A method and apparatus for describing an image are disclosed. The method for describing an image according to an embodiment of the invention includes: transforming an image from a BGR color space into a Gaussian derivative color model; and transforming the image from the Gaussian derivative color model into an optical reflection invariant color space, wherein the process of transforming the image from the Gaussian derivative color model into the optical reflection invariant color space includes: determining, for each pixel on the image, color channels of the pixel corresponding to the optical reflection invariant color space according to a first coefficient and a second coefficient of the pixel in the Gaussian derivative color model. The embodiments of the invention can alleviate an error in a description of an image of the same contents but with a significant change in color. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334728 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF SKIN TONE OPTIMIZATION IN A COLOR GAMUT MAPPING SYSTEM - In a method of skin tone optimization in a color gamut mapping system, an image signal is first transformed from a predetermined color domain to an HSV color domain for generating an HSV image signal. Next, a skin tone optimization is performed on the HSV image signal for generating an adjusted saturation gain. Then, a color enhancement is performed on the HSV image signal according to the adjusted saturation gain and a color shift signal so as to generate a color enhancement signal. Finally, the color enhancement signal is transformed from the HSV color domain to the predetermined color domain. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334729 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus includes a first conversion unit configured to convert captured image data based on light source information under shooting illumination, and a second conversion unit configured to convert captured image data that has been converted by the first conversion unit, based on white balance setting information and the light source information. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341467 | METHOD FOR BRIGHTNESS EQUALIZATION OF VARIOUS IMAGES - The present invention provides a method for brightness equalization of a plurality of images to equalize brightness when composing, into a single image, a plurality of images acquired from a plurality of cameras. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341468 | Methods and Apparatus for Tone Mapping High Dynamic Range Images - Methods, apparatus, and computer-readable storage media for tone mapping High Dynamic Range (HDR) images. An input HDR image is separated into luminance and color. Luminance is processed to obtain a base layer and a detail layer. The base layer is compressed according to a non-linear remapping function to reduce the dynamic range, and the detail layer is adjusted. The layers are combined to generate output luminance, and the output luminance and color are combined to generate an output image. A base layer compression technique may be used that analyzes the details and compresses the base layer accordingly to provide space at the top of the intensity scale where the details are displayed to thus generate output images that are visually better than images generated using conventional techniques. User interface elements may be provided via which a user may control one or more parameters of the tone mapping method. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348425 | Delta Interpolation for Upsampling Imaging Solution - An apparatus comprising one or more processors configured to process a first image at a first resolution to generate a first solved image at the first resolution, determine a difference between the first solved image and a function of the first image, and generate a second solved image at a second resolution higher than the first resolution based at least in part on the difference between the first solved image and the function of the first image. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348426 | Spectral Image Processing - A substantially rectangular spectral representation is synthesized, which is adapted to produce either (a) image capture device sensor outputs if applied to an image capture device or (b) color values if applied to corresponding analysis functions. Spectral expansion, which can be used in various image processing methods, is achieved with the synthesized spectral representation. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348427 | AUTOMATIC COLOR CORRECTION - Methods, systems and computer program products for automatic color correction of image and video content are provided. A computer-implemented method may include generating an auto-level linear transform and a histogram equalization transform of a color distribution histogram for an original image among a set of sequential images. The auto-level linear transform and the histogram equalization transform are blended to create a modified image. Pixel color is adjusted in the modified image so that a color difference between a pixel and neighboring pixels in the modified image corresponds to a color difference between respective pixels in the original image. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355876 | Image Signal Processing Device and Method - A G interpolation method selector and an R/B interpolation method selector decide between a first case, which is not a monotonous increase or a monotonous decrease of pixel signals of three pixels in reference pixel signals used for producing an interpolation pixel signal, and a second case, which is the monotonous increase or the monotonous decrease. A G interpolation unit produces an interpolation pixel signal of G in such a manner as to change interpolation methods depending on the first case or the second case. An R/B interpolation unit produces an interpolation pixel signal of R or B in such a manner as to change interpolation methods depending on the first case or the second case. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355877 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A GRAY IMAGE - A method and apparatus for processing a gray image, including: calculating a mean value and a standard difference of each edge pixel needing processing in an original gray image, and determining a predefined noise variance of each edge pixel according to the mean value and the standard difference; performing two-dimensional discrete cosine transform on an original gray image of a first adjacent area of each edge pixel; performing Wiener filtering on the two-dimensional discrete cosine transformed image data according to the noise variance; performing discrete cosine inverse transform on the two-dimensional Wiener filtered image data to obtain a filtered gray image of the first adjacent area; and extracting a filtered pixel value of each edge pixel from the filtered gray image of the first adjacent area, and obtaining a processed pixel value of each edge pixel by performing weighted summation on the filtered pixel value and an original pixel value. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355878 | LUMA-BASED COLOR MATCHING - Some embodiments provide a computer program for performing a color matching operation. The computer program identifies first and second images. Each image includes several pixels. Each pixel includes a luma component value. Based on analysis of the luma component values of the pixels of the first and second images, the computer program determines a set of transforms to modify pixel values of the first image so that the pixel values of the first image are similar to pixel values of the second image. The computer program applies the set of transforms to the first image such that the pixel values of the first image are similar to the pixel values of the second image. | 12-04-2014 |
20140363080 | FILTERING METHOD AND DEVICE IN IMAGE PROCESSING - Embodiments provide a filtering method and device in image processing. The device includes: a dividing unit to divide a first filtering window into blocks; a determining unit to determine a filtering window area according to relevance between a central block and other non-central blocks in the blocks; and a filtering unit to perform filtering processing on an image in the determined filtering window area. With the method and device of the embodiments, a boundary of an object will not be crossed in filtering, and in removing noise, information on other objects will not be introduced to affect the result of filtering. A filtering window size may be determined while filtering is performing, which may be carried out in one path, avoiding time delay resulting from execution of two paths of a conventional method where an edge is detected and then the size of a filtering window is determined. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369601 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENHANCING IMAGE USING COLOR CHANNEL - Provided are an apparatus and method for enhancing an image using a color channel. A pre-processing unit generates an inverted image by inverting a luminance component estimated from a red (R) channel among color channels of a red, green, and blue (RGB) color space of an input image. A channel merging unit generates a merged luminance (L) channel by merging an L channel of an International Commission on Illumination (CIE) L*a*b* (CIELab) color space of the input image and the inverted image. A contrast enhancement unit enhances contrast by expanding a histogram of the merged L channel. A color restoration unit combines the merged L channel whose contrast has been enhanced and chromaticity components of the input image, and converts a resultant color image to the RGB color space, thereby generating a restored image. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376808 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROCESSING IMAGE - A method for processing an image includes: detecting and outputting an attributed of each pixel of input image data; performing a filtering process in which smoothing is performed on the input image data; detecting an edge amount being N value (where N>2) information from the data subjected to the smoothing; removing a chromatic color in a first removal amount according to the detected edge amount from all of the pixels; and removing a chromatic color in a second removal amount according to the detected edge amount from the pixel that has been determined to have a text attribute and an achromatic attribute at the detecting, wherein the second removal amount is determined on the basis of a discrete M value (where M>2) corresponding to the edge amount. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376809 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An image processing apparatus includes a depth control signal generation unit generating a depth control signal controlling emphasis of the feel of each region of an input image based on the depth position of a subject in each region of the input image; a face skin region control signal generation unit generating a face skin region control signal controlling emphasis of the feel of each region in the input image based on the human face skin region in the input image; a person region control signal generation unit generating a person region control signal controlling emphasis of the feel of each region in the input image based on the region of the person in the input image; and a control signal synthesis unit synthesizing the depth control signal, the face skin region control signal, and the person region control signal to generate a control signal. | 12-25-2014 |
20150010233 | Method Of Improving Contrast For Text Extraction And Recognition Applications - An electronic device and method receive (for example, from a memory), a grayscale image of a scene of real world captured by a camera of a mobile device. The electronic device and method also receive a color image from which the grayscale image is generated, wherein each color pixel is stored as a tuple of multiple components. The electronic device and method determine a new intensity for at least one grayscale pixel in the grayscale image, based on at least one component of a tuple of a color pixel located in correspondence to the at least one grayscale pixel. The determination may be done conditionally, by checking whether a local variance of intensities is below a predetermined threshold in a subset of grayscale pixels located adjacent to the at least one grayscale pixel, and selecting the component to provide most local variance of intensities. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010234 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND MEDIA FOR CREATING MULTIPLE LAYERS FROM AN IMAGE - A method for creating a plurality of layer images from an input image is provided. The method includes analyzing an input image for color content to detect at least one dominant color in the image and for shape recognition to detect at least one object in the image. The method also includes generating a concentric grid for the input image based on the color content analysis and the shape recognition for a depth calculation of the input image. The concentric grid includes a center point, a plurality of lines that radiate from the center point, and a plurality of concentric circles that expand at a spatial distance in the input image. The concentric circles divide the input image into a plurality of sections, each of which represents an equal spatial depth. The method further includes generating a plurality of layer images using at least two of the plurality of sections. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016721 | IMAGE-QUALITY IMPROVEMENT METHOD, APPARATUS, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An image-quality improvement method is provided. The image-quality improvement method includes detecting an area of interest from an input image; generating a color distribution map based on a plurality of respective brightness elements and a plurality of respective chroma elements of a plurality of pixels which belong to a predetermined color series and which are in the detected area of interest of the input image; determining a first area, which belongs to the predetermined color series, and a second area, which is an area of the input image other than the first area, according to the color distribution map; and changing values of a plurality of pixels in at least one of the first area and the second area. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016722 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD - A region determination circuit ( | 01-15-2015 |
20150023594 | Transforming Wide Dynamic Range Images to Reduced Dynamic Range Images - A method of transforming an N-bit raw wide dynamic range (WDR) Bayer image to a K-bit raw red-green-blue (RGB) image wherein N>K is provided that includes converting the N-bit raw WDR Bayer image to an N-bit raw RGB image, computing a luminance image from the N-bit raw RGB image, computing a pixel gain value for each luminance pixel in the luminance image to generate a gain map, applying a hierarchical noise filter to the gain map to generate a filtered gain map, applying the filtered gain map to the N-bit raw RGB image to generated a gain mapped N-bit RGB image, and downshifting the gain mapped N-bit RGB image by (N−K) to generate the K-bit RGB image. | 01-22-2015 |
20150030246 | Simulating Strobe Effects with Digital Image Content - Systems and methods are provided for simulating strobe effects with digital image content. In one embodiment, an image manipulation application can receive image content. The image manipulation application can generate blurred image content by applying a blurring operation to a portion of the received image content along a blur trajectory. The image manipulation application can sample pixels from multiple positions in the received image content along the blur trajectory. The image manipulation application can generate a simulated strobe images based on the sampled pixels and at least some of the blurred image content. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030247 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CORRECTING IMAGE ARTIFACTS - Certain aspects relate to systems and techniques for correction of color artifacts including both color aberration and color spot artifacts using a unified framework. For example, both color aberration and color spot artifacts can be corrected using a post-processing method implementing directional median filtering on chroma channels. A pixel-by-pixel correction ratio map can be built by analyzing the luma and chroma components of the image to indicate a type of color artifact associated with each pixel in the image, and a directional median filter can be selected for each pixel based on the corresponding correction ratio map value. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036926 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING DEPTH IMAGE IN HIGH RESOLUTION - Provided are a method and an apparatus for image processing. A scene includes a low resolution depth image and a high resolution color image. A depth image up-scaler up-scales the depth image using an interpolation so as to improve the resolution of the depth image. A color-depth similarity based filter removes noise from the up-scaled depth image using the color image and the up-scaled depth image. A boundary sharpening filter converts a boundary between objects in the up-scaled depth image into a clearer boundary. The resolution of the depth image may increase to the level of the resolution of the color image by means of the depth image up-scaler, the color-depth similarity based filter and the boundary sharpening filter, and the depth of each pixel in the depth image may be adjusted. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036927 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF COMPENSATING CHROMATIC ABERRATION OF IMAGE - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method of correcting a chromatic aberration of an image, and in particular, to an apparatus and method of correcting a chromatic aberration of an image that can correct a general chromatic aberration of an edge or an extreme chromatic aberration, such as a purple fringe, in an image. An apparatus for correcting a chromatic aberration of an image according to an embodiment of the present invention includes an edge detection unit detecting an edge of an input image, a level calculation unit calculating a chromatic aberration level of the detected edge, and a correction unit correcting the edge using different weighted values according to the calculated chromatic aberration level. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043817 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - An image processing method includes: a generating step of generating a cumulative histogram of density values of pixels included in at least each of a first image and a second image; a calculating step of calculating a distance between a density value on a first histogram generated from the first image and a density value on a second histogram generated from the second image, in a space defined to include histogram frequencies of the cumulative histograms and the density values; and a determining step of determining a correspondence relation between the density values included in the first image and the density values included in the second image based on the calculated distances between the density values, and determining a conversion function for correcting a density value between the first image and the second image based on the determined correspondence relation. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043818 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECOVERING IMAGES DAMAGED BY WEATHER PHENOMENA - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for recovering images damaged by weather phenomena, including: an input unit for receiving an image; a damaged image detection unit for detecting an image damaged by weather phenomena; an image recovery unit for recovering the damaged image; and an output unit for outputting the recovered image, wherein the damaged image recovery unit can recover the contrast and/or color of the damaged image. | 02-12-2015 |
20150055861 | Methods and Systems for Image Demosaicing - A method for demosaicing color filter array (“CFA”) pixels, comprises the steps of: receiving an array of the CFA pixels; demosaicing certain ones of the CFA pixels as a function of the relative vertical positions of the certain ones of the CFA pixels in the array, wherein the certain ones of the CFA pixels are along a first column of the array; and outputting, in parallel, the demosaiced certain ones of the CFA pixels for post-processing of the CFA pixels. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055862 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - An image processing apparatus comprises: a separation unit configured to separate image data into a luminance signal and a color difference signal; a decision unit configured to decide a reference pixel, which is referenced for a pixel of interest included in the image data; a luminance noise reduction unit configured to reduce luminance noise in the luminance signal of the image data; a weight calculation unit configured to calculate a weight of the reference pixel based on similarity of luminance included in the luminance signal having been subjected to noise reduction by the luminance noise reduction unit between a first area containing the pixel of interest and a second area containing the reference pixel; and a color noise reduction unit configured to reduce color noise in the color difference signal for the pixel of interest by using the weight of the reference pixel. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055863 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - An image processing apparatus that can suppress a tint phenomenon in image recovery processing and a method of controlling the same are disclosed. A saturation determination unit determines whether or not a saturated pixel is included in a reference region referred to by filter processing units. An R component output adjustment unit and a B component output adjustment unit adjust corresponding color components resulting from image recovery processing according to the determination result obtained by the saturation determination unit. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055864 | Image Processing Apparatus and Sheet - An image processing apparatus includes a processor and a memory storing instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the image processing apparatus to perform: receiving target image data representing a target image; determining, from a plurality of pixels in the target image, a plurality of first-type pixels having a color value within a specific range having a color value indicating a color of a conversion target; calculating, for each of the plurality of first-type pixels, non-uniformity of color values of a plurality of pixels in a specific surrounding area including the first-type pixels; determining, from the plurality of first-type pixels, a second-type pixel which non-uniformity is a reference value or less, and converting a color value of the second-type pixel into a specific color value. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063694 | TECHNIQUES FOR COMBINING IMAGES WITH VARYING BRIGHTNESS DEGREES - Techniques are described for combining two or more images that are taken with varying brightness degrees to generate a composite image. In one embodiment, at least two weight masks are generated based on one or more characteristics of the two or more images. A first image A first weight mask is used to combine color channels of one or more pixels of the two or more images and a second weight mask is used to combine intensity channels of the one or more pixels of the two or more images. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071533 | GUIDED IMAGE UPSAMPLING USING BITMAP TRACING - A method of increasing resolution of an image includes generating vector contours associated with a first image and scaling the vector contours to a second resolution. The first image has a first resolution, and the second resolution is greater than the first resolution. The vector contours are rendered to generate a guiding image at the second resolution, and a second image is generated from the first image based on the guiding image, by using joint upsampling. The second image is generated at the second resolution. The vector contours can be generated by bitmap tracing binary images at different quantization levels. An apparatus and computer readable device implementing the method of increasing the resolution of an image are also provided. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071534 | System, Device and Method for Displaying a Harmonized Combined Image - A method for harmonizing a combined image involves receiving a respective image or image frame from each of two or more cameras, the images from two of the cameras representing the same region in an overlap region, measuring pixel statistics of at least some of the pixels in the overlap region for the image of each of the two cameras, determining a difference in the pixel statistics Δ | 03-12-2015 |
20150071535 | METHOD AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING COLOR ARTIFACT OF IMAGE - A method for correcting color shading artifact of an image and associated apparatus is provided. The method comprises: providing a plurality of bases, calculating a plurality of coefficients respectively associated with the bases, generating a correction map by summing the bases respectively weighted by with the coefficients, and providing a corrected image by correcting the image according to the correction map. Each basis is capable of providing a basic correction value for each pixel of an intermediate image which is associated with the image. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071536 | SATURATION VARYING COLOR SPACE - A first color component of a pixel or scene entity is modified using a color correction curve defined at least partly by a second color component of this pixel or entity. Each pixel or entity has its own separate color correction curve, independent of the color correction curves of other pixels or entities. The saturation value of a pixel or scene entity may be modified based on its luminance value. The luminance value determines a saturation gamma function curve, mapping the original saturation value of a pixel or entity to a new saturation value. The unilluminated color of a pixel or of an illuminated entity in a scene being rendered may also be taken into account. This output color may be stored in the appropriate pixel of an image or combined with colors from other portions of the scene being rendered. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078660 | Management Method of Color Data of Chromatic Image - The invention discloses a method of managing color data based on color data in an HSaIn format in an HSaIn color space, comprising: acquiring color data in an XYZ format at an input device side; converting the acquired color data in the XYZ format at the input device side into color data in an HSaIn format. The method can further comprise mapping the color data in the HSaIn format at the input device side to obtain color data in an HSaIn format at an output device side; converting the color data in the HSaIn format at the output device side into color data in an XYZ format; converting the color data in the XYZ format at the output device side into one in a format of the color data of the output device. Since a conversion of chromatic color data independent of the device into chromatic color data dependent on the output device is achieved in this method, the output chromatic image is not influenced by color characteristics of the output device; and the analytical matrix operation adopted in the managing process is easily achieved, so the calculating process for the conversion is simple, the conversion accuracy and efficiency are improved, and the conversion speed is accelerated | 03-19-2015 |
20150078661 | HIGH DYNAMIC RANGE AND TONE MAPPING IMAGING TECHNIQUES - Algorithms for improving the performance of conventional tone mapping operators (TMO) by calculating both a contrast waste score and a contrast loss score for a first tone-mapped image produced by the TMO. The two contrast scores can be used to optimize the performance of the TMO by reducing noise and improving contrast. Algorithms for generating an HDR image by converting non-linear color space images into linear color space format, aligning the images to a reference, de-ghosting the aligned images if necessary, and merging the aligned (and potentially de-ghosted) images to create an HDR image. The merging can be performed with exposure fusion, HDR reconstruction, or other suitable techniques. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078662 | METHOD FOR NOISE-ROBUST COLOR CHANGES IN DIGITAL IMAGES - A method for applying filters to digital images with minimal amplification of image noise, comprising filtering the digital image with an EPDR edge-preserving detail-reducing filter, determining a matrix from the filtered image as a result of one or more structure adaptive functions, and modifying the digital image using the filter, adjusted by the matrix values, to produce an enhanced digital image. The order of processing may be inverted, by first determining the matrix and then filtering the matrix with the edge-preserving detail-reducing filter. | 03-19-2015 |
20150093025 | IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - An image processing module is provided. A de-mosaic unit in the image processing module includes an edge direction detection unit and a multi-pixel directional interpolation unit. The edge direction detection unit is used to determine a first color row luminance difference according to a plurality of first color pixels of a pixel row of raw data, and determine a first color column luminance difference according to a plurality of first color pixels of a pixel column of raw data. The multi-pixels directional interpolation unit is used to determine pixel luminance of a third color array according to the first color column luminance difference, the first color row luminance difference, the third color pixels adjacent to a first color pixel and the third color pixels adjacent to a second color pixel. | 04-02-2015 |
20150093026 | Conservative Morphological Anti-Aliasing - Conservative morphological anti-aliasing may include four basic logical steps, (1) image analysis for color discontinuities (afterwards stored in a local compressed ‘edge’ buffer), (2) extracting locally dominant edges with a small kernel, (3) handling of simple shapes, and (4) handling of symmetrical long edge shape. | 04-02-2015 |
20150093027 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus for processing image data formed by a set of pixel data includes a real space filter processing unit and a color space filter processing unit, wherein the real space filter processing unit calculates a real space weighting coefficient and performs weighted average of pixel data according to filter processing of an edge preservation type; pixel data of at least a target pixel of pixel data used in the color space filter processing unit is pixel data calculated by the real space filter processing unit; and of the pixel data which the color space filter processing unit uses for the weighted average, the pixel data of the target pixel is pixel data calculated by the real space filter processing unit, and the pixel data of a peripheral pixel is pixel data forming the image data before being input to the real space filter processing unit. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098650 | Systems and Methods to Optimize Conversions for Wide Gamut Opponent Color Spaces - Novel methods and systems for color space conversions are disclosed, relating to the optimization of a transformation matrix to convert between wide gamut opponent color spaces. The optimization may be based on whether the color values are in or out of gamut. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098651 | COLOR BALANCE IN DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for generating a blended pixel. In use, a first image and a second image are received. Next, a motion transform between the first image and the second image is estimated, and an aligned first image and an aligned second image are rendered based on the motion transform. Further, a first intensity for a first pixel associated with the aligned first image is calculated, a second intensity for a second pixel associated with the aligned second image is calculated, and a blend value based on the first intensity, the second intensity, and a blend surface function is calculated. Additionally, a blended pixel associated is generated with a blended image by blending the first pixel with the second pixel based on the blend value. Lastly, the blended pixel within the blended image is stored. Additional systems, methods, and computer program products are also presented. | 04-09-2015 |
20150104100 | Image Processing Method and Apparatus, and Shooting Terminal - An image processing method and apparatus, and a shooting terminal, where the method includes acquiring a to-be-processed image that is shot but is not image-processed; extracting shooting characteristic information of the to-be-processed image; performing image processing on the to-be-processed image according to the shooting characteristic information. In this way, after acquiring a to-be-processed image that is shot, a shooting terminal uses shooting characteristic information of the to-be-processed image as a basis of adaptive processing of the image, and performs processing on each to-be-processed image according to shooting characteristic information of each to-be-processed image, so that the quality of an image that is obtained after being processed by the shooting terminal can be adaptively improved. | 04-16-2015 |
20150110396 | METHOD FOR COLOR BALANCING UNDERWATER PHOTOGRAPHY - A system and method that receives and edits image data of an underwater scene in a digital image in order to remove undesirable tints from objects in the scene. In some embodiments, colors near the color of the water itself are protected to leave the water looking blue. Removing undesirable tints without removing the tint of the water itself results in images with more realistic coloring of people and objects in the scene, without eliminating the color cues (e.g., blue water) that indicate that the image is a photograph of an underwater scene. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110397 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD - In image data having a first number of gradations, an image processing device calculates the number of pixels having luminance within a region, for each region obtained by dividing the range of luminance in the image data into a plurality of regions. The image processing device selects a region from the plurality of regions based on the number of pixels having luminance within the region. The image processing device sets the luminance of the pixels having luminance within the selected region to be within a second number of gradations that is less than the first number of gradations, and sets the luminance of pixels having luminance within a region that has not been selected to a minimum value or a maximum value. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110398 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - Provided is an image processing apparatus capable of adjusting a color of an image of an observation target depending on differences between viewing angles. The image processing apparatus obtains a viewing angle of a first observation target and a viewing angle of a second observation target, and then corrects the color of each observation target by using the obtained viewing angles of the first and second observation targets. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110399 | Correcting Chrominance Values Based onTone-Mapped Luminance Values - A tone mapping unit applies tone mapping to a block of pixel values. In each of a plurality of iterations, one or more lines of pixel values are processed based on information relating to pixel values of at least one previous line of the block which have been processed in at least one previous iteration. The information is used to determine one or more tone mapping relationships which is/are used to map the pixel values of the current line to tone-mapped pixel values. Furthermore, the information is updated based on the pixel values of the current line and stored for use in processing pixel values of a subsequent line of pixel values of the block in a subsequent iteration. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110400 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FACILITATING COLOR COMMUNICATION - In accordance with an example embodiment a method, apparatus and computer program product are provided. The method includes computing a first set of tuning parameters indicative of a color correction associated with a media output component of an apparatus. Also, the method includes computing a second set of tuning parameters indicative of a color correction associated with a media capturing component of the apparatus. The first set of tuning parameters and the second set of tuning parameters are associated with the apparatus for facilitating color tuning of the apparatus. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117775 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING GRADATIONS AND DEVICE OR METHOD FOR DETERMINING THRESHOLD OF EPSILON FILTER - An object is to correct gradations in such a manner that both halo reduction effect and Retinex calculation effect are satisfied. Each JND value corresponding to each obtained luminance value to be assigned to each unit gradation of a panel is obtained. A pixel value corresponding to the each JND value is obtained for each of the unit gradations of the panel. A threshold ε is obtained by inverse gamma-correcting the ratio between discernible JND values corresponding to the unit gradations of the panel and the maximum output value of the panel. Linear function-based approximations are obtained using least squares. The threshold ε is determined as an increasing function of a pixel value on the basis of the allowable number of JND steps. The threshold ε is changed using this function. The threshold ε can be changed according to the center pixel value. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117776 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus includes a processing unit configured to execute image processing on an image signal; a filtering unit configured to execute filtering processing; and a changing unit configured to, in a case where a range of a value which a predetermined color component of the image signal can take is changed from a first range to a second range narrower than the first range by the image processing, change the value of the predetermined color component of the filtered image signal based on the first range and the second range. | 04-30-2015 |
20150125077 | GRADIENT ASSISTED IMAGE RESAMPLING IN MICRO-LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING - The present disclosure relates to the re-sampling of pixel data, with one application being micro-lithography. In particular, it relates to the extraction of modulator pixels from a rasterized image, as a function of how the modulator moves across the rasterized image. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131906 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM, PRINTING MEDIUM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - When obtaining subband signals by performing multiresolution decomposition on image data using a broad-sense pinwheel framelet or a pinwheel wavelet frame, having a degree, that is a set of an approximate filter with no orientation and a plurality of detail filters with respective orientations, and acquiring processed image data by the subband signals in a decomposition phase of the multiresolution decomposition, or processed image data that has been reconstructed into an image by summing the subband signals in a synthesis phase of the multiresolution decomposition, the present invention performs attenuation or amplification of the subband signals in the decomposition phase of the multiresolution decomposition that correspond to at least one of the filters. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131907 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An device, method and program may properly perform gamut conversion of content and be applied to a gamut conversion device. A restoration conversion state confirming unit performs confirmation such as gamut conversion state of image data read out from an optical disc and the existence or not of restoration metadata. An information exchange unit communicates with an output device via a communication unit and performs information exchange such as the existence or not of restoration processing functionality and gamut conversion functionality and the like. A determining unit determines whether or not restoration processing is performed with a playing device based on information obtained by the restoration conversion state confirming unit and the information exchange unit. Similarly, the determining unit determines whether or not to perform gamut conversion processing with the playing device based on information obtained by the restoration conversion state confirming unit and the information exchange unit. | 05-14-2015 |
20150139543 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ENHANCING AN IMAGE UTILIZING A HYPER-CLARITY TRANSFORM - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for enhancing an image utilizing a hyper-clarity transform. In use, an image is identified. Additionally, the identified image is enhanced, utilizing a hyper-clarity transform. Further, the enhanced image is returned. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139544 | METHOD OF EMBEDDING OF AN IMAGE WITH A COLOR TRANSFORM - The method comprises the generation of a deteriorated image associated with a first bit rate and of a deteriorated color transform associated with a second bit rate, an evaluation of a first distortion by comparison of the image with a first test image obtained by the application of the color transform to the deteriorated image, and of a second distortion by comparison of the image with a second test image obtained by the application of the deteriorated color transform to the image, and the determination of a final conjoint bit rate associated with a best trade-off between a conjoint bit rate (R=R1+R2) and a global distortion (dE=dE1+DE2). The optimized deteriorated image and the optimized deteriorated color transform are then embedded based on this conjoint bit rate. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146979 | TECHNIQUES TO REDUCE COLOR ARTIFACTS IN A DIGITAL IMAGE - Techniques for reducing color artifacts in a digital image are described. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may comprise logic, at least a portion of which is in hardware, the logic to determine a respective set of error values for each of a set of lens shading correction (LSC) tables, each set of error values describing error associated with application of its corresponding LSC table to a preprocessed image, determine a respective weight for each of the set of LSC tables based on the corresponding set of error values for that LSC table, and generate a composite LSC table for the preprocessed image as a weighted sum of the set of LSC tables, based on the respective weights for the set of LSC tables. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146980 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY STORAGE MEDIUM - At least one image processing apparatus, and at least one method, of the present invention(s) generate a corrected image obtained by removing, from a color image whose pixel values contain components derived from scattered light, at least part of the components derived from the scattered light. The at least one image processing apparatus includes a generation unit configured to generate the corrected image by correcting a pixel value of a first color component of each pixel in the color image by using a first reference intensity and a weight value, and by correcting a pixel value of a second color component of each pixel in the color image by using a second reference intensity and a weight value. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146981 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONVERTING INPUT IMAGE DATA INTO OUTPUT IMAGE DATA, IMAGE CONVERSION UNIT FOR CONVERTING INPUT IMAGE DATA INTO OUTPUT IMAGE DATA, IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, DISPLAY DEVICE - In a method and device for improving image rendition by contrast and/or sharpness enhancement the sharpness enhancement is made dependent on the local average luminance value. A mix is made of spatially enhanced image signals is used, wherein for various signal differing spatial frequencies are boosted. The mixing factors for mixing of the boosted signals are dependent on a local average luminance value such that the distribution over frequency bands shifts to higher frequencies and sharper enhancement as the luminance value increases. | 05-28-2015 |
20150296193 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RGB IMAGE PROCESSING - Systems and methods for processing image data in RGB format are provided. In one example, an electronic device includes memory to store image data in raw or RGB format, or both, and an RGB image processing pipeline to process the image data. Specifically, the RGB image processing pipeline may process the image data regardless of whether the image data is of raw or RGB format. The RGB image processing pipeline may include receiving logic to receive the image data in raw or RGB format and demosaicing logic to, when the receiving logic receives the image data in raw format, convert the image data into RGB format. The logic may include local tone mapping logic configured to apply spatially varying tone curves to the image data, a color correction matrix configured to correct color in the image data, and gamma logic configured to transform the image data into gamma space. | 10-15-2015 |
20150302558 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - The image processing device performs noise removal processing for an input image. The image processing device comprises a filter setting unit configured to set first and second filter factors by using a first target pixel value of a noise processing target pixel to be targeted to the processing and a reference pixel value of a plurality of reference pixels surrounding the noise processing target pixel and a noise removal unit configured to calculate a corrected pixel value by sequentially adding a luminance component of the reference pixel value weighted with the first filter factor and sequentially adding a chroma component of the reference pixel value weighted with the second filter factor, and remove noise of the noise processing target pixel by using the corrected pixel value. The input image has pixel values according to Bayer pattern format. | 10-22-2015 |
20150302564 | METHOD FOR MAKING UP A SKIN TONE OF A HUMAN BODY IN AN IMAGE, DEVICE FOR MAKING UP A SKIN TONE OF A HUMAN BODY IN AN IMAGE, METHOD FOR ADJUSTING A SKIN TONE LUMINANCE OF A HUMAN BODY IN AN IMAGE, AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING A SKIN TONE LUMINANCE OF A HUMAN BODY IN AN IMAGE - A method for adjusting a skin tone luminance of a human body in an image including a first receiving unit receiving Y values of the image and a second receiving unit receiving Cb values and Cr values of the image; a filter module generating two different luminance values corresponding to each pixel of the image according to the Y values of the image; a skin tone probability unit generating a probability value of each pixel of the image corresponding to a skin tone of the human body according to the Cb values and the Cr values of the image; and a first mixing unit generating a skin tone luminance adjustment value corresponding to each pixel of the image according to two different luminance values corresponding to each pixel of the image and a probability value of each pixel of the image corresponding to the skin tone of the human body. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304524 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides an image processing apparatus including a skeleton component separation unit configured to separate a skeleton component illustrating a perspective structure from a source image, a mist/fog correction unit configured to calculate, based on color information in each color channel of the skeleton component, a correction factor that lowers brightness of a pixel as the pixel is brighter and correct, based on the correction factor, brightness of each pixel of the source image, and a brightness restoration unit configured to restore brightness of the brightness-corrected source image to brightness of environmental light as target brightness. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304525 | COLOR CORRECTION BASED ON MULTIPLE IMAGES - In some implementations, a method provides color corrections based on multiple images. In some implementations, a method includes determining one or more characteristics of each of a plurality of source images and determining one or more similarities between the one or more characteristics of different source images. The source images are grouped into one or more groups of one or more target images based on the determined similarities. The method determines and applies one or more color corrections to the one or more target images in at least one of the groups. | 10-22-2015 |
20150310592 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS THAT PERFORMS IMAGE RESTORATION PROCESSING AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing apparatus capable of properly suppressing coloring caused by image restoration processing. A feature amount of a color of pixels in RAW image data obtained through photographing via an image pickup optical system is calculated as a first color feature amount. Restoration processing is performed on the RAW image data using a restoration filter for improving image quality degraded due to aberration of the image pickup optical system to thereby generate restored image data. A feature amount of a color of pixels in the restored image data is calculated as a second color feature amount. A pixel value of the restored image data is corrected according to a result of comparison between an amount of change in the second color feature amount with respect to the first color feature amount and a threshold value which is set based on a predetermined condition. | 10-29-2015 |
20150317772 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CHROMA NOISE REDUCTION - Systems and methods for reducing chrominance (chroma) noise in image data are provided. In one example of such a method, image data in YCC format may be received into logic of an image signal processor. Using the logic, noise may be filtered from a first chrominance component or a second chrominance component, or both, of the image data, using a sparse filter and a noise threshold. The noise threshold may be determined based at least in part on two of the components of the YCC image data. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326753 | IMAGE TONE ADJUSTMENT METHOD, APPARATUS THEREOF AND COMPUTER STORAGE MEDIUM - The disclosure relates to an image tone adjustment method, an apparatus thereof, and a computer-readable storage medium. The method includes: fitting overlapping areas to obtain a first correction parameter and a second correction parameter, performing interpolation on each pixel of the target image to obtain a corresponding correction parameter, correcting the target image according to the corresponding correction parameters; fitting an overlapping area between the corrected target image and the first image, and an overlapping area between the corrected target image and the second image to obtain a first RGB three-channel linear transformation parameter and a second RGB three-channel linear transformation parameter, performing linear interpolation on each pixel of the corrected target image to obtain a corresponding RGB three-channel linear transformation parameter, and transforming the corrected target image. | 11-12-2015 |
20150332444 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device includes: a calculator that calculates a gray scale histogram for each color component of an image signal; a calculator that calculates, for each color component, a maximum and a minimum of classes having a frequency greater than zero in the gray scale histogram; a determiner that generates, for each color component, a histogram having classes each having an absolute difference value between the frequencies of adjacent classes in the gray scale histogram, and compares the absolute difference values in the histograms with a value to determine, from the presence or absence of an absolute difference value exceeding the value, an image type of the image; a generator that generates a gray scale correction curve from the calculated maximum and minimum for each color component; and a corrector that performs gray scale correction on the image signal using the gray scale correction curve. | 11-19-2015 |
20150332480 | METHOD FOR SUPERPIXEL LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT - A method and an apparatus for life cycle management for superpixels associated to frames of a sequence of frames are described. An area occupied by a superpixel in a frame of the sequence of frames is monitored. In case the area of the superpixel becomes smaller than a specified first value, the superpixel is terminated in the later frame. In case the area of the superpixel becomes larger than a specified second value, the superpixel is split in the later frame. | 11-19-2015 |
20150339808 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In an image processing apparatus, maximum values and minimum values of the classes of respective color components are calculated; the largest value among the maximum values of the color components is found as an all-color maximum value, color correction curves are generated, on the basis of the maximum and minimum values of the respective color components and the all-color maximum value, for color components other than the color component whose maximum value is equal to the all-color maximum value, and the color correction curves are used to perform corrections on the respective color components of the image signal. The color correction curves are generated for performing corrections such that, after the corrections, the maximum value of each color component is approximately equal to the all-color maximum value. Alternatively, the color correction curves are generated for performing corrections such that, after the corrections, the minimum value of each color component is approximately equal to an all-color minimum value. Color casts arising from lighting effects at the time of imaging are corrected, and image contrast can be heightened. | 11-26-2015 |
20150347866 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - Provided is an image processing apparatus including a characteristic information acquisition unit that acquires characteristic information indicating a characteristic relating to at least any one of distribution of a specific brightness region and a size of a dark and flat region in a luminance image, an enhancement degree information generation unit that generates enhancement degree information indicating a degree of enhancement of a specific component that affects image quality of the luminance image, based on the characteristic information, and a luminance reproduction image generation unit that generates a luminance reproduction image obtained by reproducing the specific component of the luminance image so as to be enhanced to a degree of enhancement indicated by the enhancement degree information. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348238 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - Provided is an image processing apparatus including a color conversion unit that performs color conversion to convert an original image to a luminance image and to a chromaticity image, an illumination image generation unit that generates an illumination image having an illumination component of the luminance image as a pixel value from the luminance image, a reflectance image generation unit that generates a reflectance image having a stabilized reflectance component of the luminance image as a pixel value, a luminance reproduction image generation unit that enhances the reflectance component of the luminance image to generate a luminance reproduction image reproduced with being improved visibility of the luminance image, and an inverse color conversion unit that performs conversion inverse to the color conversion performed by the color conversion unit on the luminance reproduction image and the chromaticity image. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348241 | METHOD FOR REDUCING ROW AND COLUMN NOISE IN IMAGING SYSTEMS - A method for the reduction of noise in an image including identifying neighboring pixel values in pixels proximate to a subject pixel; comparing the neighboring pixel values to a preset tolerance range; using neighboring pixel values within the tolerance range to calculate a pixel intensity correction value; and applying the pixel intensity value to the subject pixel. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348244 | Blind Defringing For Color Images - This disclosure pertains to novel devices, methods, and computer readable media for performing “blind” color defringing on images. In one embodiment, the blind defringing process begins with blind color edge alignment. This process largely cancels every kind of fringe, except for axial chromatic aberration. Next, the process looks at the edges and computes natural high and low colors to either side of the edge, attempting to get new pixel colors that aren't contaminated by the fringe color. Next, the process resolves the pixel's estimated new color by interpolating between the low and high colors, based on the green variation across the edge and the amount of green in the pixel that is being repaired. Care is taken to prevent artifacts in areas that generally do not fringe, like red-black boundaries and skin tone. Finally, the process computes the final repaired color by using luminance-scaling of the new pixel color estimate. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348245 | COLOR CORRECTION PARAMETER COMPUTATION METHOD, COLOR CORRECTION PARAMETER COMPUTATION DEVICE, AND IMAGE OUTPUT SYSTEM - A color correction parameter computation method includes: obtaining first color-signal values respectively corresponding to colors of color patches and obtained by photographing a color chart having the patches thereon, and reference color-signal values respectively defining the colors of the patches; computing, for each color of the patches, a color difference component between the first and the reference color-signal values; selecting at least one color of the patches by comparing the magnitude of the difference components; computing a color correction parameter using the first and the reference color-signal values corresponding to the selected color; computing an accuracy measure using the difference component between a second corrected color-signal value obtained by correcting a first color-signal value corresponding to a color other than the selected color and the reference color-signal value defining the color other than the selected color; and determining correction accuracy by comparing the accuracy measure to an accuracy criterion. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348246 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOCAL TONE MAPPING - Systems and methods for local tone mapping are provided. In one example, an electronic device includes an electronic display, an imaging device, and an image signal processor. The electronic display may display images of a first bit depth, and the imaging device may include an image sensor that obtains image data of a higher bit depth than the first bit depth. The image signal processor may process the image data, and may include local tone mapping logic that may apply a spatially varying local tone curve to a pixel of the image data to preserve local contrast when displayed on the display. The local tone mapping logic may smooth the local tone curve applied to the intensity difference between the pixel and another nearby pixel exceeds a threshold. | 12-03-2015 |
20150348249 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - Provided is an image processing apparatus including an acquisition section that acquires an object image which is an editing object, a feature quantity acquisition section that acquires a feature quantity of a reference image which is referred to when the object image is edited, a feature-reflected image generation section that reflects a feature of the reference image on the object image by using the feature quantity acquired by the feature quantity acquisition section, and generates a feature-reflected image which is the object image on which the feature is reflected, and a reflection degree changing section that changes a degree of reflection of the feature in the feature-reflected image by using an adjustment value which is input by a user. | 12-03-2015 |
20150363916 | LOW POWER DEMOSAIC WITH INTERGRATED CHROMATIC ALIASING REPAIR - An apparatus and method for demosaicing sampled color values are provided. The method includes sampling color information respectively at a plurality of subpixels using a plurality of photo detectors, sampling color information respectively at a plurality of subpixels using a plurality of photo detectors, generating a high frequency color reconstruction solution for the first subset of the plurality of subpixels corresponding to subpixels for which the first color is sampled, determining color values for the first subset of the plurality of pixels using a combination of the low frequency color reconstruction solution and the high frequency color reconstruction solution, and determining, using the first color values for the first subset of the plurality of pixels, color values for a second subset of the plurality of subpixels corresponding to subpixels for which the first color is not sampled. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365624 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING IMAGE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR THE METHOD - A side-channel encoding method for an electronic device is provided. The side-channel encoding method includes converting an original image into a down image by downscaling the original image, converting the down image into an up image by upscaling the down image, calculating a pixel-specific luminance variation between the original image and the up image by using a local average luminance for each pixel included in the original image, converting the pixel-specific luminance variation into a first variation binary signal by binarizing the luminance variation, converting the first variation binary signal into a second variation binary signal by simplifying the first variation binary signal, and outputting the second variation binary signal by including the second variation binary signal in the down image. | 12-17-2015 |
20150371370 | IDENTIFYING GRAY REGIONS FOR AUTO WHITE BALANCING - Examples of the disclosure accurately define a gray region for automatic white balancing. Ratios corresponding to possible gray areas are white balanced before color distance metrics are calculated with respect to white points under different light sources. The color distance metrics of each point in the image data are compared with a predetermined threshold value to identify a gray region. Gray points within a captured image are identified using the gray region and input to any AWB method to accurately white balance the captured image. | 12-24-2015 |
20150379696 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - The image processing apparatus is configured by including a palm luminance estimation unit and a surface reflected component enhancement unit that separate low-frequency components from a signal indicating luminance values of pixels of an input image, a denoising processing unit that executes a denoising process for the signal from which the low-frequency components have been separated, and a merging unit that generates an image by merging the signal after the denoising process and the low-frequency components. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006904 | REFERENCE COLOR SELECTION DEVICE, COLOR CORRECTION DEVICE, AND REFERENCE COLOR SELECTION METHOD - A reference color selection device includes a determination unit that compares a first and second magnitudes of a first second candidate colors with respect plural wavelengths and determines whether or not there is any wavelength that provides a reverse magnitude relationship between the first and second magnitudes reverse to a magnitude relationship at other wavelengths, the first and second candidate colors being included in a color group of reference colors used in color correction of a target color; and a selection unit that selects the color group as the reference colors when there is not a combination of the first and second candidate colors about which the determination unit determines that there is the wavelength that provides the reverse magnitude relationship in the color group to be the candidates of the reference colors. | 01-07-2016 |
20160012570 | TRANSFORMING WIDE DYNAMIC RANGE IMAGES TO REDUCED DYNAMIC RANGE IMAGES | 01-14-2016 |
20160027155 | RESTORATION FILTER GENERATION DEVICE AND METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGING DEVICE, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A restoration filter generation device that generates a restoration filter for a restoration process on the basis of a point spread in an optical system, the restoration process being performed on luminance system image data as image data concerning a luminance which is generated on the basis of image data for each color of plural colors acquired by an image pickup device having the optical system, the restoration filter generation device includes a first transfer function acquisition device, a correction information acquisition device, a second transfer function acquisition device, a third transfer function calculation device, and a restoration filter generation device that generates the restoration filter for the restoration process on the basis of the third transfer function calculated by the third transfer function calculation device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160027156 | RESTORATION FILTER GENERATION DEVICE AND METHOD, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD, IMAGING DEVICE, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A restoration filter generation device which generates a restoration filter for performing a restoration process on luminance system image data, the restoration process being based on a point-image distribution in an optical system, the luminance system image data being image data relevant to luminance and being generated based on image data for each color of multiple colors, the restoration filter generation device including an MTF acquisition device which acquires a modulation transfer function MTF for the optical system; and a restoration filter generation device which generates the restoration filter based on the modulation transfer function MTF, the restoration filter suppressing an MTF value of image data for each color of the multiple colors to 1.0 or less at least in a region of a particular spatial frequency or less, the image data for each color of the multiple colors corresponding to the luminance system image data after the restoration process. | 01-28-2016 |
20160027157 | RESTORATION FILTER GENERATION DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE - A restoration filter generation device according to one embodiment of the present invention includes: an information acquisition unit that acquires information showing a difference that depends on a color of an optical transfer function of an optical system; and a restoration filter generation unit that generates a restoration filter, which weakens restoration strength according to the difference that depends on the color of the optical transfer function on the basis of the information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and makes the restoration strength of the restoration filter weaker than the restoration strength of an ideal filter decided assuming that the difference that depends on the color of the optical transfer function does not exist. As a result, the overcorrection is reduced. | 01-28-2016 |
20160027189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING SUPER RESOLUTION ENCODING TO PROVIDE EDGE ENHANCEMENTS FOR NON-SATURATED OBJECTS - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium, and apparatus for enhancing an edge of a non-saturated object are disclosed. For example, the method detects a plurality of transition pixels, determines a gray value for one or more of the plurality of transition pixels is greater than a threshold value, identifies one or more edge pixels from the one or more of the plurality of transition pixels that has the gray value greater than the threshold value when the one or more of the plurality of transition pixels is not within an input block of pixels having all of the pixels in the input block with a respective gray value greater than the threshold and applies an edge enhancement to each one of a plurality of input blocks containing the one or more edge pixels. | 01-28-2016 |
20160027190 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND LIGHT SOURCE IDENTIFICATION METHOD - An image processing apparatus is provided including a storage unit for storing relationships of color coordinates between a plurality of reference colors under each of a plurality of different light sources for each light source, with respect to the plurality of reference colors set in a color space and being different from one another; and a calculation unit for detecting color coordinates of the plurality of reference colors from an object image to be processed, and identifying a light source used in capturing of the object image according to a similarity between relationships of the detected color coordinates and the relationships of color coordinates stored in the storage unit for each light source. | 01-28-2016 |
20160035066 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMAGE COLOR ENHANCEMENT - There is provided a method and apparatus for image color enhancement, wherein the method comprises the following steps: S | 02-04-2016 |
20160035116 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - In a combined image obtained by superposing a character image on an image such that a second text rendered in the character image overlaps a first text rendered in the image, an image processing device according to the present invention determines a part of a character portion constituting a pre-translation character string, not covered by non-transparent pixels constituting a post-translation character string as a deficient pixel D, and corrects color attribute of the deficient pixel D in the combined image by utilizing color attribute of a part of the combined image or of the image. | 02-04-2016 |
20160055626 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING MODEL BASED ON VIRTUAL ALGORITHM - The present disclosure provides a model establishing method based on a virtual algorithm, comprising: a) simulating a single subpixel; b) simulating a subpixel array of a single color; c) overlaying subpixel arrays of different colors; and d) deriving a virtual signal. | 02-25-2016 |
20160063305 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device for correcting at least a portion of a face image containing a person's face, includes an image acquisition unit that acquires a face image, a region extractor that extracts a pupil region containing a pupil from the face image, a determination unit that determines a presence or absence of halation in the pupil region, a first template acquisition unit that acquires a first template image which is a correction template image, a reference color acquisition unit that acquires a reference color corresponding to the person from the face image, a second template acquisition unit that generates a second template image using the first template image and the reference color, and a correction unit that composites the second template image with at least the region in the pupil region where the halation occurred to correct the halation. | 03-03-2016 |
20160071251 | CHROMA SUBSAMPLING - A chroma subsampling having reduced artifacts is achieved by detecting high contrast areas in a luminance channel of an image to be chroma subsampled so as to partition the image into a first region composed of the high contrast areas and a second region distinct from the first region, with chroma subsampling the image in the first region using a first chroma subsampler and chroma subsampling the image in the second region using a second chroma subsampler, with the first chroma subsampler having a higher edge preserving property than compared to the second chroma subsampler. Thereby, bleeding artifacts may be avoided at least partially, while the saturation of the image may be substantially preserved. | 03-10-2016 |
20160071252 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMAGE PROCESSING - An image processing device includes a gatherer configured to receive image data and gather statistics of color data from the image data. The image processing device includes a processor configured to analyze the statistics of the color data to determine whether the image data includes single color data or multi color data, determine a first gain value to perform an automatic white balance if the image data includes multi color data, and determine a second gain value different from the first gain value using a gain table if the image data includes single color data. The image processing device includes a gain applier configured to apply the first gain value or the second gain value to the color data. | 03-10-2016 |
20160071289 | IMAGE COMPOSITION DEVICE, IMAGE COMPOSITION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An image composition device composites a no-flash image including a subject captured under ambient light and a flash image including the subject captured by emitting flash light to generate a composite image including the subject. The image composition device includes an input unit that enables the no-flash image and the flash image to be input, a correction unit that corrects the no-flash image and the flash image input from the input unit, and a composition unit that composites the no-flash image and the flash image output from the correction unit to generate a composite image. The correction unit corrects a color temperature of the no-flash image. | 03-10-2016 |
20160078605 | IMAGE RESTORATION METHOD AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS USING THE SAME - The invention discloses an image restoration method and an imager processing apparatus using the same. The method includes the following steps: receiving a haze image comprising a plurality of pixels; detecting whether a color cast phenomenon occurs on the haze image; if yes, calculating a plurality of Laplacian distribution values respectively corresponding to the color channels; determining a maximum distribution value and a minimum distribution value among the Laplacian distribution values, and generating a self-adaptive parameter by comparing the maximum distribution value and the minimum distribution value; adjusting the transmission map by the self-adaptive parameter so as to generate a adjusted transmission map; calculating a plurality of color parameters respectively corresponding to the color channels according to the Laplacian distribution values; and restoring the haze image by using the color parameters and the adjusted transmission map so as to obtain a restored image. | 03-17-2016 |
20160078638 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, METHOD, AND IMAGING DEVICE - An image processing device including: a color correction section that is input with an RGB signal, and performs color correction on the RGB signal; a YC conversion section that converts the color corrected RGB signal to a first brightness signal and a color difference signal; a Y conversion section that is input with the RGB signal, and generates a second brightness signal from the RGB signal; a processor configured to execute a process, the process including computing a ratio at which to combine the first brightness signal and the second brightness signal based on the RGB signal; and a combining section that combines the first brightness signal and the second brightness signal at the computed ratio. | 03-17-2016 |
20160086316 | REAL TIME SKIN SMOOTHING IMAGE ENHANCEMENT FILTER - System, apparatus, method, and computer readable media for on-the-fly captured image data enhancement. An image or video stream is enhanced with a filter in concurrence with generation of the stream by a camera module. In one exemplary embodiment, HD image frames are filtered at a rate of 30 fps, or more, to enhance human skin tones with an edge-preserving smoothing filter. In embodiments, the smoothing filter is applied to an image representation of reduced resolution, reducing computational overhead of the filter. The filtered image is then upsampled and blended with a map that identifies edges to maintain an edge quality comparable to a smoothing filter applied at full resolution. A device platform including a camera module and comporting with the exemplary architecture may provide enhanced video camera functionality even at low image processing bandwidth. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088194 | IMAGE COLOR CORRECTION - Corrected color components are obtained that correspond to an interpolation between a first and second corrected color component vector, in the first vector the color component are scaled to move a characteristic color component vector towards a target and in the second set the color components are contracted towards a reference determined by part of the color components. A position of the interpolation between the first and second corrected color component vectors is controlled by an interpolation coefficient computed from a ratio of an average value of the at least one of the color component in the input image or one or more reference images with similar content and an average obtained from the other color components of the input image or the or one or more reference images with similar content. The position of the interpolation is moved increasingly toward the second corrected color component vector with decreasing values of said ratio. | 03-24-2016 |
20160093018 | BAYER-CONSISTENT RAW SCALING - A system and method for scaling an image includes receiving raw image data comprising input pixel values which correspond to pixels of an image sensor; and filtering pixels according to a Bayer-consistent ruleset by a first scaling factor in a first direction and a second scaling factor in a second direction perpendicular to the first direction, wherein the first scaling factor is different from the second scaling factor. The system and method may also include outputting scaled image data as output pixel values, which correspond to subgroups of the input pixel values. The Bayer-consistent ruleset includes a set of filter weights and a series of scaling rules. The Bayer-consistent ruleset results in a scaled image having a high degree of Bayer-consistency. | 03-31-2016 |
20160104266 | DISPLAY APPARATUS AND DISPLAY METHOD - A display apparatus and a display method thereof are provided. The display method includes extracting a representative color of a first region of a display image, determining a color of a second region associated with the first region using the extracted representative color, and displaying the second region using the determined color. | 04-14-2016 |
20160104270 | METHOD FOR OBTAINING AT LEAST ONE HIGH DYNAMIC RANGE IMAGE, AND CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE - In one embodiment, it is proposed a method for obtaining at least one high dynamic range image via aligning and fusion of at least two low dynamic range images. The method is remarkable in that it comprises:
| 04-14-2016 |
20160104272 | AUTO-CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM - An auto-contrast enhancement system includes a human visual system (HVS)-based local difference (LD) histogram unit configured to build a LD histogram with respect to intensity values; a histogram classifier configured to categorize histograms of input images based on distribution properties; and a histogram equalization (HE) unit configured to process the input image according to a result of the HVS-based LD histogram unit and the enhancement level determined in the histogram classifier. | 04-14-2016 |
20160110845 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING COLORS OF IMAGE AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and a system for enhancing colors of an image are disclosed. The method comprises: converting the color components in an RGB color space of each pixel in an image into a hue component, a saturation component, and a value component in an HSV color space of the pixel; stretching the saturation component when it is greater than 0 and smaller than 1; converting the hue component, the stretched saturation component, and the value component into an enhanced red component, an enhanced green component, and an enhanced blue component in the RGB color space. Through the method, the phenomenon of color shift can be prevented, thus enabling the image to be brighter and vivider. Hence, the viewers' visual experience can be improved. The method can relieve the problems of color shift and picture washout. | 04-21-2016 |
20160110854 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present disclosure relates to an image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a program which highlight a main object more outstandingly. | 04-21-2016 |
20160117568 | System and Method of Adjusting the Color of Image Objects Based on Chained Reference Points, Gradient Characterization, and Pre-stored Indicators of Environmental Lighting Conditions - The invention relates to a system and method for adjusting the color of image objects based on chained reference points and/or light gradients to account for the effects of lighting conditions that can vary across different environments, according to an implementation of the invention. To chain reference points and/or characterize light gradients, the system may determine a color shift value, which represents the effects of lighting conditions of a target environment (in which the lighting conditions may be unknown) relative to a reference environment (in which the lighting conditions may be known). The chained reference points, gradient characterization, color shift values, and/or other information may be used to store a delta map that characterizes the lighting conditions of an environment so that it may be reused for subsequent color shifts without re-characterizing the environment. | 04-28-2016 |
20160118019 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device has a communication module which performs information communication with a color gamut information providing device for providing color gamut information concerning a color gamut of video data of a received broadcast program, a controller which acquires the color gamut information of the video data from the color gamut information providing device through the communication module, and an image quality corrector which restores the color gamut of the video data of the broadcast program, based on the color gamut information acquired by the controller. | 04-28-2016 |
20160125581 | LOCAL MULTISCALE TONE-MAPPING OPERATOR - In a method to generate a tone-mapped image from a high-dynamic range image (HDR), an input HDR image is converted into a logarithmic domain and a global tone-mapping operator generates a high-resolution gray scale ratio image from the input HDR image. Based at least in part on the high-resolution gray scale ratio image, at least two different gray scale ratio images are generated and are merged together to generate a local multiscale gray scale ratio image that represents a weighted combination of the at least two different gray scale ratio images, each being of a different spatial resolution level. An output tone-mapped image is generated based on the high-resolution gray scale image and the local multiscale gray scale ratio image. | 05-05-2016 |
20160125619 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DIRECTIONALITY BASED ROW DETECTION - A system and method for detecting and representing a directionality of objects in an image. A system and method may process an input image to produce a set of direction-filtered images, calculate a local gradient field based on the of direction-filtered images, calculate a magnitude of a projection of a local gradient on a predefined direction and use the projection to represent a directionality of the set of objects. A system and method may calculate a local orientation angle and associate the local orientation angle with pixels in an input digital image. | 05-05-2016 |
20160125630 | System and Method to Align and Merge Differently Exposed Digital Images to Create a HDR (High Dynamic Range) Image - The present invention provides a system and method to align and merge differently exposed digital images to create a HDR image. In the present system, all the modules starting from the receiving module to fusion module are configured to produce a HDR image with better colour purity and sharpness. Each captured image in the system is configured to operate in the HSI colour space. The alignment module is configured to align the pixels of each image in a pyramid shaped resolution structure to derive alignment vectors for one or more regional partitions of each image across one or more levels of the pyramid. The system is configured such that, the saturation component in the HSI colour space is used to pick the colour purity of pixels and intensity channel is used to weigh the sharpness of pixels of each of the differently exposed captured images. | 05-05-2016 |
20160140696 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND IMAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM - Image processing is performed in view of the difference between the chroma component and the brightness component in an image, with a relatively smaller amount of data processed during the image processing. A frequency decomposing unit | 05-19-2016 |
20160140702 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING AN IMAGE RESULT BASED ON AVAILABILITY OF A NETWORK RESOURCE - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for generating an image result based on availability of a network resource. In use, a request is received for one or more image operations. Additionally, an availability of a network resource is identified. Next, if the network resource is not available, a result is generated using a subset of the one or more image operations. Further, if the network resource is available, a result is generated using each of the one or more image operations. Additional systems, methods, and computer program products are also presented. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142587 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND MEDIUM - An object of the present invention is to provide a technique related to correction processing that can be applied to a variety of pieces of information with different resolutions, specifically, related to processing to increase resolution. The present invention is an information processing apparatus including: an acquisition unit configured to acquire first subject information and second subject information for the same subject; and a correction unit configured to increase the resolution of the second subject information based on similarity between the first subject information and the second subject information, and the first subject information and the second subject information are map data representing different physical quantities or map data representing the same physical quantity acquired by different measuring methods or different measuring devices. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142588 | IMAGE PROCESSOR, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - According to one embodiment, an image processor includes a processor. The processor implements acquiring a first image and first information. The first information indicates a condition of a first projection surface. The first information includes a first color gamut of the first projection surface. The processor implements deriving a second color gamut according to the first color gamut derived by using the first information. The processor implements converting a chromaticity of the first image to obtain a second image. Each pixel of the second image has a color included in the second color gamut. The processor implements generating a first converted image by correcting the second image based on the first color gamut. | 05-19-2016 |
20160148345 | METHODS OF PROCESSING MOSAICKED IMAGES - An embodiment of the invention provides a method of processing a mosaicked image. First, the mosaicked image is up-sampled along a first direction to generate a first intermediate image. Then, the first intermediate image is resized along the first direction to generate a second intermediate image. Next, the second intermediate image is up-sampled along a second direction to generate a third intermediate image. Afterward, the third intermediate image is resized along the second direction to generate a resized and partly demosaicked image. | 05-26-2016 |
20160155217 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD | 06-02-2016 |
20160155245 | METHOD OF MAPPING SOURCE COLORS OF AN IMAGE INTO A TARGET COLOR GAMUT OF A TARGET COLOR DEVICE IN TWO MAPPING STEPS | 06-02-2016 |
20160163027 | COLOR MOIRE REDUCING METHOD, COLOR MOIRE REDUCING APPARATUS, AND IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS - Provided are a color moire reducing method, a color moire reducing apparatus, and an image processing apparatus. The color moire reducing method includes calculating a plurality of local color mean values around a pixel in a selected region of a current image, calculating difference values between the local color mean values and a maximum difference value from among the difference values, and setting a moire correction weight to the pixel on the basis of the maximum difference value. | 06-09-2016 |
20160163060 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLOR CORRECTION - A method and an apparatus for color correction in an alpha matting process. A color retrieving unit retrieves an initial foreground color and an initial background color associated with a pixel with an original color in a region of transition between a foreground object and a background. An alpha value retrieving unit retrieves an alpha value associated with the pixel. A color correction unit then determines a corrected foreground color and a corrected background color from the original color, the initial foreground color, the initial background color, and the alpha value based on a minimization of an energy function. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165098 | METHOD FOR CORRECTING COLOR USING RGB DATA - A method for a color correction using RGB data without a color space conversion for the color correction includes the steps of: extracting a start hue value of color coordinates from RGB input data; extracting an end hue value, which is finally modified by a color correction matrix user, from the start hue value according to each hue control value of a red color, a green color, a blue color, a yellow colo, a cyan color and a magenta color (RGBYCM); converting input values R G and B, according to the end hue value, using a conversion formula for the corresponding input hue value among R, G and B conversion formulas; extracting a final saturation value from the end hue value according to an RGBYCM saturation control value; and calculating values of R, G and B according to modified start hue value, using an RGB color saturation value conversion formula. | 06-09-2016 |
20160171671 | IMAGE PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING X-RAY IMAGE, RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM | 06-16-2016 |
20160180505 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICES FOR SUPPRESSING COLOR FRINGE, AND IMAGE SENSOR MODULES AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES INCLUDING THE SAME | 06-23-2016 |
20160189354 | IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM, IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, AND IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing system, an image processing device, and image processing method are provided. Each of the image processing system, the image processing device, and the image processing method includes dividing an image into a plurality of areas according to a predetermined division condition, measuring an optical transmittance of each of the plurality of divided areas or data correlating with the optical transmittance as transmittance data, calculating the optical transmittance or the data correlating with the optical transmittance from the image as the transmittance data, determining a parameter for adjusting a contrast for each of the plurality of areas according to the transmittance data obtained by the measuring or the calculating, and adjusting a contrast of each one of the plurality of areas using the parameter determined by the determining. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191882 | DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT APPARATUS FOR LESION, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD IN THE SAME APPARATUS, AND MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAME METHOD - First extracting means of a processing unit, based on a brightness component and a color information component of a captured image separated by separating means, extract a candidate region using a first morphology processing based on the brightness component, and second extracting means of the processing unit extract a likelihood of a region from a color space composed of the brightness component and the color information component and perform a second morphology processing to generate a region-extracted image, which is displayed on the display device. In this case, the morphology processing including the smoothing filter processing is performed on an extracted candidate region and an extracted likelihood of the region. | 06-30-2016 |
20160196477 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FILTERING IMAGE NOISE OUT | 07-07-2016 |
20160253790 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR REDUCING CHROMATIC ABERRATIONS IN DECONVOLVED IMAGES | 09-01-2016 |
20160381253 | IMAGE PROCESSOR COMPRISING LOCAL COLOR PROCESSING CIRCUITS AND ASSOCIATED IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD FOR ADJUSTING BLUE LIGHT STRENGTH OF IMAGE - An image processing method performed by an image processor includes: receiving an image, wherein the image comprises a plurality of pixels having different strengths of at least one color; unevenly adjusting the strengths of the at least one color of specific pixels to generate a processed image. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381254 | COLOR GAMUT MAPPING BASED ON THE MAPPING OF CUSP COLORS OBTAINED THROUGH SIMPLIFIED CUSP LINES - For the mapping in a non-linear color space of source colors belonging to a same constant-hue leaf, a lightness mapping function can be used which is based on a cusp lightness condition stating that a source cusp color of this leaf should be mapped into a corresponding target cusp color of this leaf. Source and target cusp colors are determined by the intersection of a source and target cusp lines with this leaf. The invention describes a method providing simplified source and target cusp lines based on a convex hull algorithm which are used instead to determine modified source and target cusp colors for the definition of the lightness mapping function. | 12-29-2016 |
20170236259 | METHOD OF CORRECTING COLOR FRINGE AND METHOD OF PROCESSING IMAGE DATA USING THE SAME | 08-17-2017 |
20170236307 | SYSTEM AND PROCESS FOR COLOR-BALANCING A SERIES OF OBLIQUE IMAGES | 08-17-2017 |
20170237879 | COLOR MATCHING ACROSS MULTIPLE SENSORS IN AN OPTICAL SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20180027148 | IMAGE COLOUR CALIBRATION WITH MULTIPLE COLOUR SCALES | 01-25-2018 |
20190147573 | False color removal method | 05-16-2019 |
20190149693 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMAGE PROCESSING | 05-16-2019 |
20220138912 | IMAGE DEHAZING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND DEVICE, AND COMPUTER STORAGE MEDIUM - This application provides an image dehazing method, apparatus, and device, and a computer storage medium. The method includes: in response to obtaining an image dehazing instruction, acquiring a first image and a second image corresponding to a target scene at the same moment. The method also includes calculating, based on a first pixel value of each pixel of the first image and a second pixel value of each pixel of the second image, haze density information of the each pixel; generating an image fusion factor of the each pixel according to the haze density information, the image fusion factor indicating a fusion degree between the first image and the second image; and fusing the first image and the second image according to the image fusion factor to obtain a dehazed image. | 05-05-2022 |